KINS/HR-653
a*B| yyflKII Development of Nuclear Safety Regulation Technology
C|%IW 7||=*||01 Development of the Safety Regulation Technology for Digital Instrumentation and Control System
7198 SfiSAI ^711 S7p|#0|| ae y^dn) Evaluation of Technical Design of Advanced Information Display(lll)
2005.2
0t*7|»
S3 7i#s *11
oh ^ oh *j 7| - oj Xf. ^
a “7U i,tg sasg ^n%j\ ?i#oii a a-” n*\\ (Mia-aAii u ?n#@ 9 sha | ti7hi@7h 7i#o# ae ga nna x-ii## gel
2005 g 21!
g a 7| rw gsigai
g sh g Ah: Ah f a
g S: g e g
g S: 8 8 ®H
g S: g- $ §
g S: ?!lhS s °t ^
7iiyy ys-sy ^41 =§7} 7iiH yy y#ain
II. 4#7H1J-°| 444 nay
y#47> ^-g-sfsia zl 7,#o| niseis. yy#yy yy #yy## syy y^y yy-ys-^ ^y^yy o^sn. yeny yywyyiy ^ 611511^0] (stereotype)^ 3. 4# 4?]4 7}jl $14. #44 4# r] y« %44 sMsM^a 4-g-ya safe ^4% yy 4)4# &n y. 3 #4 714-# ##y CRT yy ^3LSX]V> yyy #yyy ## 7(y§ 4 Ji cl^fi-ellolSl ejy 7171] A|^ 4## (##, #4#) ^7} @4### £*«u, a-a-y yyey yyy y7f* yyy ^s-sy y #yyy #4# *y sn 54 4 #4 y^y y#7> yyy ba yy. fe 4#4 y# #Sfe CRT cl>i#e|H 33LE7.M CRT #4 444 4 yyy ## Tiiyy iii sy# ^Tim 4 =l #yy ###44 7] ## 7m#fe 544. 444 #s* #^#7] 444 344^4 y^tii #&# y^yyy. iy #34 y«44 crt y^#44 3g7 > yy y 7] #Ji^4## #4 fe4*M &#€ 7fl^y i^rny B7> yy# 7>yji 2 yy^y y#y^4# yyy yyy 4## #4 y^# #4 #4 y #4# ^yyyy. 4# 44^3 y# 34 y^yy 7nyy ys. y^i y 7>yyy- 44 y# ^7} yy y^o, 7^4 say. in. 4 #71144 L41S21 w°|
fe y#fe CRT c]7i*e||o) 44 lM4fe yy.S7.1( information display) y ^7}^y#4 444 444 444 3. 4444 44 44 4 #4 y#e yy^s y# yyyy 47}yy# 7iiyyyy. 343 y# y# 4#y yy# y#y#33 #444 #714*134 yyy *#yy *y# 444 ^44 #4 yzMiy y^g# 7^#say. IV.
£** l*MSi ti9-oM m#y 7l|e0^ ^7^y#o« me mmy# SMSM mem me me 3§7}%^o1| rfly
V. 7H^S2)o| eSTlIS!
# y 9-^74 #ye CRT cl^SBilo] g| CBP») 3g 7} yy ^ gj yy=)l 4% #y #4* a>^®.S ^7} yeifS fA£S ^ & ** ^o H] ff}e} 3g7> yyofl my yy e*M %-g-al %o)c}. e y 9-4^ CRT ClA*B|]ol ^7} PMASS) ^Ji3£A| 3^ A *ee*m -M y m»M cbp ym ee* mmim yy(APi400)=q sub-system^ CPS(Computerized Procedure System)^ &m yyy ^ IN* «*% mee ### #4 # y-947-i m#e 3047M em eem emm* e#e 3M4. my * ee ^m* myms crt ci^#=)]»]y 7i# yym me 4m e ^7} eye# ^n^emsm me 7«ee ymmmm %7\ me ms m mme MjREG-o7oo Rev.2 m me e**& meeemt mme e y* mem. me, em memm m-g- #m ye hf -okh crt mm #5fl°i ye*# ^7>*fecfl m em mss ##* # y* mem. SUMMARY
Evaluation of Technical Design of Advanced Information Display (III)
II. OBJECTIVES
As the computer technology is highly developed, the mental model of computer users including NPP operators has been changed from analogue display type-based stereotype to digitalized one. Therefore, it is necessary and confident to consider the issues to evaluate system suitability of advanced information display on visual display terminal. This document is intended for providing an updated and expanded set of user-interface guidelines that meet the needs of designing digitalized information display by finding the generic guidelines involving information display design issues, and the relationship among the guidelines. The design issues and resolutions from the finding may provide the cues for the designers and evaluators of the specific man machine interfaces of digitalized devices. The design review supporting system for advanced information display (DReSS-AID) was developed for the practical usage of evaluators-in-field, which was implemented with Hangul version guidelines. m. CONTENTS and SCOPE
This document covers human machine system interface issues associated with computer workstation used regularly in any places for text, data, and simple graphic processing tasks. The guidelines specified in this document applies to CRT used principally by a single individual with normal physical, perceptual, and cognitive capabilities. IV. RESULTS
In order to achieve the research objectives, in the previous research, tremendous guidelines and technical papers related to evaluation issues of information display on CRT has been collected, analyzed and transformed to electric database forms and then built on database management system to retrieve the appropriate issues for information display on CRT. From the system, the relevant evaluation issues and its contents has been finally developed through the consensus of the design review expertise. The design review supporting system for advanced information display (DReSS-AID) was also developed for the practical usage of evaluators-in-field, which was implemented with Hangul version guidelines.
V. APPLICATIONS
The results of this project may be applied to the experiment for validation of the collected issues. For examples, the corrcctivcncss of collection of CBP issues may be validated on CPS (Computerized Procedure System) on Korea Next Generation Reactor (AP1400), and CRT issues on PM AS. And another contribution of this research is that it would consider the new issues of CRT information display which need to update on NuregOYOO Rev.2 or HF010. 4l 1 # 44)5] 7^ ...... 1
41 1 4 4 ,Vf';i2: V:
41 2 t -:.H1 • 51 /IfMMt- %%...... 5
41 3 tr Ylr 7’1'il f-«§ U18- ^ -d:C...... 7
41 1 4 3-st 4^ V-4 ...... 10 3. g ‘>i 4 4 ...... 12 4. -8 4 f! V. 4'.r ...... 13
41 2 ?; 4 4 M/vi'liii'f, ss •'. r.; ...... 16 1. 4 44—(DReSS-AID) 4-0...... 16 2. V ^'i-hi^'SS ;u 4Vi...... 17 3. 44 MA^miivSs MU. v-9 t!4 ...... 21
41 4 -$> 4. > 7||ol 451-51 54-8-41 ?! ...... 41
41 5 4 #3-#% ...... 42
Appendix A: Evaluation Issues List on Information Display on CRT -Rev. 1- Appendix B: Evaluation Issues List on Information Display on CRT -t>#4- Appendix C: Evaluation Issues List on Information Display on CRT --8-444- ZLib' = ^ i ' 1.1] f...... 4 [Zl^] 3.1] *] "tl ...... 11 i. ' >,'! 3.2] =1# *: f! ^ ...... 12 [Zl^| 3.3] -g-oj ^ e] -r-y ...... 13 3.4] «!y»u;*i si^s) *|f! v f. gg...... 17 I 3.5] >iVl?l %' X-Wi 8- ...... 18 : - ’ s] 3.6] f! *1:2*1*! ^ ■>! ...... 18 [^y 3.7] '# y'r °o,->!...... 19
: . 'h'! 3.8] ^7} 41:4 2] 1-il g- «4'>i ...... 20 i 3.9] Jg7i 5]',''.°; 'g/ifi:1! °
3 A ^ 3 ^ MS <«*
* 3 iuh ^ r|n S w' iz*
>k o& J «|o ,» k to ill n>t Jl i ^ Els W 1
3 3 & »
3 °s: i b l> , I ;
j 3 $ Han SllTSt ? .. a t-n w
^ -=. a it g ,|:|! mm Hi
c& m|iu 3 0% $ bi
3 A I* ok k t
3 ± ra|o $ ni 3 '
ok - ok i 3 ^ * ,
o lo Ik-ltr -fs H^-dr Fo ix -wai g I# jo k s to to 6 to to A k to | o dj(j ^ ^ f M r|r to to to c0 ^ ,, k si ' * to to ^ to nM. * Ea ^ *fll to i|j H 4J to A ® to * to -tJ 4> n ill -fr -|j # m raj o& to to v *1 °a Hi: -Df iH rto P % ■? to to o0 _t=v o|o 1$ t° * Hi M a ^ rt to M mini * gto rato 4® to ^ * 00 x to to ,, S| (C 2 rr to <1 o|. |, to mini °1° • ^ I!" f IUf-1 1J 4> oSl X M X * to f! to to to to w ^ 411 to to nr to da to- " 0=1 to 5|#to tifc ft ffi to u o|r ojo oi n, to r|o 00 ^ ly >0 k tow to k »H k fA _oj. to, pf # rF | 1 k Hu to ie _i» ~ to m|iu 3 to * to X da a ja n f & min k ■* M to to
& X
*ii 2 # . <2j y\ ^n^ y » 444 44## 49-, 4% 444, 447} 44, 47« # 44^-4 4# ^4^}#4 44# 4^ 9( ##*}3 43 4 441 4-1- %#*}# 444S# 44#4 44# 444# 4#7}-bo) "N4 7)14 4H 7,)## 444 44#44 4-9-44- 44#4 444- # #4 44-7} C|^o H,) 4441 4)4 419-3341 9)4 444fe 4417} 44. 444, crt 4^*3144 44 4#o) ##55 #44# t))^ * 444 4Tll^N ^7}-&}7] 414 44 4#41 44 SN 41X1443 444 44 4^84 4317} #344 4534. stl 4444 4441 44 4444 437} 4#o)ls #443. 4-B.S4 47)14 #7}# 44 crt 43#e)14U cbp 44 444 4s. 44 4# 3#44 44 4-841 47)14 44 ##447)1 4444 4 4414 44 44# 44 4-8414 4#4 # 4 4#4 44 4444. 7)) 44 4S-5441 44 44#4 4S 444 IEEE-12894 NUREG/CR-66344 4# 44N1-S 4-8- 444 4444 44334 44 444 4444# 44 4#4#91 47)17} 44. 444 7)144 4S 5441 94 34 4141 443 44444 4441 44 49-7} #344 3^4 4- 4441 #3 4 44s} # # 44. M|iu # A ± r 1 ^ r» M, N & _E [»4 s*: II! Sl S> |d n> -a o» if? r£ isitiki HJ is I* ni£ Isiil H> r|u JL ; To * 1 Mi Vs iuM rlr ■ ^0 = o|o E It, - ^ ru niii
it“10FiF * x -la is, £ — s r[o min 0 S -|m 'Stl« >- Htt j* Mi ^ r$ ^ t ^ n£ ne “ ^ . "4-9-44M4 444 57) # 4*4 445 454 H°\ 44. (1) 444 4
?^£g y tsmi sow omn sws "012 3% swsj soiuhh Oil Af 1 :0.9 Ami XI- El 0101: tltk SX| 01^01 "012 S^OilS SXI-5J UrOkUHIir S± 1:0.5010101 t!Q. SWS SAH SOkUHIS) HIXI 1:1 010101 £10-.
(3) 444 454 55%44 4)545 4455 *5*14. (4) 444 44-7) o)f44 45 44 445-4 *5 444:4. ex) (3)~(4) [bTmi
- BUS #321 SB¥ g^OILI 2BMIHI 9IAI5I-3 5IB^2| g#0IU 2B4M tiHxIBBK ■ Siam oe Eia ai -oimi a±t» 23-21 a S3S sa I • owiga ag #S3 3eh *i jhmihi aiig 3 mm ximoi hhaisiioi sio.
(5) 454 “general ” #*5 "#444"5S 57)4:4. ex) L6.1 General (SltllAm) (6) 45* 44# 45, 455 4*4455, 4*5 4*5 57) 44. ex) [jxljHl7||£*#35IAI2.1 , j^ferToZz 3Omlrei/Luk*^, '{ a ft ftST Jr a- * f t fJ t r ft ft-g-E-ft ftftft ‘TTft ?ftft-§-ft loft ftftlftft ft ft-S'
•{aftftlk #lft ft ft ^ "{ alaft f t f t f t t-lb f t f t ft ft f t f t fft-g- t # f tf t t f t fU) t (3) 3# #47} 44 7>4 7^U SUfe 4# “#44 el” #441 4444. ex)
2. ti#S} 43 94
4*4 434 9-4# 4# 434 944 #g*M #4 4#* 345- 71 4-E.4 ^3^4. °-x ]S$c}. 4# [0-4-3.1)4 [Z7i8-3.2]-b 4 7M = e}44 94* 4& 5.4 #4.
7}. 44 44 44 44 44 “4#(4*)“5. *44^4 444. 4444 #4 4444 444 4444 -8-45-4 44# 44 4#4a 4a, 44414 4541 S 4# 4 4a# 44 444 444 4»# 44 $4444.
4. 44 444 34# 4144a, a41 44 a3# 4444 434 4#4 a ## ## 44.
4. 4^-44 4#4 criteria*)] *11444 *#5.a 4 444 c(]s> 44 4##& 9 444 44. 434 4# 4441 4e} 47)44, 4444 4#% # 47] 4#4) 4 4441 4% “4|#^*as *44514. eh criteria)^ ^v>, 2}-g-*H=q SL^o] 5]-b q-g-AS.
2.7.5 Menu Type Z.7.5.4 Cascading Menus
Definition: Cascading Menu is a type of hierarchic al menu in. which a subme nu is attached to the right side of a menu item. Cascading menus can be added to drop-down menus, pop-up menus, or even other cascading menus.
a. Every cascaded menu item that le ads to case ading menus shall be marked with a cascade indicator after the menu item name . b. Because cascaded menus require the user to remember where options are located or buried (the original menu maybe partially hiddenby the new cascaded menu), the number of levels shouldbe limited to
Cascaded menus should be considered when the menubar is crowded and the grouping of options is obvious to the user.
[^H-3.i] ^ qy 9^
-11 - [;i3-3.2] 33 ^
3. #3 33
%#7}o|j=e|.«l fM [^.U-3.3]^ 401 ^ &*°\. ^4 4t> 33# 3333 "#333"# 4#3&3. %|^3 ## 3 ^o|* ^ #* 3#, 3## 33# 4##*.s*] 333 3-8-4 s. ## # 4= 91# 333. p ni S "1 3IAI3I2I SHEES aa?l g 4= ME 4=8 TIBI. mis, mis OSSSITI ^93 S2IEI0I £01E §£. StlOlU SS § g*IM SSEIAI E20IU 99B5. gilEIE 518 01 LICK
nyc-iioiy ana = y 3 syej 3*125 LIE!LIE i!2| gs* Aiy ”E£ g|3l°l 93(10,1 quia 5.
ss-k smss sesi soi 2.75.9 g°j «2 *S 31=8 4=*JAI3I3I ?l@ 31. 3198 SSEi(PC)OII (11 mi 5-203131 B±l2y 5!^ EE S9M ?|S|*I ilEtfl FI, F2, F3 »S£ BAIEKH MCI. 31s 3IE ESSIES
±B£?JI0(U 83 330 EE AI8AI3I ESI AIS6IE E> S SI01 LI #4= 315® y 31 011 SSeiOt 0121 3|9jAI 31 52, mu°l 31s 3198 ¥5:31 LI 35S 31 EE S! = 3l(Alt Ley) S CIS 3121 SgtlAi ¥EE£# SS8 Ee46I2 S#AI3IE a AIB9CI. SRI: SSSti HESI 801
[dU-3.3] -g-444 44
4. -0-4 45-
##4 44414 -0-4* v >e}v ||7| 4#4 -g -44 4«q# A
#4# ?l-olHB>a^ # 44-51- 43-4^4. -0-44 44# 4#441 & ##4-£# 4-0-#7| 444 4&## 4#4 #4.
7K 44
(1) NUREG-0700 Rev. 2 Title: Human-System Interface Design Review Guidelines Publishing Organization : Division of Systems Analysis and Regulatory Effectiveness Office of Kuclear Regulatory Research U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Preparing Activity: J.M O'Hara and W. S. Brown, BNL/ESTD P.M. Lewis, J.J. Persensky, NRC/RES/DSARE Published: May 2002 Security Classification : unclassified
(2) MTL-STD-1427F Title: HUMAN ENGINEERING Publishing Organization : Department of Defense Design Criteria Standard Preparing Activity: U.S. ARMY AVIATION AND MISSILE COMMAND Data Published : August 1999 Security Classification : unclassified
(3) DOT/FAA/CT-01/08 Title: Computer-Human Interface Guidelines: A Revision to Chapter 8 of the Human Factors Design Guide Publishing Organiz ation : Federal Aviation Administration Preparing Activity : Vicki Ahlstrom, Kelly Longo Data Published: April 2001 Security Classification: unclassified
(4) D0T/FAA/CT-03/05 Title: HUMAN FACTORS DESIGN STANDARD: chapter 8 Computer Human Interface Publishing Organizatio n: Federal Aviation Administration Headquarters Human Factors Division Preparing Activity : Vicki Ahlstrom, Kelly Longo, Titan Systems Data Published: 2003 Security Classification : unclassified
(5) NASA-STD-3000 Title: Man-Systems Integration Standards NASA-STD-3000 Publishing Organ ization: National Aeronautics and Space Administration Preparing Activity: Boeing Aerospace Company(BAG), Lockheed Missiles and Space Company(LMSC) , Essec Corporation, CAMl'S. Inc. Data Published: July 1995 Security Classification : unclassified
(6) MIL-HDBK-1908B Title: Department of Defense Handbook-Definitions of Human Factors
Publishing Organization : U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Command Data Published: August 1999 Security Classification : unclassified
u}. Sa Me
(1) http: //al Idle, empas. com : • tlS S?!, S ^
(2) http: //vrow. usabilityfirst. com : Usability Glossary (3) http: //wo rd, tta. or. kr: SS-"o"ti 9%
(4) http: //wv.'w,designdb . com/: S c]a }61 -g-o^Aj-S *11 2 *1 ^]^A)>.B9(DReSS-AID)
444** *4 ;if#@ 47,, * e# ** 71*4 a,* * 41 4^ 4* 43KS-4 ^7,44* 7fliM$ic}. 4#
1. 4*4^(DReSS-AID) 7,*
7}. 44 4}6] 7,* CRT cl^-S-elM 441 444* ^JiSAKinformation display)*, ^7} l l I y*e»ii 4% 4^4 4^4 ^ 4*44 n« ** s *4 *** SLS. 7fli}51 2,# *131*$} *7}A,4* 4}*1# * 44. de,Jl 7,e 4*4 %, 7}* ti"g- 44.0.5. «14*M 41*4514. =L * °}4 4, * E 444 *5 4 *,5 $}*]$} * 515* 4S34.
4. 44 7,* 444,4 4-g-s,* -g-o,* 47444 4,4* 44* * 4* 0),A, A„So,v}, 4-8-0,, A, 7,4}H * 40, 7}*$} 3. o}C,3}, *5 44*} * 4 44 7}**}c}.
4. ^7} a,3J 7,* ^7}* i> 4 A,A,2, as *}4f ^7,47, 0,^4. 4* 4M4 ^7}*} a M* *** 444:a 4*44 ^7}e,Aa* =>hs 7,*4 a 3g 7}e, 7,a* H}B0iaa 4447,^0,17, 47}* 4 * 44. s«, 47}$} 4** 4444 47,= 4*5. a ,44a 44* * 44. T F|o tin jp 'k i* C w r| 7 ^ Tim Hi! ~ -8S! , T A- S ^ o" Kh + 4 - J kJ <# M f ^ # 9 -2 : It T rp # «n jm 5 Mn t UT ??* r mlm K oV ^ 6r oJ i» jp 7 °P %- w ^ mi fS^Jl sn *T « 1 4 Numeric Data NMNjNNgNKMNMNNN gg^ggBBgBNBKgg N=#M0NS3SaBHBB a=gB0gggBK8gB|BN g05BMNB00NSB#0g|gK| —ggg —_g___ —g ——g_ . QI oieje o^yio^^s M§nM tJ5i ses utyuHOf m. . BE ME^iSSoi Eioiofm. . ^xi ^be B^ie at^ot sib, @^°i -s s - "Iell 3^r|-'|| tlM^nl 31 rj MB0N05gMKgBlggNr*" -j i . 0(zero)BB A1*|S|E 4^x| H?IE AIS5IXI ^ ! my-3. 5J ^ y^rMl-S- ggmgggggaga 3 5 V^r. 1 In-vgidleU Guideline 1 DISPLAY ELEMENTS > 1 4 Niiim-Ii. ______1 -1 Nlim-il' D il i MNMNimNMBNNMN KeTer eiic.'s iMJPEGJ’OO HEV J] 1 ;v uumbe. hvil-i/ [MjnrCDTORe.V] I is; L-aci-g Zens N11HEGU7.JCJ RtV-2] -75-A Distiia, l!ei.|> [nii-3.6] 'ti-tiSMS s}’S-S| 18 - U. 47} 4?} *4* 3.7fl 271(5-1 **5144, 41*433 37% 5] 443 & c}*4 *44^4. 47}#4* 4** *** 47}4333 ** $ 4 **M 47}#433 #4*4 * 4*. [311-3.7]* 4***4 *441* *4* **@4 47}#*33 34% 444*. [3#-3.81* 47}#* 51 vfl-g-3 **# 4= % 4433 47H 3*# *4, 4% *@4 4 ***. [34-3.9]* #4*- **33 47151337} 4443 4714-4-4 *** 4444 47}**** 4*@444 47}**# 44# * #4. 3 44* 344145} @4 5443, 514* 4* 4-444 347} *e}4 33 7)44** 44# * 4c}. t:™row s ##00#m00 -x 000# mMaaa -mm- g0g00000 jgggggg 000000#0M 00000000 gNggg L-imcp*vy J «000 #000000# ##000##0#0 00#0#0#0 0N00000# [34-3.7] 47} #451 44** **44 - 19 - I DISPI AVEI CMCrirS 1.0.1 Geneiril Wifir 'nMMWMWMiai Definition i i ! i I [ZLU-3.8] g 7} aj-tgs] <$<* 1 BgggBMNMM BO \ ■ ■ -: * <5 -:J 1 DISPLAY FI CMCIfTS 1 6.1 Genet al IMMNNBBMB Definition gMMMgggBMgMMB gg# id #MUBMMBNBHB MNMMBMMBM# I'JlGnttwity 1 MBBMMgMMMN Dibcn pa-icy J MMNBMBBMM lia" # MB TJ #BMNMNMMlMNB MMMMMMMM MB''' 0 MMBMNMMMM MBBMMMMMI # MMMMMMNM BMBBMBBMM0 MMHNNNNNNM gMM&00g ——jg [0.^-3.9] *$7} WS] - 20 3. 4^4^@(DReSS-AID) 4-§" 4^ 4447^4 4-§-4 444 444 444 44?! 7]%-# 4-g-4a4 4 44 case4 4*1 44-5-3. 444 444^4 44. °1 444 DfieSS-AiDS] JE-&44 4444 44-13. 44 444 =-§■# 43-4 44. 7}. 44 41 (l) 44 44 47}e|>iE4 444 44# 4*344 44 44#3. 444 44 5a% l^EUE a^KQ) g^El^g £7lihEi B^EIig g7K Cj • S7EI±B S5KS) I b JEiiM as oiese %@ (7» 17}S)7-E #4 4-8-47} 0)4 444 ^7)e|iHf 444a, 444 47}e)^s* 444 S4ti4. • 4444 [4l4447}s)7iS. <@4)# 4444. • “14 4444”44 aaA}4^ l7}e)AS. 44(*.eva )# 444a. 1 4# 4444. (U) 0$, 0 0, 7fB)^m7f 2 7M^&N §7]-BlAM»] ^7}e]^sm 3g7fel>^H 1 1.1 12 DISPLAY 1.1.5 1.19 1.1.6 1 1 1 1 1.1 1.1. 1.7 1 1.4 1 Labels Character 3 ^ 6 -i Font Character Character Character Character Bel*rei=n-Line BervreeivAero between-Charscter Detwesn-Pa-zoraph I -Ki §7} ELEMENTS Jl7|if 3§7} Sticks width Heiiht Contiarl spacing 47f7f Spacing Width 3u7] spacing spactna ^if# if^ofl Discrepancy Discrepancy if ^17) N/A m N/A OK OK OK ^ 2-lf- [4 if J [3 J J J j J [5 J 3"^ - < ti3-[ 22 V ^rf. 4^1 Er-4 ' i < ; criteria Definition 1.2 5 g7Hl^^ #4 a Labels oiaitfci t a a S*I2 on S53 aniAib ^7|if ?5ut &7|#]# X]<1C}, (C» 5g7}el^E ^7] • • nj-et y^H ^7|-S|^E6] ig^rsj vfl-g-o) &JL 4^4 ^ ^ S-M #3# vfi-g-^ *m*Rr cns}^}7} uwc}. I1»I^PEISI&-LICK t; MOO—!i I 'on-is(N) [ • "4"# id4#^ ^fl-g-# 7-i^ji 3g7|-e|^m# tifech id4»M 4-g-# &2. ^7>el^E=. (e}) ig7]-e]A^ 3VW #6, Ig7>elAH»l ifl-g-.fr (nfl) 3§7}ejT^E c}# o]-gkg.3. «7fl 4 • 4fr^t4 [=|-'M]-[^7|-5|^E cfl# o|s.^ a)#]# id4td4. • "4* 0)#».S. *\ ^j-" cflS)-y-A}7> V>B}V>1^ B>y =fl G|#* “*1^ ” t>=f* JrflrC}. - 23 - (til) ^ jg7>e|is*] Jg7> ^4* =}°as ^^sjci. m.*\ =} (4) #& DReSS-AID • 4^rMM [=}ti]-[^5.]» y«?yn>. • =5.zLs3 #&# y°m±r ^shm -?} “<* Ms.rLs«s #s.yy, “oki^-"* y«?yy yy DRess-AiD =s.R.y yy^s. sjs-yyy. .a -,-V.Viu .' -~; ssass sesfAiasum i Tnsi" 11 0H_i2(N) i • yy 2g7}B)^s7i- yy y-b y-Eiioi^. yyy yi-g-t- yyyy yy-s.y yyy 4-&# yyyy Eiiyyy7i- yyy. (2) S.7) PflJff DReSS-AIDiq i}yay# 5^5 71-^eS. 9-yy Dtl-rf »ke ) *«?miES^ E5KN) flB| tW 551SKO ; SS(M) SS 5BIEEI-°J B5I(K) SS 5raiEEhE! H5KE) SOI A® H5KI) SR sa 34 -#8}7}o)cg}y^^ 7}s|>iS# • • i & oS, (4) 7}e)7.E^ (Bl) (4) (7>) 41-^41 * 2g7>Bi3EeH] ^7}5]7lE^. e 7}o] 4 * Ai = | tM . jn^ -. B}SleH]Al 7}o]ce}o] [i7l]-[^7}B]3S y* rvi QT Aj. ^.y-7}o|CB}yo] I #«d I' ji ■■ , Bl]5 • %-Ta. - SI | syAig s|.yofl i 1 IJ M '[ G 3715} }.fi I AY uide** 7 ■'> J S7] 3L7] 4^ . tl Owt Chn'crlnr neiwH-r-.^aro. Botwepn-Lire FMrNTs »J£4. 37l$l =§7> ’ Sfiar = yc>. \ S-7] SA] ij: Vhrtft Cnnvr/r.i y*** S--acnq y*o_5. %** rgpl yc}. * r ,p..-, #4 4^1* inq " : :•} - 3g7}fl]3J=3L 26 a Sl3 Sl3 ^SM I | I | |'ITn I ^4 - Integrated # -M ie m nS 04 Fa [T Ti 2 1 ^7}Bl3S7} E ' #y INTERACTION INFORMATION windows DISPLAY display 4W. =o^ 413 Guideline *113. FORMAT elements Af^yc}. 7}olHB>»lol 371 CODING &Ai S " si a ] yy. 7> 7 f }^^ g 7}^^ y*l SI* 4 Si* 3g (n > )s > 57H —bK! S - 7 l7 / > ^ o ] ^ H B >J2_7| y y» j£A)s>n>. Integrated Guideline 1 DISPLAY ELEMENTS 1.1 Cl. n .. h ,• • 1.1.'. B.iw.-u- Lin-* .'ii.u iinj ", I L‘*iwcn-r-i3 si ic- Spar fit 1.1.3 Between-Line Spacing jK^*BAAo6m0KBdBHNbA#4 % I =.= vharji-fe- lor.'--,:i Definition 1,1 t tsM-OClpf l-Orw'it Between-lme spacing is the minimum distance between vertically adjacent J_‘l. U L-i.-nULf SI uku A1u‘J: characters at their nearest points. Spacing between 'ines shall be at least two stroke widths or 15% of character height. This space is in addition to any space required tor accent marks on upper case characters and descenders or lower case letters. jr-.t-c-s-'f’-a;-/;] .'' r n-i,i„sf Additional Information [ML STD U~'JF] 5 5.C 13 ts\3 aus-t q The interline spacing recommended for text displayed on terminals is greater than that recommended for orinted material. 5* 7M-S44 5,7) (Hi) #444 Ji7l -F47MH4441 4#4¥ #441 44 44* 5444. • 4*4)4 [-8-7)H#444 S.7U#. ^Bflel-c]. • 544 54 #41 544 44* 4^#^ 54 45(H)* ¥*4. • 54 55 51^44 55# 4444 44 4## 5444. • 544* 4444 5a. 54 45* ¥^-4 441 #44 54 44 >1=41 4444. The aspect of objects or bht sources which may oe desorbed in terms of hue, lightness tor •rightness 1. and satLration. additive color pr< colorimetric punty, PC subtractive color proce (4) 43. *4 ¥7) #5 741 = 2)4 444 435 *4*4 44* 5444 * 5 44. - 28 - • 4444 [34] 4 #3 #4 541* 4444. i ’ • #4 44 444 4-4# 4444. 44 4-44 395 9**4 fl 44 9334 4^54. “All"* 4444 5.-4 444 9##4 i£A 59 9334 $444. • 444 44 44 44# 4445. 44 444IS)# *#4. 444 * 4 444 444 4444 SW 9## 4 44 #4 9334 V} 4 ,5.14 3.3.7 Ccior (3) 3*5 4# ”3.5.44 3*44 ”35.44 54. *4 7)#33 9-45 4# (A) 3*9 9# DReSS-AID ”33.99 3*5# 3494. 3*9* PDF 493 4544 434 4-8-4 5#44 Acrobat Reader 5.0 444 4444 444 44. (4) 333Si 53 DReSS-AID ”33.si 4 44 43* 3444. - 29 - 44 T-l^Al^igDReSS* 449 7 444 (1) 4. } - f r tie 4 o (4) (7» 44 )= ^7}5)AE Case 44 44 b DHeSS-AID f«|7fo]Hei»J 4444. > 4444^14 44-^a oj # 4^ 43=4 444 ^*>7] 4444 yy 4*844 Kir® 4 ^ 4» iL7l 7!#^} 44 sf Technology!. 44. Design 44 " Advanced * 4# 44 Al #444 , right: Review 44 # 9*4 - 449 30 Information 44 444# - Supporting yy 444 7HS-5}4 4 :oiy@Kundi ^ Display #9 System 4444 7M National y#*«i h 4&4 44 4 ^7}S|7iS - vfl-g-* 8-44 444 ifly a, 444 44 s. * 4 ^ ## ti%4 «2^*l 1 DISPLAY ELEMENTS ■> 1.f. . Borders, Lines, and Arrows ; 1.5 Borders, Lines, and Arrows ' Definition j Ell¥2|fe :«£J 7r-&AI2J8 £dU*H= IS : | &ct.£!(-)£S^S So|CK£KafHC-» I y°| ajDifc xih -yioiy. OKWg#*BbdNBWAW|M|S » IOPI #g0kmug@^58@NW&wwA (4) -§-y-7t-o| = et- 4J44 vH-g-4- ty^s. # nfl, ■SL7|>^>g-(^^) = S.7] ■I Ab ^l 44 #444 ^7} 44-4 %a( 1.6.9 Flowcharts i ...... E Definition $S£5 EiS AI0I2.I £43 S3* 3 £ _« '■ ■ SSPI 4ISI Cfiom 815 (e» Ji7| 44 #4# ^*j-s-5] el7,E- ys. s}^ 4^-s)#. #^4## 4-§- # #48}a 4# s|^44 sfy^jL 4^ 4 ##44 Til El'S ^3, #-§-# SM# "r 4# 44 4|#44. JE 44Mi #-§-# 4= $a# 7i^# 4^-#^ 44. - 31 M) *14^ a}-§-^}7} 3g 7id^x> y^y* AdB41j. t &14. #y %-## yy y-sM tiE4^ -#4% CM 41 yt* 5}rg 41 iq SAl7> si)a|51ji, ys tiA] 41 y| *%^7} %4. (a}) ^7}el>,E yy 3g7}^7l* y*}±r 4i4#Jl AH^}ol ^7>el>,Sfl- 71^ J5JEL, yy*M ft#Ai Dfl-ifollA) 4i «IW. ^^4 Tfl^-513. Al4lS}3.A} y*}-b oT*& ■y^yci. =§7}5lA E B}y .EVAS %iygc}. 1 DISPLAY ELEMENTS >1.5 Bordets, Lines, and Arrows (4) ^7}e]>iE 41-01 4444 “4 44 47|-44* JM 21^44?” 44 414 44°l 4444. 1 DISPLAY ELEMENTS > 1.7 COLOR BfcH" . ■ EZ»®U Ji2»J : S; (Of) 3§7 fe)AE Jt7) 3§7}el^s 44 "444 57)44* J44#*44?“b}5 454 "4 "* 4444 54% 5*4 57}e)A3= %41 4*%4. (4) 5714 AS of#* 5444 45% 55 555 57}B|^s«l 015°1 o)n] oi* 5*. 544 «l#4 4 54 5455 #oJ44 455 444 44 54. sr^m§iSirLia- OE3 5tti2.ti»j (2) 5714-71 44% 57}e)7,5.44 #444 4 4*4 4% 57} 444 57} 44* 4445 44o)4. (7f) 5 7)4 AS -g-e)_$-7) 45% 57}e)7,M* #4* 4, 4544 4 1 DISPLAY ELEMENTS I Ss'5 M) »l^i B}oj ^7}b|ams -1 4<5 .EVAS. ^7}Blam 3}^# -a l7l* S-Bjyci. (4) 3§7}b!am 3g 7}6}.7J X} y %1-B-n} A^Sliy :^7)B|AM7} ^|-§-Eln}. 1.6.4 Lines and Curves 1.6.6 Scatter Plots and Trend Plots 1.6.7 Bar Charts and Histograms 1.6.8 Pie Charts - 35 - jp k ^ P T <1- ~ V Sin T W nj)r ft ft K W1 T rain) ft °lni ft W ft TV W V ft P 40 P W %r $ V W T fJ ft ft ft W w> I p w S 'o~ £ u a %»^ f W WJ * fj W> %r -Sr ^ fJ •ffj ft ts ft f ft M o|iu n)r W ft of 1° £° * * f ^ ^ M ST o" ft ft V S° mk # ^jGj X|: 1 gO'\' - ' 1 L'ISPLA. "I KMBF3 1.6.5 Areas 1.6.1 General Definition I.F.? Smiles. Labels, and 1.6.4 Lines and Curves Discrepancy 1.6.6 Scatter Plots and Trend kfl 1.fi ? Bar Charts and it. n.i. 1 n 8 Pie Charin 1 6.0 Flowcharts 1.6.10 Profile Charts and #389 Wf 1.6.11 Miinn; and Diagrams •'r:i"'e 6npl! "i r rofilejSl t»2 3E« sss^oioim. (4) ^7^ ^7}e}^ 3g7}»> f4y ^7} ^2}7} 7||A|5]J). t%7\ 454 it# 4# y«l#4 sa|7)- yy. SJBSaaerrLSvr-?: . g 1>u ;1 b" VFL a r ELEMENTS " 1.6.1 General i‘ h -tIi- 1.6.1 General Definition _ % 1.6.2 Scales, Labels, and 32|Eb im 0|y°| oysi g4=# Al-ol 1.6.3 Grids r 2 d 9 a## aEsyioi°i p 1.6.4 Lines and Curves Discrepancy 8 0|C| 1.6.5 Areas OK id 1.6.6 Scalier Plots and Trend ...... a. 1 FI 7 Rar Pharts and r nt H) ^7^3} ^7>e]AE0l|Al 3S7>y yy# y 44314 y 4 yy>47>gic yy. SL 444 3g7}e|AS 44 °M - 37 - ig7|-Bl>L5.6ll 7)5-9 5g7f $l£Sr _S-3>)5. % L A %!_>„¥.^-g- SMU, ^c|S H^T.) A%4 ofo|fj #S) 5lc). -S IH'IF) S7!<« ES?ftH) (#) ^7}^71 3§7}7f tf- flv> # «HS I V I * Ig7iel> L ^|7t] 99. (3) 3M7}#7| 94 %>## 94 4"§-47> 949, 3§7} fen] 94 ig7}* 3flo> # 9t, 49 9 -95 )0} 999 3§7>el>iE^ #s)#4 c}a] 5§7>1- 93., 94 °)4994 99^19. (7» 5§7}e]^E #S|^7| 9 99 414: "97}94"# (9) 4149 =§7>BlAE 999 97} 94-7} 7j#g 5g7}el^E.7|- 4-§-9c>. M*KU - ' - Et^ I Dlir-L"., ELCMfcliri 1.6.1 General 3 1.6.2 Scales, Labels, and Patter 3 1.6.3 Grids 3 1.6.4 Lines and Curves Discrepancy id 1.6.5 Areas ...... OKOK...... ]d|d 1.6.6 Scatter Plots and Trend Plots Discrepancy d 1.6.7 Bar Charts and Histograms 3 1.6.8 Pie Charts 3 1 1.6.9 Flowcharts 3 i 1.6 10 Profile Charts and Segmented Curve 3 i 1.6.11 Mimic and Diagrams 3 (9) ?%7\ 9#9 &7j# 999 97} 94# 443.7} 5} 4 4944 7)-^*^, 3M4SZM^S. AZi A 41499. I itaini ' J - 39 - (a o ' { ^ § £ S r t e :l y ^ A ({y) -S & o0 -0 Ju d° 01 & ri rx rlr Ru W 0 00 -0 da 0L rH * JH, mini * 00, J 4o 00 re 4- J& [U|[U nti, o0 Aa fM 5 S zS A \J IV 0 2 o0 nisi JE 3 u 1 s o(n 00 3 o0 00 JtL 00 e J* i0 6 r|o 5 00 I N , 0 91 4 s- <3^ *#^l 4 5 9944 3W CRT C1AS9H n! cbp3 =87} yy ## 9# 5 9^4 43 99* 9%9S =87} ^XX# XA}3jL -9-9. £ 4-^94 #S} 97} yy>4 43 yy 544 %-§#! 939. 5 35 44 a#3 CRT 9a#49 =87} 99 # PMAS2} 9 ax9 yyy 499# 93994 ayy 394 CBP =87} ##-# 39(APR1400)3 sub-systemy CPS (Computerized Procedure System)3 9S_ 5a | ##3 4 99 # 99994 %-g-i 939 . 8^ 94# #4 9 y#44 a*y 3047113 =87} 993 494# 3 #9 3M4. a9 a y# it}# 99as crt 9^#493 7|# #44 99 4s. 9 =§7} yy## 4a9 as*) 34 7H^«g 4^x93 =§?} 4 9 as a } #3 443 NUREG-0700 Rev. 23 33 9### 33 X3994 7)4# 3 y* 499. ay 331 44as a }#- -94 y# HF-0104 crt 9a#eil9 9### 37}#ytn d yy 4-xs y-g-% 3 at# 999 . «1#4 7«^ 45X43 ^39 444# 443 333 4#4 3 343 3a# # 3 3# 333. ae)a a }### #314 933 ay S3 94#a 34 37} 444 rfl*B 44a #a 33# a }## 3 yy. y#3 33# 71 #3 33 494#X9 49499 ##x# S3 3 3 # 5133 33 #331 43 3# #3# 91333 4#asi 33331 a }# 1 5AS 53. x3 3#3 99# #&H9 3#9 993 X994 43 =>}i£ 4#i 3 yy. 3 339 93 #4a DReSS-AiD# 7:33 93X93 y#/y# yy 9 99# 993a, 393 99# yyas. =87}# # y# 9 ## 99 39. DReSS-AiD# 99# a#-4as 3391 9#3 3 y# 934, 9a 3 933 4 3X3 (mental model)# 99X5. 7fl#94 A}#4 9# #y 39 «Mr3 ^a%9 4#9 7}## 4as. 59. 393 993 x#9# 99 A} 7(133 9ax9 [1] (2003) Aj^] ^717)^1 3^s> yjji!, *>9 # AMSM 7]#y [2] *HHf- (2004) 7fl=ct^ ^SJiLSA] ^7)1 jg7}7]#o(| 3j.y #9-11, y a }^## 7]*y [3] Nuclear Regulatory Commission. Human-System Interface Design Review Guideline(NUREG-0700 Rev.l), U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission. , 1996 [4] Nuclear Regulatory Commission. Human-System Interface Design Review Guideline(NUREG-0700 Rev. 2), U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 2002. [5] Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Computer-Based Procedure Systems'- Technical Basis and Human Factors Review Guidance (NUREG/CR-6634), U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 2002. [6] Nuclear Power Engineering Committee of the IEEE Power Engineering Society, IEEE Guide for the Application of Human Factors Engineering in the Design of Computer-based Monitoring and Control Displays for Nuclear Power Generating Stations (IEEE STD 1289). The Institute of Electronics Engineers, Inc.,1998 [7] Dept, of Defense Design Criteria Standard, HUMAN ENGINEERING (M1L-STD-1472F), U.S ARMY AVIATION AND MISSILE COMMAND, 1999 [8] Computer-Human Interface Guidelines: A Revision to Chapter 8 of the Human Factors Design Cujcfe(DOT/FAA/CT01/08), Federal Aviation Administration, 2001. [9] American National Standard for Human Factors Engineering of Visual Display Terminal Workstations.(ANSI/HFES 100) The Human Factors Society, Inc.,1988 [10] Human Factors Engineering of Computer Workstations (BSR/HFES 100,Draft Standard for Trial Use). The Human Factors and Ergonomics Society, 2002. [11] Dept, of Defense Human Factors Engineering Technical Advisory Group. Index of Non-government Standards on Human Engineering Design Criteria and Program Requirements/Guidelines (DoD HFE TAG #38). The Manpower and Training Research Information System (HATRIS) Office of the Defense Technical Information Center,1995. [12] Human Factors Engineering Guideline Document (HF-010). Korean Electric Power Corporation [13] David Marshall, X WINDOWS and Motif Programming, 1994 [14] Motif and CDE 2.1 Style Guide, Open Software Foundation, Inc, 1994 [15] Man-Systems Integration Standards NASA-STD-3000, Volume I • II, Revision B, 1995 [16] Department of Defense Handbook-Definitions of Human Factors Terms MIL-HDBK-1908B, 1999 [17] http://alldic.empas. com [18] http://www. usabilityfirst.com [19] http://word, tta. or.kr [20] http://www.designdb. com APPENDIX A EVALUATION ISSUES LIST ON INFORMATION DISPLAY ON CRT - Rev.l - CONTENTS 1 DISPLAY ELEMENTS...... A-1 1.1 Character...... A-l 1.1.1 Between-Character Spacing...... A-l 1.1.2 Between-Word Spacing...... A-l 1.1.3 Between-Line Spacing...... A-l 1.1.4 Between-Paragraph Spacing...... A-2 1.1.5 Character Contrast ...... A-2 1.1.6 Character Height...... A-2 1.1.7 Character Width...... A-3 1.1.8 Character Stroke Width...... A-4 1.1.9 Font...... A-4 1.2 Labels...... A-6 1.3 Icons and Symbols ...... A-7 1.4 Numeric Data...... A-8 1.5 Borders, Lines, and Arrows...... A-9 1.6 Graphs...... A-10 1.6.1 General...... A-10 1.6.2 Scales, Labels, and Patterns...... A-10 1.6.3 Grids...... A-l 1 1.6.4 Lines and Curves...... A-ll 1.6.5 Areas...... A-12 1.6.6 Scatter Plots and Trend Plots...... A-13 1.6.7 Bar Charts and Histograms...... A-14 1.6.8 Pie Charts...... A-15 1.6.9 Flowcharts ...... A-16 1.6.10 Profile Charts and Segmented Curve Charts...... A-17 1.6.11 Mimic and Diagrams...... A-17 1.7 COLOR...... A-19 1.7.1 Number of Color ...... A-19 1.7.2 Foreground/Background ...... A-19 1.7.3 Contrast/Luminance ...... A-20 1.7.4 Brightness...... A-20 1.7.5 Location ...... A-21 1.7.6 Pure Blue...... A-21 CSMLab.@KlT A-i CONTENTS 1.7.7 Pure Red...... A-21 1.7.8 Color Combinations ...... A-21 1.7.9 Chromostereopsis ...... A-22 1.7.10 Color Coding...... A-22 1.7.10.1 General...... A-22 1.7.10.2 Use of Color ...... A-23 1.7.10.3 Color Selection...... A-24 2 DISPLAY FORMAT...... A-26 2.1 Data Entry and Editing...... A-26 2.2 Text ...... A-28 2.2.1 Text Frames...... A-28 2.2.2 Formatting...... A-28 2.2.3 Abbreviations and Acronyms ...... A-29 2.2.4 Capitalization ...... A-30 2.2.5 Text in Windows...... A-31 2.3 Forms...... A-32 2.3.1 Fields...... A-32 2.3.2 Field Labels...... A-33 2.3.3 Layout ...... A-3 3 2.3.4 Navigation ...... A-34 2.3.5 Defaults...... A-3 5 2.4 Lists...... A-36 2.5 Tables...... A-3 8 2.6 Display Controls ...... A-40 2.6.1 Display of Control Options...... A-40 2.6.2 Icons...... A-40 2.6.3 Palettes...... A-40 2.6.4 Push Buttons...... A-41 2.6.5 Radio Buttons...... A-42 2.6.6 Check Boxes ...... A-42 2.6.7 List Boxes ...... A-43 2.6.8 Cursors...... A-4 5 2.6.8.1 General...... A-46 CSMLab.@KIT A-ii CONTENTS 2.6.8.2 Text Cursor...... A-48 2.6.8.3 Position or pointing Cursors...... A-48 2.6.8.4 Cursor as a Status Indicator ...... A-50 2.6.8.5 Multiple Cursors...... A-50 2.6.8.6 Multiple Display Devices...... A-51 2.7 Menu...... A-52 2.7.1 Menu Structure...... A-52 2.7.2 Menu Presentation ...... A-52 2.7.3 Menu Selection...... A-53 2.7.4 Menu Option...... A-54 2.7.4.1 Option Organization ...... A-54 2.7.4.2 Arrangement of Menu Options...... A-55 2.7.4.3 Wording and Coding Menu Options...... A-55 2.7.5 Menu Type...... A-56 2.7.5.1 System Menu...... A-56 2.1.52 Hierarchical Menus...... A-56 2.1.53 Pull-Down Menus...... A-58 2.7.5.4 Cascading Menus...... A-59 2.7.5.5 Scrolling Menus...... A-60 2.7.5.6 Pop-LTp Menus...... A-61 2.7.5.7 Tear-Off Menus...... A-62 2.7.5.8 Toggled Menus...... A-62 2.7.5.9 Graphic Menus...... A-63 2.7.5.10 Permanent and User-Requested Menus...... A-63 2.7.6 Menu Bars...... A-64 2.8 Procedure Steps...... A-66 3 WINDOWS...... A-67 3.1 Window Components ...... A-67 3.1.1 Title Bar and Title...... A-67 3.1.2 Border...... A-68 3.1.3 Working or Client Area...... A-68 3.1.4 Scroll-Bar ...... A-68 3.1.5 Message Bar...... A-69 3.1.6 Status Bar...... A-70 CSMLab.@KIT CONTENTS 3.1.7 Control Bar...... A-70 3.1.8 Push Buttons...... A-71 3.1.9 Action Icons...... A-71 3.2 Window Type...... A-72 3.2.1 Primary and Secondary Windows...... A-72 3.2.2 Application Windows...... A-73 3.2.4 Data-Entry Windows...... A-74 3.2.5 Text Windows...... A-75 3.2.6 Map Windows...... A-75 3.2.7 Utility Windows...... A-75 3.3 Message Windows...... A-76 3.3.1 Request Message Window...... A-76 3.3.2 Information Message Window...... A-76 3.3.3 Confirmation Message Window...... A-76 3.3.4 Warning Message Window...... A-77 3.3.5 Working Message Window...... A-77 3.3.6 Dialog Boxes ...... A-77 3.3.7 Error Dialog Box ...... A-78 3.4 Window Slates...... A-79 3.4.1 Open Windows...... A-79 3.4.2 Closed Windows...... A-79 3.4.3 Active Windows...... A-79 3.4.4 input Focus...... A-80 3.5 Window Operations ...... A-81 3.5.1 General...... A-81 3.5.2 Splitting Windows...... A-81 3.5.3 Minimizing Windows...... A-82 3.5.4 Maximizing Windows...... A-83 3.5.5 Restoring Windows...... A-83 3.5.6 Opening Windows...... A-83 3.5.7 Closing Windows...... A-84 3.5.8 Moving Windows...... A-84 3.5.9 Resizing Windows...... A-85 3.6 Window Navigation ...... A-86 CSMLab.@KIT A-iv CONTENTS 4 INFORMATION CODING...... A-88 4.1 General...... A-88 4.2 Color Coding...... A-89 4.2.1 Conlrasl / Luminance...... A-89 4.2.2 Brightness...... A-89 4.2.3 Location ...... A-89 4.2.4 Use of Color ...... A-89 4.2.5 Color Selection...... A-89 4.2.6 Color Coding for Discrete Data Categories...... A-89 4.2.7 Color Coding for Relative Values...... A-89 4.2.8 Unique Assignment of Color Codes...... A-89 4.2.9 Redundant Color Coding.... A-89 4.2.10 Unplanned Patterns from Color Coding...... A-90 4.3 Symbol Coding...... A-90 4.4 Spatial Coding...... A-90 4.5 Size Coding...... A-90 4.6 Shape Coding...... A-91 4.7 Pattern Coding...... A-91 4.8 Line Coding...... A-92 4.9 Area Coding...... A-92 4.10 Text Coding...... A-93 4.10.1 Abbreviations and Acronyms ...... A-93 4.10.2 Alphanumeric Coding...... A-93 4.10.3 Underlining Coding...... A-94 4.10.4 Bold Coding...... A-94 4.10.5 Numeric Coding...... A-94 4.11 Display Range Coding...... A-95 4.12 Flash Coding...... A-95 4.13 Texture Coding...... A-96 4.14 Multidimcnsion Coding...... A-96 CSMLab.@KIT A-i 5 INTERACTION- 5.1 General...... A-97 5.2 Command Language...... A-98 5.2.1 General...... A-98 5.2.2 Command Entry...... A-98 5.2.3 Editing Command ...... A-99 5.2.4 Complexity of Command Language 5.2.5 Spelling Errors...... 5.2.6 Abbreviation of Commands ...... A-99 5.2.7 Blank Spaces...... A-100 5.2.8 Punctuation ...... A-100 5.2.9 Use of Delimiter...... A-100 5.2.10 Wording...... A-100 5.2.11 User-Assigned Command Names... A-101 5.2.12 User-Requested Prompts... 5.2.13 Destructive Commands .... 5.2.14 Recognize Command ...... 5.2.15 Aiding Command Recall...... A-102 5.2.16 Confirmation of a Command ...... A-102 5.2.17 Feedback and Help...... A-102 5.2.18 Error Correction ...... A-102 5.2.19 Defaults...... 5.2.20 Execution ...... 5.3 Function Keys and Hot Keys...... A-103 5.4 Menus...... A-105 5.5 Form-Filling...... A-105 5.6 Direct Manipulation •••• A-106 5.6.1 General...... A-106 5.6.2 Manipulation of Objects...... A-106 5.6.2.1 Pointing and Selecting...... A-106 5.6.22 Scrolling, Paging, and Panning...... A-107 5.6.3 Manipulation of Window...... A-108 5.6.4 Manipulation of Control Icons...... A-109 5.6.5 Manipulation of Graphic Data...... A-109 CSMLab.fgKTT CONTENTS 5.7 Prompts...... A-110 5.7.1 General...... A-110 5.7.2 Prompting...... A-110 5.8 Feedback...... A-112 5.9 Status Information ...... A-115 5.10 Error Management...... A-116 5.10.1 Error Detection...... A-116 5.10.2 Error Correction ...... A-116 5.10.3 Error Management for Form...... A-117 5.10.4 Error Message...... A-118 5.10.5 Command Interaction Errors...... A-119 5.11 On-Line Help...... A-120 5.11.1 General...... A-120 5.11.2 Access and Return...... A-121 5.11.3 Context Sensitivity ...... A-121 5.11.4 Wording and Style...... A-122 5.11.5 Content...... A-122 CSMLab.@KIT 1 DISPLAY ELEMENTS 1.1 Character 1.1.1 Between-Character Spacing Definition: Between-characler spacing is the minimum distance between horizontally adjacent characters at their nearest points, Criterion: Horizontal separation between characters should be between 10 and 65 percent of character or symbol height or be a minimum of 2 pixels or one stroke width, Additional Information: Separation should not be less than 25 percent of character height when any of the following degraded conditions exists: (1) when character width is less than 85 percent of height; (2) when character luminance in less than 12 ft-L; (3) when luminance contrast is less than 88 percent; (4) when display is more than 35 degrees left or right of the straight-ahead line of sight; and (5) when the visual angle subtended by the character or symbol height is less than 15 minutes of arc. 1.1.2 Between-Word Spacing Definition: Between-word spacing is the minimum horizontal distance between adjacent words at their nearest points. Criterion : Spacing between words shall be at least one character width for equally spaced characters or the width of capital N for proportionally spaced characters. 1.1.3 Between-Line Spacing Definition: Between-line spacing is the minimum distance between vertically adjacent characters at their nearest Criterion : Spacing between lines shall be at least two stroke widths or 15% of character height. This space is in CSMLab.@KIT addition to any space required for accent marks on upper case characters and descenders on lower case letters. Additional Infonnatjon: The interline spacing recommended for text displayed on terminals is greater than that recommended for printed material. 1.1.4 Between-Paragraph Spacing Definition : Belween-paragraphs spacing is the minimum distance between vertically adjacent lines at their nearest Paragraphs shall be separated by a blank line. 1.1.5 Character Contrast a. For optimum legibility, character contrast should be between 6:1 and 10:1. b. Legibility may diminish with contrasts below 3:1, whereas contrasts above 15:1 may cause visual discomfort. Additional Information: There should be high contrast between the luminance of objects and the luminance of the background on the displays. The recommended luminance contrast range is 10:1 to 18:1. 1.1.6 Character Height Definition : Character height is the distance from the bottom to the top of character standing upright. a. The height of characters in displayed text or labels should be at least 15 minutes of arc and the maximum character height should be 24 minutes of arc. A visual angle of from 20 to 22 minutes are CSMLab.@KlT A-2 preferred for most task. b. Character height for reading tasks in which identification of individual characters is not time-critical should be at least 10 minutes of arc. c. As measured from the greatest anticipated viewing distance, the visual angle subtended by height of black-and-white characters should be not less than 4.6 mrad (16 min) with 5.8 mrad (20 min) preferred; the visual angle subtended by height of colored characters should be not less than 6.1 mrad (21 min) with 8.7 mrad (30 min) preferred. Additional Information: To account for both the size of symbols and characters and the viewing distance, visual angle should be used as the unit of measurement. Visual angles are specified in terms of minutes of arc or degrees (1 degree = 60 minutes of arc). 1.1.7 Character Width Definition: Character width is the horizontal distance between a character's origin (a point on the base line used as a reference location) and the next character's origin. Criteria : The ratio of character height to width shall be a. 1 : 0.7 to 1 : 0.9 for equally-spaced characters and lines of 80 or fewer characters, b. at least 1 : 0.5 if it is necessary to have more than 80 characters per line, or c. as much as 1:1 for characters such as M and W for proportionally spaced characters. Additional Information: a. Letters - The width of letters shall preferably be 0.6 of the height, except the letter 1 which shall be one stroke in width, the letters J and L which shall be 0.5 of the height, the letter M, which shall be 0.7 of the height, and the letter W, which shall be 0.8 of the height. b. Numerals - The width of numerals shall preferably be 0.6 of the height, except for the numeral 4”, which shall be one stroke width wider and the numeral 1", which shall be one stroke in width. c. Wide Characters - Where conditions indicate the use of wider characters, as on a curved surface, the basic height-to-widlh ratio may be increased to 1:1. CSMLab.@KIT A-3 1.1.8 Character Stroke Width Definition : Stroke width is the thickness of the lines that make up a character, usually expressed as a proportion of the character’s height. a. The stroke width shall be within the range of 1/6 or 1/12 of character height. b. A minimum of two stroke widths or 15 percent of character height, whichever is greater, should be used for spacing between lines of text. Additional.fafoirQat.ion: a. Height-to-Stroke Ratio - Marking letters and numerals shall have a height-to-stroke ratio of 5:1 to 8:1, depending on the application. b. Transilluminated Background - Opaque markings on a transiliuminated lighted background shall have a height-to-stroke ratio of 5:1 to 6:1. c. Transilluminated Markings - Transilluminated markings on a dark background or markings used on integrally lighted instruments shall have a hcight-to-stroke ratio of 7:1 to 8:1. d. General Purpose Illumination - Characters used on display panels and equipment when viewed under general purpose flood lighting or normal daylight conditions shall have a height-to-stroke ratio of 6:1 to 1.1.9 Font Definition: Font is a set of printable or displayable text characters in a specific style and size. Criterion : A clearly legible font should be utilized. Fonts should have true ascenders and descenders, uniform stroke width, and uniform aspect ratio. Additional Information: a. Preference should be given to simple styles. Script and other highly stylized fonts (e.g., shadow, calligraphy) should be avoided. Avoid typefaces that: have extended serifs, internal patterns, or stripes; are italicized, stenciled, shadowed or 3-dimensional; appear like handwritten script or like Old English script; or are distorted to look tall and thin or wide and fat. The basic evaluation criterion for font selection should be legibility. CSMLab.@KlT A-4 b. Sans serif typeface should be used for small text and low resolution displays. c. For maximum readability, serif fonts should be used for continuous body text as long as the typeface large or the resolution is high enough not to distort the serifs. d. Font - If a specific font is used, the Lincoln Mitre (L/M) font is recommended because its characters are highly identifiable, resulting in faster identification and few errors. e. The user should have the ability to change the physical characteristics of text. f. There shall be a limit of two different fonts displayed on any one screen. g. Multiple fonts should be used to indicate categories of information or for moderate emphasis. CSMLab.@KlT A-5 DISPLAY ELEMENTS 1.2 Labels Definition : Label is descriptor that is distinguishable from, and helps to identify, displayed screen structures or components. Criteria : a. Standardization • Labels should be meaningful words or accepted technical terms. Labels should describe the contents of the display accurately and concisely, without unnecessary words or characters. • The labels of screens should be alphanumeric. • When headings are located on the line above related screen fields, the labels should be indented a minimum of five spaces from the start of the heading. • Labels should be oriented horizontally so that they may be read from left to right. Vertical orientation may be used only when labels are not critical for personnel safety or performance and where space is limited. When used, vertical labels shall read from top to bottom. b. Location • General labels and row/column labels should remain along the top (or bottom) and left (or right) edges of the display. • Labels should be separated from one another by at least two standard character spaces. • The label for a specific graphical object (e.g., an icon) should be placed in close proximity to the c. Contents • Labels should be uniquely and consistently highlighted, capitalized (except where lower case letters or punctuation marks are indigenous to the item being identified), or otherwise emphasized to differentiate them from other screen structures and data. d. Consistency ■ Labels should be worded consistently, so that the same item is given the same label whenever it appears. CSMLab.@KIT A-6 DISPLAY ELEMENTS Icons and Symbols Definition: Icon is pictorial, pictographic, or other nonverbal representation of objects or actions. Symbol is a representation of something by reason of relationship, association, or convention. • Icons and symbols should always be oriented 'upright.' • An icon or symbol should be highlighted when the user has selected it. » Each icon and symbol should represent a single object or action. • Each icon and symbol should be easily discriminablc from all other icons and symbols. »Icons should be simple, closed figures when possible. ■ Icons should be accompanied by a text label. • Icons should be designed to look like the objects, processes, or operations they represent, by use of literal, functional, or operational representations. c. Symbols • Special symbols to signal critical conditions should be used exclusively for that purpose. • When a displayed symbol of complex shape is to be distinguished from another symbol shape that is also complex, the symbol should subtend not less than 20 minutes of arc at the required viewing distance, • Where size difference between symbols is employed, the major dimensions of the larger shall be not less than 15 0% of the major dimension of the smaller. Not more than three size levels shall be used. Additional Information: a. Icons and symbols should be large enough for the user to perceive the representation and discriminate it from other icons and symbols. b. Symbols should not be used alternately. c. Abstract symbols should conform to user conventions or to common electrical and mechanical symbol conventions when user conventions do not exist. CSMLab.@KIT A-7 DISPLAY ELEMENTS Numeric Data Definition: Numeric data is pertaining to numerals or to representation by means of numerals. Criteria: a. Numeric data should be displayed in the decimal number system and arabic numerals should be used. b. All numbers should be oriented upright c. Numerical information should include units of measure and numeric displays should accommodate the variable ’s full range. d. Leading zeros in numeric entries for whole numbers should be suppressed. For example, 28 should be displayed rather than 0028. A leading zero should be provided if the number is a decimal with no preceding integer (i.e,, 0.43 rather than .43) e. The system should not require the entry of the decimal point at the end of an integer. Columns of numeric data should be justified with respect to a fixed decimal point; if there is no decimal point, then numbers should be right-justified. f. When users must compare aggregate quantities within a display, or within a series of displays, scaling of numeric data should begin with zero. g. If users must rapidly discern directional change, digital displays should be provided with arrows to indicate the direction of change. h. If users must evaluate the difference between two sets of data, the difference should be presented on the display. Additional Information: a. Numbers should be specified at the appropriate precision and numbers that arc spelled out should be consistently spelled under the same conditions. b. Digital displays should change slowly enough to be readable. CSMLab.@KIT A-8 DISPLAY ELEMENTS 1.5 Borders, Lines, and Arrows Definition: Border is a part that forms the outer edge of something. Line is a thin continuous mark. Arrow is a something, such as a directional symbol. a. Borders • Unnecessary borders should not be used in the display. Borders can add visual clutter to a display and add to information processing time. Borders should only be used for functional purposes, such as to facilitate grouping. • A border should be used to improve the readability of a single block of numbers or letters. • If several labels or messages are clustered in the same , distinctive borders should be placed around the critical ones only. • Type - Meaningful differences between lines appearing in graphic displays, such as flow paths, should be depicted by using various line types, e.g., solid, dashed, dotted, and widths. • Trend Lines - When trend lines are to be compared, multiple lines should be used on a single graph. • Thickness - The thickness of reticle lines for illuminated sights should be not less than 150 microradians (0.5 min) visual angle. They shall be thin enough so as not to obscure targets, but thick enough to be easily seen. In any case, their thickness should not exceed 600 miocroradians (2 min) c. Arrows • In flow charts and other graphics displays, arrowheads should be used in a conventional fashion to indicate directional relations in the sequential links between various elements. CSMLab.@KlT A-9 DISPLAY ELEMENTS Graphs General A display represents the variation of a variable in comparison with that of one or more other variables. Criteria : a. Graphs, when used, shall have clear information in format familiar to operators. b. The dependent variable should be on a consistent graph axis. 1.6.2 Scales, Labels, and Patterns Definition : Scale is a graduated series or scheme of rank or order. Refer to 1.2 Label. Pattern is a form or model proposed for making graphs. • Values shall increase with distance from an origin. Independent variables shall be plotted along the horizontal axis. Dependent variables shall be plotted along the vertical axis. ■ Linear scales should be used rather than other types, such as logarithmic. • Scales should have tick marks at a standard interval of 1, 2, 5, or 10 (or multiples of 10) for labeled divisions. Nine should be the maximum number of tick marks between numbers. • Numeric scales shall begin with zero, cover the entire range of the data. • When graphs with multiple scales must be used, an interactive display should be provided so that when a user selects a curve, the corresponding scale is highlighted. • Graphs on computer generated displays should use the same scales and units that operators are familiar with from MCR instrumentation and plant procedures. • Numbers on a scale should increase clockwise, left to right, or bottom to top. • Only a single scale should be shown on each axis, rather than including different scales for different curves in the graph. • • Axes should be clearly labeled with a description of what parameter is represented by the axis. • Labels should use upper and lowercase sans serif fonts. • Labels should be located adjacent to the elements they identify, and be oriented to permit normal left- to right reading. CSMLab.@KIT Patterns • When patterns are used, they should be simple hatching and shading, not complex patterns that produce visual illusions of vibration or motion. Additional Information: a. When necessary to make a graph more readable, one or both of the horizontal and vertical axis should be repeated at the top or right of the graph, as appropriate. b. When separate graphs arc to be compared or when different sets of data are to be plotted on the same graph, the formats and scales shall be identical. c. Labels rather than legends or keys should be used to identify plotted data elements. 1.6.3 Grids Definition: Grid is a network of uniformly spaced horizontal and vertical lines for locating points by means of coordinates. a. When grid lines are provided, they should be provided in a way that gives users the option of displaying them or not. b. Grid lines should be easily distinguishable from data without obscuring data. c. Graphs should be constructed so that the numbered grids are bolder than unnumbered grids. d. Transparent grids that are used as display overlays should conform to the size of the display. Additional Information: Grid lines should be used only when they are necessary to help users achieve a desired level of precision 1.6.4 Lines and Curves Definition: Line is a geometric figure formed by a point moving along a fixed direction and the reverse direction. Curve is a line that deviates from straightness in a smooth, continuous fashion. a. Lines - Graphic lines should have a minimum density of 40 pixels per inch. CSMLab.@KlT • When cyclic data are displayed, at least one full cycle should be presented. • When lines and curves arc coded to distinguish among multiple curves on the same graph, the coding shall be used consistently throughout an application and related applications for the same types of • When multiple curves are included in a single graph, each curve should be identified directly by an adjacent label, rather than by a separate legend. • In displays of multiple curves, if one curve represents data of particular significance, then that curve should be highlighted. • When the user must compare data represented by separate curves, the curves should be displayed in one combined graph. Combined plots should be related, so the user can correlate changes in one variable with changes in other key variables. • Curves representing planned, projected, or extrapolated data should be distinctive from curves representing actual data. • Combining several individual curves into a single average curve should only be done when users do not need to know the pattern of individual curves or when curves differ on the basis of minor irregularities. c. Segmented Curves • All segments in a segmented curve graph should be related to the total value. • The data categories in a segmented curve graph should be ordered so that the least variable curves are displayed at the bottom and the most variable at the top. • The different bands of segmented curve graphs should be made visually distinctive by coding, such as by the texturing or shading of bands. • Where space permits, the different bands of segmented curve graphs should be labeled directly within the textured or shaded bands. 1.6.5 Areas Definition: Area is a section or region of a display or window a. When emphasis is on the area between two curves, that area should be filled with color or a pattern. b. Areas in graphs should be labeled within the areas, to the extent possible. c. The area below the profile line should be shaded to provide a more distinguishable profile. CSMLab.@KIT A-12 1.6.6 Scatter Plots and Trend Plots Definition: Scatter-plot is a scaled graph that shows relations among individual data points in a two-dimensional array. Trend plot is a special case of the line graph in which one of the variables is time. a. Scatter Plots • If some plotted points represent data of particular significance, they should be highlighted to make them visually distinctive from others. • When relations among several variables must be examined, an ordered group (matrix) of scatter plots should be displayed, each showing the relation between just two variables. • When scatter plots are grouped in a single display to show relations among several variables, an interactive aid should be provided for analysis so that if a user selects a set of data in one plot then the corresponding data points in other plots will be highlighted. b. Trend Plots ♦ Time is usually plotted on the horizontal or X axis, with the most recent value on the right. • In case in which time is plotted on the Y scale, the most recent value should be plotted at the top. Additional Information: a. Scatter plots should be used to show the spatial distribution of points within a coordination system. b. Scatter plots are sometimes used to show dispersal intended to indicate non-correlation of variables. c. Trending usually provides only approximate values, but is beneficial in providing information that allows for the prediction of future parameter value and provides a means for observing the rate of CSMLab.@KlT A-13 change. 1.6.7 Bar Charts and Histograms Definition : Bar chart is a graphic figure in which numeric quantities arc represented by the linear extent of parallel lines (or bars). The length of the line (or bar) is proportional to the numbers represented. Bar charts arc useful for comparing separate entities or showing a variable sampled at intervals. Histogram is a type of bar chart used to depict the frequency distribution for a continuous variable. The variable may be grouped into classes. a. When data must be compared, bars should be adjacent to one another and spaced such that a direct visual comparison can be made without eye movement. b. In a related series of bar charts, a consistent orientation of the bars (vertical or horizontal) should be adopted. c. If one bar represents data of particular significance, then that bar should be highlighted. d. All bars should be a minimum of 10 pixels wide to facilitate this. e. Labeling • Each bar on the display should have a unique identification label. • When bars are displayed in pairs, they should be labeled as a unit, with individual distinguishing labels for each bar. f. Deviation • The zero reference should be the center of the deviation bar chart. • On a deviation bar chart, the range of normal conditions for positive or negative deviations should represent no more than 10 percent of the total range. Parameter A Parameters Parameter C Parameter D Parameter E -100 -50 -BO -An -20 0 20 40 B0 - 80 IDG LOW % HIGH • The magnitude of each variable should be displayed when a deviation bar display is used as a main display format for safety function parameters. g. Segmented bar chart CSMLab.@KIT A-14 Segmented bars, in which differently coded segments are shown cumulatively within a bar, should be used when both the total measures and the portions represented by the segments arc of interest. The data categories should be ordered within each bar in the same sequence, with the least variable categories displayed at the bottom and the most variable at the top. Additional Information: a. Bar charts should be used only when the operator can clearly and rapidly interpret them. b. If bar coding is already used lor other purposes, such as to distinguish among different sets of grouped bars, then no additional highlighting code should be superimposed on the bars themselves; some other means of highlighting (e.g., an arrow) might be adopted. 1.6.8 Pie Charts Definition : Pie charts are a circle divided into sections (as pieces of a pie) in order to represent graphically the relative proportions of different parts of a whole. a. Partitioning should be limited to five segments or less. b. Pie charts should be used to show the proportional distribution of categories with respect to the sum of the categories. c. Pie chart segments should be labeled directly rather than by a separate legend and labeled inside the segments, if possible. If a segment is too small to contain the label, the label should be placed outside the segment with a line from it to the segment. d. Segment labels should be oriented for normal left-to-right reading. e. If the task requires precise values, numbers should be added to pic chart segment labels to indicate the percentage and/or absolute values. CSMLab.@KIT A-15 f. If a particular segment of a pie chart requires emphasis, it should be highlighted by special hatching displaced slightly from the remainder of the pie. Additional Information: a. A circular chart cut by radii into segments illustrating magnitudes or frequencies. b. When accurate judgments of magnitudes are required, bar charts should be used rather than pie charts. 1.6.9 Flowcharts Definition: Flowcharts are diagrams that illustrate sequential relationships between their elements. A flowchart may depict electrical circuits, process control, scheduling decisions, computer program events, etc. Flowcharts provide a quick overview of the process by showing how data or actions move through the system and how input affects output. L' S * itching Engine CbW#o#on and Marking "From SET QOS MAC-COS command Criteria: a. The available decision options should be displayed in logical order. b. Only a single decision should be required at each step. c. Flowcharts should be designed so that the path of the logical sequence is consistent with familiar orientation conventions. d. Flowchart design should follow either logical or sequential order, or minimum path length. e. When possible, flowcharts should be oriented so that paths conform left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or clockwise. g. There should be a standard set of flowchart symbols. CSMLab.@KIT A-16 1.6.10 Profile Charts and Segmented Curve Charts a. The graph should form recognizable geometric patterns for specific abnormal conditions. b. The area below the profile line should be shaded to provide a more distinguishable profile. c. Linear Profile Charts - Labels should be provided along the bottom to identify each parameter. d. Circular Profile Chart - Labels should be provided to identify each radial line. e. Segmented Curve Graph • All segments in a segmented curve graph should be related to the total value. • 4 3.5 3 2.5 2 1.5 1 Q.E 0 • The data categories in a segmented curve graph should be ordered so that the least variable curves are displayed at the bottom and the most variable at the top. • The different bands of segmented curve graphs should be made visually distinctive by coding, such as by the texturing or shading of bands. • Where space permits, the different bands of segmented curve graphs should be labeled directly within the textured or shaded bands. 1.6.11 Mimic and Diagrams Definition: Mimic is a display format combining graphics and alphanumeric used to integrate system components into functionally oriented diagrams that reflect component relationships. Diagram is a special form of a picture in which details are only shown if they are necessary for the performance of a task. CSMLab.@KIT A-17 a. Mimics and diagrams should contain the minimum amount of detail required to yield a meaningful pictorial representation. b. Plant components represented on mimic lines should be identified. c. All flow path line origin points should be labeled or begin at labeled components. d. All llow path line destination or terminal points should be labeled or end at labeled components. e. Flow directions should be clearly indicated by distinctive arrowheads. f. Flow paths should be coded (e g., by color and/or width) to indicate important information. g. Overlapping of flow path lines should be avoided. h. Where symbols are used to represent equipment components and process flow or signal paths, numerical data should be presented reflecting inputs and outputs associated with equipment. i. When users must evaluate information in detail, computer aids for calculation and visual analysis should be provided. j. Diagram • When a diagram is too large to view all at once, it should 1) be presented in separate sections, with an overview that indicates the separate sections, 2) have consistent notation throughout the diagram, 3) provide an easy means for users to move among the sections. • When portions of a diagram require special attention, those portions should be highlighted. • When users may need to view a diagram from different perspectives, the application should provide the capability of rotating the diagram. • The labels of a rotated diagram should be displayed "right-side up" and be legible from the user's perspective. CSMLab.@KlT A-18 DISPLAY ELEMENTS 1.7.1 Number of Color a. The total number of colors used should not exceed four for a single alphanumeric screen and five for general screens and seven for a set of related screens. b. No more than six colors or shades should be used if the user must recall the meanings of colors or c. No more than six colors should be used if rapid visual search based on color discrimination is required Additional Information: a. Colors may be used only to supplement other control coding methods. b. Task performance requirements shall be used as the basis for determining the number of colors presented together on the same screen. 1.7.2 Foreground/Background a. A uniform nondistracting background color should be used with a hue/contrast that allows the data (foreground) to be easily visible and which does not distort or interfere with the coding aspects of the display. b. Blue should not be used as the foreground color if resolution of fine details is required. c. In general, the color foreground shall differ from its background by a minimum of 1 OO^E (CIE Yu1 v’) distances. d. An adequate contrast of at least 7:1 should be maintained between foreground and background colors to enhance color perception and perceived image resolution. e. Patterned backgrounds should be avoided. f. The contrast between text and its background shall be sufficiently high to ensure readability of the text. g. A medium achromatic background should be used to maximize the visibility of foreground colors. h. If the display includes color-coded objects, the background should be a neutral color such as gray. Additional Information: a. Background color can influence the way a user perceives a color symbol (e.g., shapes and lines). b. Shorter wavelength colors (e.g., blue and green) should be used to display information that is used infrequently, such as status or background information. c. The contrast should be increased if the screen will be viewed under dim lighting conditions. CSMLab.@KIT A-19 1.7.3 Contrast/Luminance a. When color coding is used, luminance shall be not no more than 10cd./m2 (3 ft-L). b. Colors in a set shall differ from one another by not less than 20 D E(CIE L*u*v) distances. c. When color shading is used, colors should provide adequate contrast and should be consistent with other color coding in the control room. d. Colored Symbols • Symbols should be legible and readily discriminable against the background colors under all expected ambient lighting conditions. • For legibility of Colored symbols shall differ from their color background by not less than 100 DE (CIE L*u*v) distances. Additional Information: a. The color of the control should contrast with the panel background. b. The legibility of alphanumeric characters is affected by the colors and luminance. 1.7.4 Brightness a. When color is used to emphasize information, the brightest color should be used for the most important information. b. Brightness coding should not be used in conjunction with shape or size coding. c. Coding by differences in brightness should be used for applications that require discrimination between only two categories of displayed items on a VDU and up to three on a transilluminatcd display. d. Brightness Intensity Coding ■ Brightness intensity coding shall be employed only to differentiate between an item of information and adjacent information. • No more than two levels of brightness shall be used. • Each level shall be separated from the nearest other level by not less than a 2:1 ratio. • Levels approximating 33 percent and 100 percent of the display luminance should be used for brightness coding. The intensities used should not be less than 6 ft-L (20 cd/m2). Intensity coding should not be used for displays with a maximum display luminance of less than 18 ft-L (60 cd/m2) or more than 29 ft-L (100 cd/m2). e. When a capability for brightness inversion is available, it may be used for highlighting critical items that require user attention. f. When used for alerting purposes, brightness inversion shall be reserved for that purpose, and not be CSMLab,@KlT A-20 used for general highlighting. Additional Information: Brightness inversion is so-called “reverse video ”, where dark characters on a bright background can be changed under computer control to bright on dark, or vice versa. 1.7.5 Location a. Peripheral vision is very poor at discriminating colors; therefore, the use of color should be reserved for portions of visual displays that will normally be in the user’s direct line of sight. b. Red and green should not be used to code items in peripheral vision while blue, yellow, black, or white should be used for color-coded items located in the peripheral viewing area, Additional Information: Only large colored objects will be distinguished in the peripheral visual field. 1.7.6 Pure Blue Criterion : Pure blue on a dark background should be avoided for text, for thin lines, or for high-resolution information. 1.7.7 Pure Red Criterion : Dominant wavelengths above 650 nanometers in displays should be avoided because protanopes are noticeably less sensitive to these wavelengths. 1.7.8 Color Combinations Criteria : a. Whenever possible, red and green colors should not be used in combination. b. Use of red symbols on a green background should especially be avoided. CSMLab.@KIT A-21 c. Designers should avoid the color combinations table. Saturated Red and Blue Saturated Red and Green Saturated Blue and Green Saturated Yellow and Green Yellow on Purple Green on White Yellow on Green Blue on Black Magenta on Green Red on Black Magenta on Black Yellow on White 1.7.9 Chromostereopsis Definition: Chromostereopsis is visual perception of depth resulting from the displacement of retinal images of objects emitting or reflecting different dominant wavelengths. Criterion : Simultaneous presentation of both pure red and pure blue (or to a lesser extent red and green, or blue and green) on a dark background should be avoided. Additional Information: Such a presentation may result in chromostereopsis (an uncomfortable three dimensional effect). 1.7.10 Color Coding 1.7.10.1 General Definition: Color coding is used to represent specific information. Coding may be used (a) for highlighting (i.e., to attract a user’s attention to part of a display), (b) as a perceptual indicator of a data group, or (c) to symbolized a state or attribute of an object (e.g., to show a temperature level or for warning purposes) a, When color coding is used to group or highlight displayed data, all of the colors in the set should be CSMLab.@KIT A-22 readily discriminable from each other. b. When color coding is used to relate a control to its corresponding display, the same color should be used for both the control and the display. c. Low-intensity indications (c.g,, dark red) in the periphery of the visual field should be avoided where color coding is used, since they may not be readily detected. d. Color provides an effective coding device; however, it should always be redundant to some other type of coding e. When appropriate to the functionality of an application, users should have the option of selecting from a variety of color sets as a user preference selling for aspects of an application that do not involve coding or status. f. When users arc allowed to change color settings of aspects of an application that do not involve coding, the application shall provide an easy way to restore the default color scheme. g. When an application is likely to be used on different hardware configurations, it shall be able to accommodate the possible differences in color representations in the different configurations. h. When different users will share a computer monitor, individual users shall not be able to change colors for coding and status of facilities, services, or equipment such as alarms or alerts. i. Colors for coding should be based on user conventions with particular colors. j. When the relative rather than the absolute values of a variable are important, gradual color changes as a tonal code should be used to show the relative values of a single variable. k. Color coding should not create unplanned or obvious new patterns on the screen. Additional Information: a. Displayed data should provide necessary information even when viewed on a monochromatic display terminal or hardcopy printout, or when viewed by a user with color vision impairment. b. Color coding of discrete categories (e.g., setpoint values and actual values) is particularly useful when data items are dispersed on a display. 1.7.10 Color Coding 1.7.10.2 Use of Color Criteria : a. Each color should represent only one category of displayed data. b. When the user community has previously established meanings for various colors, the designer shall retain those meanings. Thus, a color should not signify a different condition than it signified in the previous system. c. Red shall indicate conditions such as no-go, error, failure, or malfunction. d. When the graphic is not likely to be printed, color should be used rather than patterning. CSMLab.@KIT A-23 e. Longer wavelength colors (e.g., red and orange) should be used to suggest action or a demand for a response. Shorter wavelength colors (e.g., blue and green) should be used to display information that is used infrequently, such as status or background information. f. A highlight color should be used on color displays. h. Green, yellow, and red should be avoided as comparison colors for application information requiring important or frequent discriminations. When green, yellow, and red are used, they shall be used in combination with other cues, such as brightness and saturation, to enhance their distinctiveness. i. Similar colors should be used to convey similarity among items; examples are orange/yellow and blue/violet. Additional Information: a. Where color is used for coding, it should be employed conservatively and consistently. b. When similar hues are used, they should be used only with logically related information. c. In displaying tank depth, a saturated blue might be used to show the deepest point, with gradually desaturated blues to show decreasing depth. Gradual color changes should not be used when absolute values are important, or to code data into discrete categories. 1.7.10 Color Coding 1.7.10.3 Color Selection a. Brighter and/or more saturated colors should be used when it is necessary to draw a user's attention to critical data. b. Red should be used only if high ambient illumination is expected and green and yellow if a broad range of illumination is expected. c. To maximize discriminability, colors having the following dominant wavelengths (or others as widely spaced along the visible color spectrum) should be used: • Red (700 nm) • Orange (600 nm) * Yellow (570 nm) • Yellow-green (535 nm) • Green (500 nm) • Blue-green (493 nm) • Blue (470 nm) Wavelengths above 650 nm should be avoided if users include protanopes. Additional Information: a. Although saturated and/or intense hues are useful for drawing a user's attention, their overuse will result in a display that is garish and difficult to view for long periods. b. Color codes should conform to color meanings that already exist in the user's job. Color codes employing different meanings will be much more difficult to use. Table provides general nuclear plant color meanings. CSMLab.@KlT A-24 Associations and related characteristics for colors typically used in panel design Attention Contrasts Well Color Associated Meanings -Getting Value With Alarm state Open/flowing 1 Closed/stoppcd 1 Yellow Hazard Good Caution Dark Blue Abnormal State Oil Safe Satisfactory Normal state Open/flowing 1 Closed/stoppcd 1 Light blue Advisory Poor Black (cyan) Aerated water Cool Dark Blue Advisory Poor White Untreated water Magenta2 Good White White Advisory Poor Green Steam Black Red Dark blue Magenta Black Background Poor White Light blue Yellow 1 Meanings associated with red and green colors differ, depending on past experience. Personnel with previous fossil fuel plant experience typically associate an open/flowing state with red and a closed/stop state with green, but reverse associations typically exist for personnel with previous Navy experience. 2 Magenta on yellow is the nuclear industry standard for radiation caution. CSMLab.@KIT A-25 DISPLAY FORMAT 2.1 Data Entry and Editing Definition: Data Entry is the act of inputting information to the system, and is something that has been entered, such as data or a command. Data editing is to prepare for publication or presentation, as by correcting, revising, or adapting. Criteria : a. During graphic data entry/editing, the selected attributes will affect current actions should be displayed for ready reference by the user. b. For entry/editing of unformatted text, an automatic line break ("return”) should be provided when text reaches the right margin, with provision for user override. c. Data Entry • Where data entry on an electronic display is permitted only in prescribed areas, a clear visual definition of the entry fields shall be provided. • Data entry functions shall be designed to establish consistency of data entry transactions, minimize input actions and memory load on the user, ensure compatibility of data entry with data display, and provide flexibility of user control of data entry. • Data deletion or cancellation shall require an explicit action, such as depressing a DELETE key. Permanent deletion (in absence of an "undo" function) of more than one character shall not be allowed without an affirmative response to an "are you sure?" type of query. " Data entry methods and data displays should not require the user to shift between entry methods. • Data entered that does not match the predefined format of the data form should be highlighted and signaled to the user. • For a repetitive data entry task that is accomplished as a continuing series of transactions, successful entry should be indicated by regenerating the data entry display, automatically removing the just- entered data in preparation for the next entry. • User shall not have to move a space at a time over unfilled spaces in variable length field. For fixed length fields, a user shall not have to enter leading or trailing zeros to fill a field. • Where system overload or other system conditions will result in a processing delay, the system should acknowledge the data entry and provide an indication of the delay to the user. • If appropriate, labels should be used to help cue the user as to the expected data entry. For example “ DATE (MM/DD/YYYY): d. Data Editing • Procedures for composing messages should be compatible with general data entry procedures, especially those for text editing. • Where a user requests change (or deletion) of a data item that is not currently being displayed, the CSMLab.@KlT A-26 option of displaying the old value before confirming the change should be presented. • When entering tabular data, the user shall not be required to right- or left-juslify tabular data entries. The system shall automatically justify columnar data with respect to decimal point, left margin or right margin, depending on the type of data. • Units should be included in column or row headings, not after every data entry(for tabular data). • When an application requires that all text be in one case, for example upper case, the application should accept typed uppercase and lowercase letters as equivalent and automatically convert the improper case to the proper one. • When lists or tables are of variable length and may extend beyond the limits of one display page, the user should be informed when data are continued on another page and when data are concluded on the present page. Additional Information a. Data entry shall be paced by the user, rather than by the system. b. When forms are used for data entry as well as for data display, the formats of these forms should be compatible. c. For the entry of related data items, automatic cross validation should be provided to ensure that the data set is logically consistent. d. Data should be entered in units that are familiar to the user. CSMLab.@KIT A-27 DISPLAY FORMAT Text 2.2.1 Text Frames A text frame is a sizable field into which the user can type text. This is a dynamic form of an edit field and should not be confused with the text box. Although text frames are generally rectangular, other shapes may also be used. a. When a text frame is selected it should have resize handles. b. When a text frame is resized, the text should be rewrapped to fit within the new borders of the frame. c. When the pointer is over an unselected text frame it should appear as an arrow. d. When the frame is selected, the pointer should change to an I-beam over the text. c. The user should be able to move selected frames by dragging the outside border of the frame, f. The user should be able to move unselected text frames by clicking and dragging inside the frame. 2.2.2 Formatting Definition: Formatting is the process or act of arranging data. a. Format • A standard text display format should be used from one display to another. • The system should provide users with an easy means for specifying page formats, including margins and tabs. • The format of a VDU data form should be similar to that of commonly used hardcopy source documents. b. Justification • Left, right, center, and full justification should be provided as user options. • The text should be left justified with consistent spacing between words as it is entered. c. Displayed Line • Continuous text should be displayed in wide columns, containing at least 50 characters per line. • At least four lines of text should be displayed at one lime, when a user must read continuous text on line or when the reading material is simple in content. • When space for text display is limited, a few wide lines rather than in narrow columns of many short CSMLab.@KIT A-28 lines should be displayed. d. Linc/Page Breaks • In display of text, words should be kept intact, with minimal breaking by hyphenation between lines. • The system should provide automatic line/page breaks and user-specified line/page breaks. e. Page Numbering • Page numbering should begin with one by default. • Automatically incremented page numbering should be provided. f. Emphasis • When critical text merits emphasis to set it apart from other text, that text should be highlighted by bolding/brightening or color coding or by some auxiliary annotation. • When a line is placed under an item to mark or emphasize it, the line should not impair the legibility of the item, e.g., by obscuring the descenders. Additional Information: a. Conventional punctuation should be used in textual display. b. More lines of text should be displayed, if the content is more complex, or if a reader will need to refer frequently to previous material c. Users should be able to specify a minimum number of lines of a paragraph that will appear at the bottom or top of a page (widow-orphan protection). 2.2.3 Abbreviations and Acronyms Abbreviation is any shortened form or abridgment of a word, expression, or phrase used to conserve space or time. Thus, the term abbreviation includes initializations, contractions, and acronyms. Acronym is a word formed from the initial letter(s) of each of the successive or major parts of a compound term. a. When defining abbreviations that are not common to the user population, a simple rule should be used that users understand and recognize. b. Where abbreviations and acronyms are required, they shall conform to current standards. c. Abbreviations and acronyms should be used consistently. d. When words in text displays are abbreviated, each abbreviation (or acronym) shall be unique, distinct, and unambiguous so as not confuse users and should be defined in parentheses following its first appearance. e. All punctuation marks should be omitted from acronyms and abbreviations unless confusion or misinterpretation would occur as a result of their omission. CSMLab.@KIT A-29 f. Words of five letters or less should not be abbreviated unless common usage has rendered the word and its abbreviation completely synonymous in recognition and intelligibility. g. Acronyms should be displayed in all upper-case letters. h. Requirements for the use of upper and lower case lettering for labeling arc provided below. • Abbreviations - Lower case letters shall be used in abbreviations or symbols in which their use is the commonly accepted practice (e.g., He, pH, Hg, etc.). • Operating Instructions - Equipment operating instructions shall use lower case for text and upper case for the first letter of a sentence, headings, titles of equipment, and references to control/display panel markings. i. Abbreviations should be avoided (except when terms are commonly referred to by their initialisms, e.g., SPDS). j. When arbitrary codes must be remembered by the user, characters should be grouped in blocks of three to five characters, separated by a minimum of one blank space or other separating character such as a hyphen or slash. k. The use of the letters O and I in a non-meaningful code should be avoided since they are easily confused with the numbers 0 (zero) and 1 (one), respectively. l. When codes combine both letters and numbers, letters should be grouped together and numbers grouped together rather than interspersing letters with numbers. (For example, letter-letter-number ('HW5') will be read and remembered somewhat more accurately than lettcr-number-Ietter ('H5W’).) Additional Information: a. The use of abbreviations shall not add to system operation time. b. An on-line dictionary of abbreviations for convenient reference should be available to users. c. Abbreviations should retain an alphabetic similarity to the longer word or phrase. d. Acronyms should be used only if they will be seen more than once, are significantly shorter than the term they represent, and the users will commonly understand them. c. When abbreviation is necessary due to space constraints, the words chosen for abbreviation should be those that are commonly known in their abbreviated form, and/or those words whose abbreviations can be unambiguously interpreted. 2.2.4 Capitalization Definition: Capitalization is the use of upper letters in writing or printing. Capitalization should only be used for: headlines, key phrases acronyms, short ls to draw the user’s CSMLab.@KIT A-30 attention to important text (e.g., field labels or a window title), the first letter in a sentence, or a single character in each word in a title or label. Additional Information : Reading text is easier and faster when capitalization is used conventionally to start sentences and to indicate proper nouns and acronyms. In general, capitalization shall not be used to emphasize phrases or sentences: Continuous text is easiest to read and comprehend when it is presented in mixed case letters. Single words are recognized better when printed in all upper case letters. Thus, if used sparingly and wisely, capitalization can be used to indicate to readers that a word has special significance. Mixed case should be used for continuous text, messages, menu descriptions, button descriptions, or screen identification. 2.2.5 Text in Windows a. When information elements in a window will be numbered, Arabic numerals should be used, not Roman numerals. b. Each type of non-editable text (e.g., titles, labels, and instructions) displayed in windows should have a consistent grammatical structure. c. Normal punctuation rules should be followed. Contractions and hyphenation should be avoided. Additional Information: a. All instructions might be complete, imperative sentences. b. The referents for pronouns such as "it" and "they" shall be easily identifiable. CSMLab.@KIT A-31 2 DISPLAY FORMAT 2.3 Forms 2.3.1 Fields Field is an area of the display screen that is reserved for the display of data or for user entry of a data item, a. Justification • When label sizes are relatively equal, both labels and data fields should be left justified. When label sizes vary greatly, labels should be right justified and the data fields should be left justified. • A field group heading should be centered above the labels to which it applies. b. Separation • The label and the data entry area should be separated by at least one character space. • Fields shall have a distinctive appearance and distinct limits and every data field shall have a label that uniquely identifies the field. • Clear visual definition of data fields should be provided so that the data are distinct from labels and other display features. • At least three spaces should appear between the longest data field in one column and the rightmost label in an adjacent column. At least five spaces should appear between groups of data fields. c. Measurement • When a field entry involves a unit of measurement, the unit shall be included as part of the label or • When measurements might be in different units, for example, inches or millimeters, users shall not have to transform them at the time of data entry. d. Length • Data entry fields should be of fixed length, even if the entries may be of variable length. If useful to the user, a field should give a cue as to its length, for example, by using separated underscores (__ • When a field accepts variable length entries, users shall not have to remove or fill any unneeded portion. Additional Information: a. When a user must be able to type input from the keyboard, a text field shall be provided, b. When a text field will accept more text than can be displayed in the field, a scroll-bar shall be provided to enable users to see the entire text. c. When the anticipated text is expected to exceed a single line, the text field shall be large enough to CSMLab.@KET A-32 multiple lines simultaneously. 2.3.2 Field Labels Definition: Field label is a displayed word or phrase that identifies the data display or entry field. a. When label sizes are relatively equal, both labels and data fields should be left justified. When label sizes vary greatly, labels should be right justified and the data fields should be left justified b. The label and the data entry area should be separated by at least one character space. c. Labels shall be separated from one another by at least two standard character spaces. d. Labels for data fields should be composed of terms that are familiar to the user, relevant to the topic of the form, and easily understood by a typical user. e. Field labels shall terminate with a special symbol that designates the end of the label and the beginning of the field (a colon is frequently used for this purpose) or, a blank space that follows the terminator and separates it from the beginning of the field when the label is to the left of the field. f. When headings are located on the line above related screen fields, the labels should be indented a minimum of five spaces from the start of the heading. 2.3.3 Layout Definition: Layout is the thing or technology that arrange each component of elements such as character, picture, symbol etc., effectively inside limited space in display design. Criteria : a. When users will transfer data from hard copy documents, the screen layout shall correspond to the hard copy in the order and grouping of data items. For this case, it is desirable that the displayed form look as much like the source document as possible. b. When input is not from source documents or hard copy forms, data fields shall be ordered and grouped logically using sequence, frequency of use, importance, and functional associations as organizing principles. c. When a form is too large to fit in the available screen area, it should be broken into pages, and each page should be labeled with its number and the total number. d. Each display screen should locate information and HSI features consistently. CSMLab.@KIT A-33 5. The procedure's title and identification should be continuously presented. The status of high-level procedure goals should be continuously presented. 2.3.4 Navigation Definition : Navigation is ability to move from field to field within a from, to proceed forward and backward through a form and move from form to form. Criteria : a. Navigation support should allow users to freely and easily move between procedure steps, to other parts of the same procedure, and to other procedures. b. Navigational links to cross-referenced information and to notes, cautions, warnings, reference material, and communication and help facilities should be provided. Navigational links to and from high-level and lower-levels of information and to reference and supporting information should be provided when needed for operators tasks. c. The system shall provide one or more easy ways to move the cursor among fields. When the fields in a form will be traversed sequentially, a user should be able to move the cursor to the next field by pressing the Tab key and to the previous field by pressing the Shift and Tab keys simultaneously. d. When the primary means of entering data in fields is the keyboard, the cursor movement methods shall include keyboard keys such as the Tab key(s) and the arrow keys. c When fields may not necessarily be traversed in a set order, a pointing device in addition to keyboard should also be available for selecting fields. f. When a pointing device is available, a user shall be able to move the cursor to any field by moving the pointer into the field and clicking the appropriate button. g. A user shall be able to move the cursor only into fields and onto control objects on the screen, not onto labels or other non data-entry areas. When a form has protected fields, a user shall not be able to move the cursor into a protected field. Additional Information: a. When both a keyboard and pointing device is available, cursor movement shall be allowed using either b. The CBP should have the ability to access more than one piece of information at once. CSMLab.@KIT A-34 2.3.5 Defaults Default is a value or setting that is used if no alternative is specified. Assumed unless specifically overridden. Defaults represent predetermined, frequently used, values for data or control entries intended to reduce required user entry actions. Criteria : a. Users should be provided with some simple means to confirm acceptance of a displayed default value. b. If certain information is used frequently, then it should be automatically entered into the form as a default. c. A field that has a default value shall have that value appear in the field automatically when the form appears. d. When a form is expected to have the same entry in a particular field most of the time, that entry should appear in that field as a default entry when the form first appears. e. When a default value is replaced, the default value itself shall not be affected so that the next time the form appears, the same default value will appear in the field. f. User should be permitted to define, change, or remove default values for any input field. g. When keyed command or option code entries arc used and a default is defined for a null control entry, the default should be indicated to the user. h. Appropriate and readily modified default parameters should be displayed in forms used for composing complex command entries. i. When an entry is normally made in a field by typing, a user shall be able to replace that value by moving the cursor into that field and typing causing the default value to disappear immediately after he first keystroke. j. Currently operative default values should be displayed for data entry, so that users can review and confirm them for computer processing. k. If automatic defaults are provided for control entries, those defaults should protect against data loss, or at least not contribute to the risk of data loss. CSMLab.@KIT A-35 DISPLAY FORMAT Definition: Horizontal or vertical presentation of "data" items in a display which usually changes according to the states of the application. a. Ordering • Items in lists shall be arranged in a recognizable order, such as chronological, alphabetical, sequential, functional, or importance. • If a list is displayed in multiple columns, the items should be ordered vertically within each column rather than horizontally within rows and across columns. • A single column should be used for a list, with each item in the list starting in a new row. • Where lists extend over more than one display page, the last line of one page should be the first line on the succeeding page. • When a list of numbered items exceeds one display page, the items should be numbered continuously in relation to the first item on the first page. • When the items in a numbered list do not all fit on one display, the entire set of items shall be numbered continuously and not start anew with each display. • Complete numbers should be displayed for hierarchic lists with compound numbers, i.e., repeated elements should not be omitted. b. Item Display • Arabic rather than Roman numerals should be used when listed items are numbered, item numbers should begin with one rather than zero. • The presence or absence of precedence among items in lists should be indicated. • Formatting should be used to differentiate items in a list from other procedure elements. • The method for assuring that each item in a list has received the users' attention should be consistent. • When a single item in a list continues for more than one line, items should be marked in some way so that the continuation of an item is obvious. • For a more compact display of a long list, designers should use multiple columns with items ordered vertically within each column. • For a long list, extending more than one displayed page, a hierarchic structure should be used to permit its logical partitioning into related shorter lists. • Groups of three or more related items (e.g., actions, conditions, components, criteria, systems) should be presented as a list. CSMLab.@KIT A-36 Additional information: Although in some cases items can be selected from a list, only where items in the list are arranged or structured to optimize item choice such lists are considered menus. Additionally, those lists of items which exceed the display area (often called "scrollable menus") should be considered lists and no menus. CSMLab.@KIT A-37 DISPLAY FORMAT Tables Definition: Tabic is a rows and columns structure consisting of functional areas that contain data and that may or may not require input. Tables may be used to present a variety of types of information. a. The font and size of alphanumeric characters should be consistent within a table and between related b. Columns of alphanumeric data should be left justified, integer numerical data should be right justified, decimal numerical data should be decimal point justified. c. Adequate separation shall be provided between columns and between groups of rows. d. When a table is too large to fit in the available display area, scroll-bars should be provided on the right or left side and on the bottom or top of large tables that require scrolling. e. Arrangement • Rows and columns shall be arranged according to some logic. • If the data in the rows has order, the order shall increase from left to right. If the data in the columns has order, the order shall increase from top to bottom. f. Spacing • Consistent column and row spacing should be maintained within a table, and from one table to another. • The spacing between columns should be greater than any internal spaces that might be displayed within a tabulated data item. • Titles should be in all capital letters. • Titles should have a consistent location on tables, • When tabular data extend over more than one page vertically, the columns shall be titled identically on each page. • Labels should be presented in all capital letters. • Labels should be distinct from the data cells. • Labels should include the unit of measure for the data in the table. • Each row and column should be uniquely and informatively labeled. • Informative and distinctive column headers and row labels should always be displayed. • When a user scrolls a large table, the row or column labels should not scroll but should remain in i. Navigation CSMLab.@KIT A-38 • The user shall be allowed to move through a table using the arrow keys. • The Tab key shall move the cursor to the first position of the next cell to the right of its current position. • Pressing Shift and Tab simultaneously shall move the cursor to the first position in the next cell to the left of the current position. Additional Information: a. Tables are especially useful for comparing the features of two or more alternative conditions. b. Columns that will be compared often by the users should be located near one another. c. When entering numeric data into a table, users shall not have to type leading zeros or trailing zeros. CSMLab.@KIT A-39 2 DISPLAY FORMAT 2.6 Display Controls 2.6.1 Display of Control Options Definition: Control is graphic, often analogous to physical controls such as dials, radio buttons, which allows a user to directly manipulate data, other objects or their attributes. a. When the system prompts a user for a parameter that has a default value assigned, the default value shall be displayed. b. When a control for manipulating the display becomes available, information the user needs for its use shall also be displayed. c. Only control options that are actually available for the current transaction should be offered to users. d. Screen control locations and control options should be clearly and appropriately indicated. e. Multiple controls should be centered on the single display. 2.6.2 Icons Refer to 1.3 Icons and Symbols. 2.6.3 Palettes Definition : Palettes are a set of unlabeled symbols, typically presented within small rectangles. Symbols may be icons, patterns, characters, or drawings that represent an operation. Palettes are used widely in drawing and painting packages but are commonly found in word-process. ■■: 7 : :5 - !—i 3 JJJ --1 r» 1ST □a ' -j A p • % : ra 43 - f? CSMLab.tgKIT A-40 a. Fixed palettes should be placed on the left side of the application window or along the top of the window under the title bar. b. In a palette that contains tools, the selected tool should be highlighted. c. In a palette that contains patterns or colors, the currently selected item should be outlined and include a preview area that shows the effect of the current selection. d. As a user drags the cursor over the items in a palette, each item should be highlighted or outlined. e. Visual feedback for the current palette selection should be provided. 2.6.4 Push Buttons Definition: Push button is a push type of hardware control device or a defined control region on the display screen which, when selected, causes some action. TaskPescripticn...) a. Pushbuttons in a row or matrix should be positioned in a logical order, or in an order related to the procedural sequence. b. To ensure that the user knows that a pushbutton has been pressed far enough for activation, a positive indication should be provided. c. When the user must supply additional information before the system can carry out a push button action, the designer should provide ellipses (...) after the push button caption to indicate that a dialog box (or control window) will be presented. d. All push buttons in a window should have the same size and shape. e. Default buttons shall be clearly distinguishable from the other push buttons. f. The push button shall be highlighted while the pointer button is depressed. The control shall be activated when the pointer button is released, and the push button is reverted to its normal appearance g. Push Buttons Label • A push button shall have either a text or graphic label. • The size should accommodate the largest label. • The push button label should describe the results of pressing the button and reflect the action that will be taken by the application rather than the user, Additional Information: Push button labels shall be consistent throughout an application and related applications. CSJVTLab.@KIT A-41 2.6.5 Radio Buttons Radio buttons (also known as exclusive buttons or option buttons) are single, two-state choices, which are mutually exclusive from each other. Radio buttons shall be used if it is required that one and only one of a set of mutually exclusive options be selected. Add new object: C Folder^ O Web page H C External link Eh Upload files 1 a. A user shall be able to select a radio button using a pointing device by moving the pointer onto the radio button and clicking the appropriate device button. b. Radio button sets shall contain from two to seven items, but the user shall always have at least two radio buttons in each set. c. When a particular option is not available, it should be displayed as subdued or grayed-out in relation to the brightness of the available options. d. Radio buttons and labels shall be left justified in the columnar format. e. A box should be drawn around a group of radio buttons to visually separate the group from other interface features. f. When a screen or window contains only one panel of radio buttons, the screen or window title shall serve as the panel label. g. Labels shall be provided for each set of radio buttons and the selection target area for radio buttons shall include the radio button and its label. h. Moving the cursor to an option shall highlight the label by reverse video, reverse color, or a dashed box around the label. i. Selecting a button that is already highlighted shall not change its state. j. A radio button that is active shall cause all of the other radio buttons in its group to be inactive. 2.6.6 Check Boxes Definition : Check box is a square box where the user can click to say that they want or have a particular setting. Check boxes are commonly used when more than one option may need to be checked. CSMLab.@KIT A-42 a. The label and list items lor an inactive list box should be dimmed. b. Standard list boxes should always remain the same size. c. A drop-down list box should have a fixed width d. The list box should be high enough to accommodate three to eight list items. c. Dropdown lists containing nine or more items should have a vertical scroll-bar. f. When an item is too wide for the list in a list box, a horizontal scroll-bar should be placed at the bottom of the list. g. Combo Box - - Drop-down combo box (Style 0) ^-Simple combo box (Style 1) A- Drop-down list combo box (Style 2) • A combo box should allow the user to enter a response if the desired option is not displayed in the list. • List entries should be organized in alphabetical order unless an application requires a different organization. • The user should be able to move the cursor up and down or left and right in the combo box by using the arrow keys. h. Spin Box up down &rro* Leri; R,ghf 5padng Before-. jo pt |opt The spin box should allow the user to enter a new \aluc into the text box that is not available presently as one of the options. The user should be able to increase the value in a spin box by clicking the UP ARROW key or decrease the value by clicking the DOWN ARROW key. CSMLab.@KlT A-44 UDOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "VAV3C//DTD HTML 3 'META HTTP-EOUIV="Content-Type" CO NTENT =' 'text/htmlCHAR & E T =[ jo-8859-T"> Additional Information: a. List boxes should be used when choices are displayed for the user. b. Spin boxes are specialized text boxes that accept only a limited set of discrete, ordered input values. c. Combo boxes should be used when the user needs to be able to either select one of the displayed responses or enter a new response. d. Drop-down combo boxes should be used instead of standard combo boxes when the space is limited. e. The scroll-bar shall only be used on a combo box list if the list is expected to display more entries than can be shown at one time. f. Extended-selection lists should be used when the user might select more than one list entry at a time from a list in which related items are contiguous. g. Multiple-selection lists should be used when users might select several entries at a time from a list in which related items are not contiguous. Definition : A cursor is a display graphic that is used to indicate the position of the user’s operation on the display such as an arrow or flashing bar CSMLab.@KTT I 2.6.8 Cursors 2.6.8.1 General Criteria : a. There shall be one and only one place holding cursor in each window in which a user is entering alphanumeric characters. b. Shape • The cursors shall not obscure characters. • The cursors shall be distinctive against their backgrounds. • Cursors should have distinctive visual features (shape, blink, or other means of highlighting). « Flash or display refresh rate shall not be within the 15-20 Hz range. • The cursor shall not interfere with the reading of the character that it marks. • The cursor should not be so distracting as to impair the searching of the display for information unrelated to the cursor. c. Cursor control • Systems employing cursors shall provide cursor control capability consistent with user speed and accuracy requirements. • The user should be able to adjust the sensitivity of the cursor movement to be compatible with the required task and user skills. d. Position • The cursor should be positioned at the first character location of the first data entry field upon initial presentation of a data entry form. • On the initial appearance of a data entry display, the cursor should appear automatically at some consistent and useful location. • When there is a predefined HOME position for the cursor, that position should be consistently defined on all displays of a given type. • The displayed cursor should be stable.(The cursor should remain where it is placed until moved by the user (or by the computer) to another position. Some special applications, such as aided tracking, may benefit from computer-controlled cursor movement.) • When the user must repeatedly return the cursor to the origin or other specific screen location, automatic return or repositioning of the cursor should be provided. e. Movement • The cursor control should permit both fast movement and accurate placement. • Users should be provided with an easy, accurate means of positioning a displayed cursor to point at CSMLab.@KIT A-46 different display elements and/or display locations. • As applicable, users should be able to move the cursor by units of character, line, and page, ■ "Users should be able to move the cursor by specific units of text, as well as one character at a time. • Where cursor positioning is incremental by discrete steps, the step size of cursor movement should be consistent horizontally and vertically. » Travel distance for cursors across and between display pages and windows on a display screen should be minimized. ■ Control actions for cursor positioning should be compatible with movements of the displayed cursor, in terms of control function and labeling. • If a cursor must be positioned sequentially in predefined areas, such as displayed data entry fields, this should be accomplished by simple user action. • When entering and editing text, users shall be able to move the cursor freely within a displayed page to specify items for change and to make changes directly in the text. • When there are areas of a display in which data entries cannot be made (such as in field labels or in blank spaces that are part of data formatting), the cursor should ’step over' those areas, and they should be insensitive to pointing actions. • If proportional spacing is used for displayed text, computer logic should make necessary adjustments automatically when the cursor is being positioned for data entry or data change. • An ENTER action for multiple data items should result in entry of all items, regardless of where the cursor is placed on the display. • Users should be required to take a separate, explicit action, distinct from cursor positioning, for the actual entry (enabling, activation) of a designated function. But this guideline may not apply to tasks in which rapid, continuous entry is required (e.g., line drawing or tracking). • When position designation is required in a task emphasizing keyed data entry, cursor control should be provided by some device integral to the keyboard (function keys, joystick, and trackball). f. Key Control for cursor • If cursor movement is accomplished by depressing keys, the keys should be located on the main keyboard. • At the minimum, keys for cursor control should allow horizontal and vertical cursor movement. • If the cursor is moved by depressing a key, releasing the key should cause the cursor to stop moving. • Users should be able to select at least two speeds (normal and fast) for the movement of the cursor when the keys for cursor control are held down. g. Graphics cursor • The cursor for creating graphics displays should be distinctive, easy to position, and have a point that can be used to select and manipulate small graphic objects. • A graphics cursor operation should have a movement (pointing) component that positions the cursor and an activation component that activates the position to manipulate a display element (e.g., selecting an object to move or drawing a line). CSMLab.@KlT A-47 When fine accuracy of positioning is required, as in some forms of graphic interaction, the displayed cursor should include a point designation feature. 2.6.8 Cursors 2.6.S.2 Text Cursor a. There should be only one text entry cursor per window. b. The text entry cursor should only be visible when text entry is possible. c. The text cursor shall be an I-beam in insert mode and a box over a character in replace mode. d. The placeholding cursor should not obscure any other character displayed in the position designated by the cursor. (As an example, a block cursor might employ brightness inversion ("reverse video").) e. When character size is variable, the incremental cursor positioning should vary correspondingly, with a step size matching the size of currently selected characters. The text entry cursor should assume the height and/or width of the text characters adjacent to it. f. Blink - If text entry cursor blinking is to be used to direct the user's attention, the default blink rate should be 3 Hz. The text cursor shall flash at a rate between 2 and 5 Hz (A blinking cursor need not obscure characters. For example, the blinking cursor may be an underline that does not cover the entire character.) g. When the text object containing the text cursor loses input focus, the cursor shall stop flashing. And when the text object regains input focus, the cursor shall return to normal brightness and resume flashing. h. When the cursor disappears from view when its window loses focus, the cursor shall reappear at the same location when the window regains focus. i. When a window first receives input focus, the text cursor shall be placed in the text area where typing is most likely to occur. j. Users shall not be able to move the text cursor into areas in which text entry is not possible k. At the initiation of a task, an application, or a new display, the user should be able to immediately determine the location of the text entry cursor. Following the initial placement of the text entry cursor, the position of the cursor should be under the user's control. 2.6.8 Cursors 2.6.8.3 Position or pointing Cursors Position or pointing cursors used to point to controls display. They may at times obscure other CSMLab.@KIT A-48 screen objects. The pointer cursor is often the left pointing arrow. The pointer is used to make selections and to click in menus and control buttons: to resize windows; to click, hold, and drag objects, and to click on a location to move the location cursor in text and field editing. • An arrow pointing up and to the left shall be the general-purpose pointer. • The designer shall use only those pointer shapes necessary for user understanding of the functionality. • An application shall redefine the shape of a pointer only when the pointer is inside an application window (including the border). • The new shape should be easy to see, obscure as little information as possible on the screen, have a hotspot that is obvious and easy to locate, provide a hint of its purpose, and not be easily confused with other objects on the screen. b. Size - The pointing cursor should maintain its size across all screen and display locations. c. Blink - The pointing cursor should not blink. d. Movement • The movement of the pointing cursor should appear to the user to be smooth and continuous, with smooth and continuous movement of the cursor control device. • The pointing cursor should not move in the absence of any input from the user. • That is, position or pointing cursors shall move rapidly in response to the pointing device (less than 100 m/sec). e. Visibility • Pointing cursors should maintain image quality throughout an entire range of motion within the display. The position of the pointing cursor should be clearly visible during movement from one screen position to another. Flicker should be minimized. • The pointing cursor should be visible to the user at all times and may obscure characters unless it interferes with performance within an application • The pointer should disappear when a user begins typing and reappear when the user slops typing or when he or she moves the pointing device. f. hotspot - A pointer shall have a hotspot, that is, an active point (although this active point may not be readily apparent to the user) to indicate the precise location where an operation will occur g. In a multitasking environment with multiple monitors, controllers, or cursors, the location of the active cursor should be obvious to the user.(If there are two pointing cursors, one on each of two monitors, the active cursor should be apparent to the user. If there is a single cursor that moves between two monitors, its path should be continuously trackable.) CSMLab.@KIT A-49 2.6.8 Cursors 2.6.S.4 Cursor a Status Indicator a. A cursor used as a status indicator should be distinct from the normal cursor. b, Changing the shape of the cursor is one way that an application might indicate the current status when an operation in progress takes more than 2 or 3 seconds to complete and the user cannot continue working in that application until the operation finishes. 2.6.8 Cursors 2.6.S.5 Multiple Cursors a. Multiple cursors on a single display should be used only when it can be demonstrated that they are required by the task. b. If multiple cursors are used, they should be visually distinctive from one another. c. In a multitasking environment with multiple monitors, controllers, or cursors, the location of the active cursor should be obvious to the user. d. If multiple cursors are controlled by different devices, their separate controls should be compatible in operation. (For example. Assume that one cursor is moved upward on a display by forward motion of a joystick. Then a second cursor should also be moved upward by forward motion, perhaps by forward motion of a second joystick or by forward motion of a trackball or other device.) e. When multiple cursors are controlled by a single device, the cursor currently being controlled should be clearly indicated. f. When there are multiple cursor control/pointing devices, a unique pointing cursor shape should be associated with each device. And cursors of different shapes should be used for different purposes. Additional Information: Multiple cursors may confuse a user, and so require special consideration if used in interface design. Multiple cursors might be useful to mark a user's place when manipulating data in multiple display windows. In graphic interaction, one cursor might be used for line drawing and a different cursor for alphanumeric data entry (labels) CSMLab.@KIT A-50 2.6.8 Cursors 2.6.S.6 Multiple Display Devices a. When displays are the same size and are located adjacent to each other, the cursor should appear to move in a smooth, continuous motion from one display device to the next, b. When display devices are physically separated, have different orientations, or different sizes, techniques should be employed to help the user keep track of the cursor's position. Additional Information a. When display devices are physically separated or dissimilar the cursor motion between them may not be perceptually smooth. b. Thus, the user must translate motion on one display into a different motion in the other or follow the cursor as it ‘jumps’ across the space separating the displays. c. The cursor can be made to always enter the other display at a uniquely specified entry point. This method allows the users to anticipate the cursor ’s location on the other display, which may reduce the time associated with finding it. However, the user must first locate the specified entry point. d. When display screens have different proportions of height and width, then the user may have difficulty understanding how the cursor position on the edge of one display screen corresponds on the other screen. In such cases, computational techniques can be applied that compensate for the differences in screen sizes to make cursor motion appear more continuous. Alternatively, the small-screen display might overlap a smaller portion of the large-scrccn display, such that a one-to-one relationship in cursor motion is maintained. CSMLab.@KIT A-51 DISPLAY FORMAT 2.7 Menu Definition: Menu is of set of selectable options. Menu options may be presented to the user by means of visual display devices (textually or symbolically), or audibly. A menu may contain multiple option groups, but unless only one choice is allowed across groups, each group would be considered a menu. Highlighted words, symbols, or other material in texts (sometimes called "implicit" or "embedded" menus) are not considered menus within the context of ISO 9241-14. 2.7.1 Menu Structure Definition: Menu structure is relationship among a set of menus, Example - Hierarchical tree structure or network structure. Criteria : a. Menus should have a limited number of items in breadth and in depth. b. Broad and shallow menu structures, rather than narrow and deep menu structures should be used. c. A menu should be designed to display all options appropriate to any particular transaction. d. All displayed information about a menu item shall be on a single page when feasible. e. At all levels of the hierarchy a convenient means should be available to return the user to either the primary menu or the previous screen. Additional Information: Menus should be used when a user must select from several alternative options. The use of menus is beneficial for infrequent tasks, complex tasks or novice users. Depending on task and user requirements, menus can be fixed or user requestable(pu!l-down; pop-up). 2.7.2 Menu Presentation a. A visual representation of the menu structure should be provided. b. Menus should be displayed in consistent screen locations for all modes, transactions, and sequences. c. If continual or frequent reference to menu options is necessary, then the menu should be permanently presented in an area of the screen where it will not obscure other data. CSMLab.@KIT A-52 Additional Information: When a menu is first displayed, the cursor should be positioned so that it may be readily located and used. 2.7.3 Menu Selection a. Menu systems should clearly indicate which options are selectable. b. When menu items are not selectable, they should be identified as such to the user. c. If one option on a menu is selected more often than the others, then it should be highlighted. Where discrimination among options may be difficult for users, menus can provide a preview of options. d. Options that are critical or frequently chosen should be quickly accessible using as few steps as possible. e. Tf menu items are selectable via activation of programmable function keys, the arrangement of the menu list should be compatible with the arrangement of the keys to the greatest degree possible. f. A menu shall not consist of a long list of multi-page options, but shall be logically segmented to allow several sequential selections among a few alternatives. g. If a number of selections can fit on one page in no more than two columns, a simple menu shall be used. If the selection options exceed two columns, hierarchical menus may be used. h. Experienced users should be able to bypass a series of menu selections and make an equivalent command entry directly. i. When menu selection is the primary means of command entry, and especially if choices must be made from extensive lists of displayed control options, option selection by direct pointing should be provided. j. When menu selection is a secondary (occasional) means of control entry, and/or only short option lists are needed, then selection by keyed entry should be provided. When menu selection is accomplished by code entry, a standard command entry area (window) should be provided where users enter the selected k. Pointing area • If menu selection is accomplished by pointing, dual activation should be provided, in which the first action designates the selected option, followed by a separate second action that makes an explicit control entry. • The acceptable area for pointing should be as large as consistently possible, including at least the area of the displayed option label plus a half-character distance around that label. l. Feedback • Menu systems should provide feedback indicating which options have been selected so far. • Menu systems should provide feedback indicating when a pointing device has entered the selectable area of an option. CSMLab.@KIT A-53 • Menu systems should provide feedback indicating when the selection process is ended. 2.7.4 Menu Option Definition: Menu Option is selectable choice presented (textually, symbolically, or auditory) within a menu panel. 2.7.4 Menu Option 2.7.4.1 Option Organization a. When options are grouped in a menu, they shall be presented in logical groups. b. Each menu option list should have 4 to 9 options. c. Menu options should not be numbered except when the task sequencing is important in an application d. The most likely selection in a menu list shall be made the default option. e. If one option on a menu is selected more often than the others, then it should be highlighted. f. Options that arc critical or frequently chosen should be quickly accessible using as few steps as possible. g. When users must step through a sequence of menus to make a selection, the hierarchic menu structure should be designed to minimize the number of steps required. h. When menu organization is based on such principles as frequency of use, the designer shall place destructive commands (Delete, Exit) at the bottom of the menu. i. The designer shall not place options for opposing actions adjacent to each other. j. When control entries for any particular transaction will be selected from a small set of options, those options should be displayed in a menu added to the working display, rather than requiring a user to remember them or to access a separate menu display. Additional Information: a. Menus should be designed so that the function of the menu is evident to the user. b. The categories listed across the menu bar should be organized systematically. c. If meaningful categories cannot be developed for menu options then visual groups should be created for long menus. CSMLab.@KIT A-54 2.7.4 Menu Option 2.7.4.1 Arrangement of Menu Options a. Ordering of Menu Options ♦ The order of options on menus should be fixed. ♦ Groups of options in a menu shall be ordered logically. • Where ordering cannot be determined by the above, alphabetic ordering should be used. • When a group of options or a menu contains a small number of options, the options shall be ordered by logical sequence or frequency of use. ■ When a group of options or a menu contains a very large number of options shall be ordered alphabetically. b. All menu items should be visible to the user without scrolling. c. With the exception of a menu bar, the options in a menu should be presented in a single vertical column, aligned and left justified. d. When multiple menu options are displayed in a list, each option should be displayed on a new line, i.c., format the list as a single column. 2.7.4 Menu Option 2.7.4.3 Wording and Coding Menu Options Definition : Coding is a use of a system of symbols, shapes, colors or other variable sensory stimuli to represent specific information. Criteria: a. When menus are provided in different displays, they should be designed so that option lists are consistent in wording and ordering. b. The wording of options shall use terminology familiar to the user but shall distinguish each option from every other option in the menu. c. Options should be tersely worded, preferably a single word. d. The wording of menu options should consistently represent commands to the computer, rather than questions to the user, e. The attribute option label should be worded to describe the changes that will occur to the selected text f. The code associated with each option should be displayed in a consistent and distinctive manner. g. Selection codes and associated descriptors shall be presented on single lines. h. If menu selections are made by keyed codes, each code should be the initial letter or letters of the CSMLab.@KIT A-55 displayed option label, rather than assigning arbitrary letter or number codes. i. If letter codes are used for menu selection, those letters should be consistently used in designating options from one transaction to another. j. Menu items that arc available should be highlighted whenever the cursor passes over them. k. For menu items that can be in an "On" or "Off" state, the "On" state should be indicated by making the item more prominent. The active menu selection should be indicated to the user. Additional Information: If menu selection is used in conjunction with or as an alternative to command language, the wording and syntactic organization of displayed menu options should correspond consistently to defined elements and structure of the command language. 2.7.5 Menu Type 2.7.5.1 System Menu a. Appropriate system-level menu options shall always be available, b. Each system should provide a system menu that includes options to end a session, print selections, c. System menu options should be available through a system option in the system menu bar. d. A utilities option should be included in the system menu bar to support the functionality provided by the system. Example. Examples include such resources as word processing, spreadsheets, and electronic mail. e. The options of a system-level menu shall be grouped, labeled, and ordered in terms of their logical function, frequency of use, and criticality. 2.7.5 Menu Type 2.7.S.2 Hierarchical Menus Hierarchical menu is a large scries of options or menus that is organized as a multi-level, branching structure in which an option in a higher-level menu is the name of another menu at the next lower level. The options in the lowest level menus are not the names of other menus. They are commands or selectable values such as color squares on a palette or specific auto text choices. CSMLab.@KIT A-56 Criteria : a. Hierarchical menus should be used when there are more than 10 options and the options can be organized in a branching structure. b. Consistency • The display format and selection logic of hierarchic menus should be consistent at every level. • The design and use of hierarchical menus shall be consistent across tasks and transactions within an application. • The top-level menu in a hierarchical menu structure shall serve as a consistent starting point for control entries. c. Structure • A hierarchical menu structure should be designed to minimize the number of steps required. • Broad and shallow menu structures, rather than narrow and deep menu structures should be used. • Hierarchical menus should be labeled to guide the user within the hierarchical structure. • If menu options are grouped in logical subunits, each group should have a descriptive label. • Designers should use a subset of menu titles as the option items in the hierarchical menu. e. Display • An indication of the user's current position in a hierarchical menu structure should be provided. ■ If hierarchical branching is used, each subordinate menu should be visually distinct from each previous super ordinate menu. • When menu selection must be made from a long list, and not all options can be displayed at once, a hierarchic sequence of menu selections should be provided rather than one long mullipage menu. f. Accessible ■ Users should be able to select a menu or submenu directly, without going through intermediate selection steps. • Users should be able to access a visual representation of their paths through a hierarchy of menus. • Hierarchical menus should permit immediate user access to critical or frequently selected options. • The system or application should allow a user to bypass a series of menu selections by making an equivalent command entry. g. Navigation ■ A user should be able to return easily to the top-level menu at any time. • A user should be able to return to a system-level menu or the next higher-level menu from anywhere with one simple control action. • The capability should be provided for the user to mark points in the menu structure where they might want to return and return to such a point by issuing a command. ■ Software navigation aids should be provided to assist the user in quickly selecting the desired menu. CSMLab.@KIT A-57 2.7.5 Menu Type 2.7.S.3 Pull-Down Menus Definition : Pull-Down menu is a menu whose items are normally hidden from the users view and accessed by the user holding the selection button down over the desired menu-bar label. :##enL . . /-JinhwWfeeAocmintOpkn#.. Ar.h Doom Adm mstrufion Ooir ,'.t:i- ng Ri 1195 •Administration Stint Alias Administration deleted Let Admmreii 3'ian r.n.714,-xruM Options,. petal- IK Edit My Preferences M nWbw Charge My Signature Charge ^ngerintonnoiio > Change k'ait Forwarding Intc rtrteticm Oar-ge Jserlrilcimat.QR Change Vacation W? wge Change Pro; as- 5 ny Rufes Edi* Rook Manege MaWboxw a. A user should be able to select an option on a pull-down menu by moving the pointer onto the desired item and selecting it. b. Pull-down menus shall always appear immediately below the option whose selection leads to their appearance. c. When only one option in a menu can be selected, a selection indicator should move to the chosen item and remain until another item is selected with the indicated menu item remaining in effect until another item is chosen. d. Command options should be executed as soon as the user selects them. e. The menu should be wide enough to accommodate the longest option and its keyboard accelerator, if f. The title of a pull-down menu shall be unique in the menu bar and, to the extent possible, describe or identify the options in the pull-down menu. g. When names of windows or forms that will be displayed and names of other menus are used as options in pull down menus, they shall be identified by a special symbol. CSMLab.@KIT A-58 Additional Information: a. Pull-down menus should be used rather than pop-up menus if the position of the cursor on the screen is not important for information or option retrieval. b. The options in a pull-down menu shall be one of five types: commands, names of windows or forms that will be displayed, names of other menus, sets of exclusive options, or sets of nonexclusive options. c. Sets of exclusive options and sets of unexclusive options shall be identified by special symbol. The example of names of other menus, an arrow (—>) or triangle (>) that points to the location where the menu will appear. The example of sets of exclusive options, a filled circle (•) for the selected option and an open circle (o) for the unselected options. The example of sets of uncxclusive options, a marked square (0) for the selected option(s), if any, and an open square (□) for the unsclccted option(s), if any. 2.7.5 Menu Type 2.7.S.4 Cascading Menus Cascading Menu is a type of hierarchical menu in which a submenu is attached to the right side of a menu item. Cascading menus can be added to drop-down menus, pop-up menus, or even other cascading menus. System Status Application Administration Bark up Svstem Scan tor Owned Objects,,, a. Every cascaded menu item that leads to cascading menus shall be marked with a cascade indicator after the menu item name. b. Because cascaded menus require the user to remember where options are located or buried (the original menu may be partially hidden by the new cascaded menu), the number of levels should be limited to Additional information: Cascaded menus should be considered when the menu bar is crowded and the grouping of options is obvious to the user. CSMLab.@KIT 2.7.5 Menu Type 2.7.5.5 Scrolling Menus Definition : Scrolling Menu is a menu usually containing many options that docs not display all of the options at once. It includes a scroll-bar that permits the sequential display of all options. Scrolling menus are also called list boxes and scrolling lists. a. It shall be obvious to users that there are more options than are visible. b. Scrolling capability shall be provided for menus used in data entry that are too long to display in their entirety (e.g.. lists of retrievable files or acceptable entries for a filed), c. The scroll-bar shall be placed at the right of the displayed options. d. All the options in a scrolling menu shall be available for explicit and complete display through scrolling. e. When the menu has a title, it shall appear above the displayed options and be easily distinguishable from the options. f. The displayed options in a scrolling menu shall be arranged vertically with one option per line. g. The options in a scrolling menu should be ordered in a way that minimizes user navigation, h. When ordering by expected frequency of use or in chronological or other sequential order is not appropriate, options should be ordered alphabetically. i. When a scrolling menu is large, for example, 50 options or more, the application should provide a search capability that would allow users to type a few characters of the option and search for those characters. CSMLab.@KJT 2.7.5 Menu Type 2.7.S.6 Pop-Up Menus Definition: Pop-up menus can be very useful in data entry. They can present to a user the permissible entries for a field thus eliminating the need for the user to remember the entries, preventing invalid entries, and eliminating potential typing errors. A pop-up menu resembles a pull-down menu, but it is not associated with the lop level menus listed in the menu bar. The pop-up menu is displayed if the mouse pointer is inside the graph area of a base window and BMenu (the right mouse button) is pressed. The pop-up menu contains some frequently used menu operations for direct access in the graph area. The following operations are available in the pop-up menu. a. A title shall be displayed for each pop-up menu. b. The pop-up menu should be made distinct from the screen background by giving it a contrasting yet complementary background or by giving it a solid-line border, c. Pop-up menus should be activated only by a specific user action that requests the display of the menu. d. An indication or cue shall be provided to the existence of a pop-up menu. e. A pop-up menu shall be placed directly below the pointer used to select it and near the object or higher- level menu that is being manipulated. f. A user shall be able to select an option on a pop-up menu by moving the pointer onto the desired option and clicking the appropriate button. g. When an option in a pop-up menu leads to a cascading menu, a right pointing triangle( ►) should be placed after the option label. Selected options that lead to a cascading menu should remain highlighted CSMLab.@KIT A-61 and serve as the title for the cascading menu. h. When an option in a pop-up menu remains on display after it has been selected, it should remain highlighted. i. When a list of likely choices is displayed in a pop-up menu, the user should be able to type in a choice that was not anticipated. j. Pop-up menus should not be used for accumulating attribute lists such as text style choices. 2.7.5 Menu Type 2.7.S.7 Tear-Off Menus Definition : A tear-off menu is a menu that can be removed from the menu bar and moved to another location on the screen where it can remain on display. Tear-off menus are also called “tacked” or “pushpin”menus. a. The user should have the capability to move and re-size the tear-off menu b. Tear-off menus should be placed so that the user can make multiple selections before dismissing it. Additional Information: A graphic tear-ofY menu should be used instead of a fixed palette when it can save display space and provide greater flexibility. 2.7.5 Menu Type 2.7.5.5 Toggled Menus Definition: Toggled menu options are used to issue commands as a binary selection of one of two opposite commands. a. Toggled menu options shall be used for two and only two opposite commands that are accessed frequently. b. Toggled menu options shall begin with verbs that clearly state the outcome of selecting that menu item. CSMLab.@KlT A-62 2.7.5 Menu Type 2.7.S.9 Graphic Menus Definition: Graphic menus (palettes) are a set of unlabeled symbols, typically presented within small rectangles. Symbols may be icons, patterns, characters, or drawings that represent an operation. Palettes are used widely in drawing and painting packages but are commonly found in word-processing applications as a. Symbols within graphic palettes should be labeled unless they arc self-explanatory. b. The user should have the capability to move and rc-sizc the palette. c. Upon selection of a symbol or tool, a reminder should be displayed to indicate the mode that has been activated. 2.7.5 Menu Type 2.7.5.10 Permanent and User-Requested Menus a. Permanent menus " The use of permanent menus should be minimized. • Permanent menus should not be removable by the user. • When permanent menus arc used, there should be one standard design for the input prompt that is used across all tasks. b. Use-User-rcquested menus ■. The use of a user-requested menu would obscure information needed for a task. • Display space is limited. « Users need to sec the menu items only when selecting them. • Activation - User-requested menus shall be displayed only after a single, specific action by the user. • After the menu options selection process is complete, the menu shall revert to its hidden state. Additional Information: The ideal user-requested menu design would provide the user with a reminder of the menu categories and allow the user to select an item with few actions and little movement of a cursor on the screen. CSMLab.@KlT A-63 2.7.6 Menu Bars Definition: Menu Bar is a specialized function area that displays categories of alternatives of user responses. A horizontal menu appears on top of a window. Usually, each option in a menu bar is associated with a pull- T9 Fife Edit View Tools W.ndow Help - S X i Ns* OrbN % 1=H ...... in,,:. i. hv,e I Criteria: a. Menu bars should contain no more than 10 options plus Help. b. Primary windows should have menu bars that extend the lull width of the primary window. c. The categories listed across the menu bar should be organized systematically. d. Category labels on menu bars should be centered in the vertical dimension. e. Menu bar options should remain visible at all times or until the user makes a selection, f. options in window menu bars should not duplicate options in the system menu bar. g. Each menu that appears as an option in a menu bar should have a title that is unique in the application. h. When the same menu occurs in different windows, it should have the same title in each. i. Each title in a menu bar should have a mnemonic to permit selection from the keyboard. j. The options should begin at the left margin and extend to the right with Help located consistently, with enough space between them so that they can be read easily and accommodate the longest options in the pull-down menus. CSMLab.@KIT A-64 k. Horizontally, category labels on the menu bar should be separated by enough space to be distinguishable as separate items, i.e., by at least two standard character widths. l. The height of a menu bar should be sufficient to contain standard text characters that serve as menu category labels, as well as space above and below the text characters. m. A menu bar should only be used if the display screen size and resolution permit fast and accurate movement of the cursor onto the options. CSMLab.@KlT A-65 2 DISPLAY FORMAT 2.8 Procedure Steps Procedure steps is a set of instructions that performs a CBP(Computer-Based Procedure) task. a. Procedure steps should be concise. The procedures should be organized in a hierarchical, logical, consistent manner. b. Each procedure should contain identifying information including title, procedure number, revision number, date, and organizational approval. c. Each procedure should state its high-level goals and applicability, including its procedure category, e.j emergency or abnormal. d. Each procedure should be organized into sections of related steps e. The procedure should specify any conditions that must be met before an action can be undertaken. f. The detailed CBP design should be fully consistent with the rest of the HSI. The terminology, conventions, standards, and codes used in the presentation of the ARPs should be consistent with the rest of the HSI. g. The number of VDUs on which CBP information is displayed should be sufficient to provide all the procedure-related information needed for a procedure step, including cautions and reference material h. The content and presentation of procedure information in PBPs and CBPs should be consistent. Additional Information: a. PBPs should be available in the event of CBP failure. b. Upon transfer to PBPs, a means should be provided to support the user's determination of currently open procedures, location in the procedures, completed and not completed steps, and currently monitored steps. CSMLab.@KIT A-66 WINDOWS 3.1 Window Components 3.1.1 Title Bar and Title Definition : Title bar is a bar on top of a window. The title bar contains the name of the file or application. In many graphical user interfaces, including the Macintosh and Microsoft Windows interfaces, you move (drag) a window by grabbing the title bar. —Wind*, * TM* Bar , , File .. Edit View Favorites ■Tools Back - 3 Address http://web.ralpoly.edu/cpv , Gil Poly • The window title shall appear centered in the window title bar. • Every display should begin with a title or header at the top, briefly describing the contents or purpose of the display. • Titles shall begin with the object under focus and be followed by the action underway. • Significant words in the title (except user-defined words) shall be capitalized. • The title shall be the application name followed by the opened file name, separated by a single dash(-). • Where displays have several levels of titles (and/or labels), the system should provide visual cues to aid users in distinguishing among the levels in the hierarchy, • All displays should contain a clear title in double-height characters, located centered at the top of each page or another prominent method of identifying the display should be used. b. Title Bar • A title bar shall appear as a rectangular area at the top of a window inside the window border and with the title of the window in the center. • Window title bars should contain a control at the left end that, when activated, produces a menu of window management options and Minimize, Maximize/Restore, and Close controls at the right end. • Window controls shall be located on the title bar with Minimize, Restore/ Maximize, and Close options at the right end and a control producing a menu of window management options on the left CSMLab.@KIT A-67 3.1.2 Border Criteria: a. A window should have a distinct border that encloses all of the window components. b. Color Coding for Alarm Window Border - Individual alarm window borders and heading plate borders shall be white and black color, respectively. 3.1.3 Working or Client Area Working area (or client area) is the m. rea of the window that users employ to do their operational or application tasks. It is the area where make their inputs and receive their outputs. Every window shall have vorking or client area. 3.1.4 Scroll-Bar Scroll Bar is control that allows a user to view objects that extend beyond the size of a displayed related window or list by moving the objects into or out of the available display area; the scroll bar also indicates whether additional information is available. CSMLab.@KIT A-68 Criteria : a. Scroll-bars shall be provided whenever the size of a textual or graphic entity exceeds the space available to display it. b. A scroll-bar shall contain a vertical or horizontal line or area along which the scroll box can move, the length of which represents the entire entity. c. When there is a choice, vertical (top-lo-botlom) scrolling should be used instead of horizontal (left to right) scrolling. d. A vertical scroll-bar should be the height of the scrollable portion of the window. e. A horizontal scroll-bar should be at least one-half the width of the scrollable portion of the window. f. Scroll-bars shall be displayed in lull contrast for the active window only (the window that displays the user’s current input). g. When the entire document fits in a display area, scroll-bars are unnecessary and shall be deactivated. h. Scroll-bar components shall change when the window size or information position changes reflecting the present status. i. The size of the scroll box shall indicate proportionately the amount of the document displayed in the window relative to the percentage of available information in the file being viewed. j. The scroll box should indicate by its spatial position the relative location in the file of the information being viewed. k. When the scroll box has been selected, it should be indicated to the user in some visually distinctive l. Directional arrows should be provided in small boxes distinct from the scroll area to indicate the direction that scrolling may be performed. The appropriate directional arrow shall be subdued or grayed out if no information is currently available through scrolling in a particular direction. 3.1.5 Message Bar Message Bar is bar with (1) Alarm information displayed in text or (2) Data that are transmitted from another user or from the system. CSMLab.@KIT a. The message bar should be placed near the bottom of an active window. b. The message bar should display status information about a selection, a command, or a process; display help information; and explain highlighted menu items. c. The user should be able to turn the message bar on or off by a menu selection. d. Messages too long to be presented in the message bar should be displayed in message dialog boxes. e. The message bar should automatically remove messages that are no longer relevant. f. The message bar shall be a read-only, non-scrolling display for messages. g. The left side of a message bar should be used for routine, simple help, and status messages. h. The right side of a message bar should be used to present information about the window, such as the name of an object or the page number. 3.1.6 Status Bar Definition: Status Bar is a special type of message bar used to present information about the current status of the application. The status bar should present information about the current state of the application including brief messages, current cursor location, and mode, 3.1.7 Control Bar Definition : Control Bar is bar with function of graphic, often analogous to physical controls such as dials, radio buttons, which allows a user to directly manipulate data, other objects or their attributes. CSMLab.@KIT A-70 Criteria : a. Control bars should be used for frequently used features and commands. b. Fixed control bars should be located at a fixed position within the application window, and movable control bars should be placed in a supplemental window or a dialog box, able to be moved to a position selected by the user. c. Commands for fixed-position control bars in the main application window should be displayed as options under the View menu. d. Users should be allowed to specify which control bars, if any, they wish to display. e. A window shall never conceal the movable control bar with which it is associated. f. A small title bar and control menu box should be provided for each movable control bar. 3.1.8 Push Buttons a. The top, bottom, or sides of the working area should be reserved for push buttons that provide actions that can be taken in the window. b. The push buttons should be displayed in a horizontal row or vertical column centered with the window. c. Push button order should be consistent throughout an application. d. A push button assigned an action that is potentially destructive shall not be designated as the default button. e. Related push buttons should be placed together. f. When push buttons are required for system interaction, they should always be visible on a primary display. 3.1.9 Action icons Definition : Active Icons is the icons in which user is currently interacting with the system. a. When a window includes action icons, they should be arranged along the left margin of the window. b. The number of action icons in a window should not exceed 20. c. When a window includes action icons, a user shall not be able to move the icons outside the window. CSMLab.@KIT A-71 3 WINDOWS 3.2 Window Type 3.2.1 Primary and Secondary Windows A primary window is a top or high-level window in an application. A secondary window is a window that is displayed from within a primary window or another secondary window. Secondary windows arc sometimes called child windows. a. Primary Windows • Every application should initially display a primary window. • A primary window shall contain a title bar, a border, window controls, and a working area or client area, message areas. • Primary windows should be independent of one another in the application. • Applications should display a primary window as soon as the application starts, without leaving the screen blank. • As necessary for performance of the intended user tasks, an application should be capable of having multiple primary windows open at the same time. b. Secondary Windows ■ A secondary window shall contain a title bar, a working area, and any of the other window components appropriate to the application. • A secondary window should be used to temporarily add data (e.g., help screens, menus, or other features) to a display as a means to control or display divergent information or to segregate and control separate operations. • When present, a secondary window should appear within the borders of and on top of (superimposed on) a portion of its "parent" window. • Secondary windows should not cover any part of the primary window that a user needs to see or use to do his or her task. • A secondary window should be associated with a particular primary or other secondary window. • A secondary window should be able to call up additional secondary windows to further the interaction. • Closing a secondary window should not affect the parent window. • A secondary window should be removed when its parent window is removed. • The number of secondary windows should be limited to avoid creating navigation problems for the • • Modal secondary windows should not be movable. • Modeless secondary windows should themselves be moveable. • Designers should only use modal secondary windows for serious problems for which an explicit CSMLab.@KlT A-72 response is required of the user before continuing. 3.2.2 Application Windows a. All application windows should have a border or frame, a title bar, window controls, and a working b. Components Location • The title bar shall extend across the top of the window. • The window title shall appear centered in the window title bar. • Window controls shall be located on the title bar with Minimize, Restore/ Maximize, and Close options at the right end and a control producing a menu of window management options on the left • When used, the menu bar shall extend across the window just below the title bar. • The working area shall occupy all the space inside the border that is not occupied by another component. • When used, the command entry area shall extend across the bottom of the window just above the message area. • When used, the message area shall extend across the bottom of the window. c. Title • The window title shall be in mixed-case letters. •The title shall be as informative as possible, describing the purpose of the window and may also include the name of the application. • When a window is displayed as a result of the selection of an option in a menu, the title of the window shall be the same as the wording of the option. • • The user should be able to move and resize application windows. •Most application operations should take place within the application window, these may appear outside of the application window. The three exceptions are dialogs or drop-down menus in resized windows, movable dialog boxes, and the Help window. • The user should be able to use either the mouse or the keyboard to switch from one application window to another and from one secondary window to another within the same application. CSMLab.@KIT A-73 The System Windows Criteria : a. The system window shall appear when system startup is complete. b. The system window shall occupy the entire screen. c. All system windows shall have a border or frame, a title bar, window controls, and a working area. d. The system window shall contain a system title bar that extends across the top of the screen. e. The system-title bar shall contain a centered title that identifies the system. f. The system window shall contain a system-menu bar that extends across the screen located just below the system-title bar. g. Users should not be able to move or resize the system window nor shall they be able to obscure the system-title bar or system menu bar. 3.2.4 Data-Entry Windows Definition: A data-enlry window is a window that contains a set of labeled fields for entering, changing, and deleting data. It may also contain labeled data display fields, which a user cannot change. a. A data-entry window should contain a title that describes the purpose or contents of the window, a set of labeled fields, vertical or horizontal scroll-bars or both if the contents do not fit in the window's working area, and controls appropriate to the task. b. The organization of a data entry window should be consistent with the task it represents. c. Every effort should be made to minimize the number of pages in data entry windows, particularly if the user is expected to change pages frequently while entering data. d. When the contents of a set of data-entry fields do not fit the window working area, the window should provide users the ability to page, scroll, or both, through the entire set e. When a data entry window contains push buttons, the buttons should be placed in a row at the bottom of the working area, visually separated from the data fields. f. A data entry window should contain the controls appropriate to the task. g. When a user has finished making entries in a data-entry window, he or she shall be able to save the entries by taking an explicit action such as selecting a Save menu option or activating an Apply or OK push button. CSMLab.@KIT 3.2.5 Text Windows a. A window intended for the display of textual information should be wide enough to display an entire line of anticipated text without horizontal scrolling. b. When an entire text document does not fit in the current window, the window shall have a vertical scroll-bar or a similar mechanism (positioned either on the right or left side of a window) so that users can view the entire document. c. The default height for text windows and windows used for scanning data should be at least four lines of information. d. The default width for a generic text window should enable 50 to 80 characters to be displayed. Additional Informal ion: a. Window sizes of four lines provide belter performance than those with fewer than four lines. Windows with more than four lines show little advantage over windows with four lines. b. When users read continuously scrolling text (at a rate set by the user), line lengths of 52 to 78 characters provide the fastest performance. 3.2.6 Map Windows Criteria : a. A map window should include a title. b. A map window should include identifying information such as coordinates, area, and scale; the map c. A map window should include a continuous coordinate indicator that states the pointer location; and appropriate controls. 3.2.7 Utility Windows Definition: A utility window is a supplementary window that provides the users with additional tools or controls such as a tool palette or a set of text attributes Utility windows should float top of document windows. CSMLab.@KIT 3 WINDOWS 3.3 Message Windows 3.3.1 Request Message Window- Definition: A message window (sometimes called a message box) is a secondary window that provides users with non-critical information, progress information about lengthy processes, alerts to unusual events, and/or warnings of potential dangers. Message windows may be modal or modeless. a. A request message window should be used when it is necessary to request information from a user before processing can proceed. b. A request message window should contain a title, a question symbol (?),a message indicating the information required and all of the following push buttons that apply in the order in which they are listed: OK, Apply, Reset, Cancel, and Help. 3.3.2 Information Message Window a. An information message window should be used to convey non-critical information that requires acknowledgement. b. Information message windows shall be modal and require acknowledgement. c. An information message window should contain an information symbol , a message, and the following push buttons below the message in the order listed: OK and Help. d. Information message windows shall not appear to the user to interrupt processing by the application. 3.3.3 Confirmation Message Window a. Confirmation message windows should be used to request clarification of a previous user action. b. The application should suspend processing until the user responds to a confirmation message window. c. Confirmation message windows should contain a question symbol (?), a message, and one of the following sets of push buttons below the message in the order listed: (Yes, No, and Help} or (Yes, No, Cancel, and Help}. CSMLab.@KIT A-76 3.3.4 Warning Message Window Criteria : a. Caution and warning windows should be front most on the display. b. Critical messages warning users of destructive consequences of actions should be displayed in warning message windows. c. When a warning message window appears, processing should be suspended until a user responds to the message. d. Warning message windows should contain a warning symbol (!), a message, and one of the following sets of push buttons below the message in the order listed: {Yes, No, and Help} or {OK, Cancel, and Help}. 3.3.5 W orking Message W indow Definition: Working message window is the main window that users employ to do their operational or application tasks. It is the window where users make their inputs and receive their outputs. a. The display of a working message window shall not interrupt processing, b. The working message window shall remain on display until processing is completed or until the user minimizes the window or cancels the process. c. The window shall be removed automatically when processing is completed, d. When processing time will be lengthy, the window should be updated to indicate the status of processing (e.g., percent complete or time remaining) or should include a scale showing the proportion of processing completed. e. Working message windows shall contain a working symbol, a message, and one of the following sets of push buttons below the message, in the order listed: {OK and Help}, {OK, Cancel, and Help}, {OK, Stop, and Help}, or {OK, Pause, Resume, Stop, and Help}. f. When the processing time resulting from a user action will exceed 2 seconds, the system shall display a working message window. 3.3.6 Dialog Boxes Dialog box i< graphical user interface operating system vindow that appears above the rest that CSMLab.@KIT A-77 generally lists additional information, errors, and/or options. a. Modal dialog boxes should be used to make the user give necessary information before carrying out the current operation. b. Control windows should be smaller than application windows. c. Control windows (dialog boxes), when activated, should be visible on a primary display. d. A movable dialog box should contain a title bar consisting of a control menu and a title. e. A dialog box that is immovable should not contain a title bar. An application should primarily use movable dialog boxes: the user can reposition these to view obscured data. f. A dialog box should have a border and a title that clearly indicates the function of the set of controls Each function of a dialog box should have a push button. g. When covering underlying information is a problem, the application should use movable dialog boxes. h. Sets of controls that perform similar or related functions should be grouped and presented together in a dialog box (also called a control window). Additional Information: Dialog boxes may be movable or fixed, of a single size or two alternate sizes, modal (requiring a response before continuing), semi-modal, or modeless, and may present limited response options or more complex options. 3.3.7 Error Dialog Box Error dialog box is in a graphical user interface operating system a new window that appears above the rest that generally lists errors. a. When an error is detected in a system that uses windows, a dialog box should appear that specifies the b. Error windows shall be modal, requiring user acknowledgement in order to continue After the user acknowledges the error, the dialog box should disappear and the actual field that contains the error should be highlighted. c. An error dialog box should not be placed in front of the error. d. An error message window should contain an error symbol, a message, and the following push buttons below the message in the order listed: OK, Cancel, and Help. CSMLab.@KIT A-78 WINDOWS 3.4 Window States 3.4.1 Open Windows a. The user should be able to open a window by performing any of a set of simple actions. b. An open window shall be completely visible on the screen at the time it is opened and when it is active. c. An open window shall be capable of receiving input from the system. A window that is open and active shall be capable of receiving input from a user. d. The system should keep track of the windows that are open (but not necessarily active or displayed), and provide a means of displaying the list of open windows to the user. 3.4.2 Closed Windows Criteria : a. A closed window shall have no appearance on the screen, either as a window or as an icon. b. When a secondary window is closed, it and any of its secondary windows should be removed from the screen without affecting the parent window except for the disappearance of the secondary window. c. When a window that was closed had input focus, the user shall explicitly select another window to have focus instead of having the application arbitrarily assign focus to another window on the screen unless emergency action is required. 3.4.3 Active Windows Definition : The window in which user is currently interacting with the system. Typically, this means that an active window (a) is currently receiving input from the user, (b) has last received input from the user, or (c) has been readied for input through the user's explicit action. The user is generally said to be “working in" the active window (such as processing a document, controlling a system, entering data). a. A temporary window object should not obscure critical control information and command entry interfaces of the active window. b. Only one window at a time shall be active. c. An active window shall be distinguishable from inactive windows. d. Under normal operating conditions, active windows should be front most on the display. CSMLab.@KIT A-79 e. The active window shall not be obscured by any other window or icon. f. When windows are allowed to overlap, the active window should be in front of and not overlapped by other windows. g. If several windows are displayed at once, the window(s) in which action can be taken should be indicated. h. . The action that opens a window should automatically make that window active. i. A window shall be made active by clicking anywhere inside the window frame or picking it from the window menu. j. The action that activates a window should automatically position the place holding cursor in that window so that the user can provide inputs through that window. k. When a window is made active, all other windows shall be made inactive, although there may still be operations (e.g., background processing) occurring in the inactive windows. l. When a window is reactivated, it should not have an affect on any preexisting selection, Upon reactivation, a window should be restored to the state that it was in when it was last activated. 3.4.4 Input Focus Definition: Input focus is the notion that only one window and usually only one object in a window at a time is capable of accepting input from a pointing device or the keyboard Criteria : a. Regardless of the number of windows open in an application, only one window at a time (the active window) shall be able to receive input from a pointing device or the keyboard. b. A user shall be able to move the input focus among objects(to any open window) in the window using either the pointing device or the keyboard. c. Users shall be able to assign input focus to any window that is wholly or partially visible by moving the pointer onto any visible portion (and clicking the appropriate button where explicit input focus is necessary). d. Users shall be able to press a single key or specific key combinations to move the input focus forward or backward through the open windows one window at a time in the order in which they were opened. c. When an object has input focus, that object shall be indicated with a location cursor or highlighting. When a window first appears, the location cursor or highlighting shall be placed on the object that users are most likely to select, for example, a text field or a default push button. f. When a window has lost and then regained input focus, the location cursor or highlighting shall be placed on the object that last had input focus in the window. CSMLab.@KIT A-80 3 WINDOWS 3.5 Window Operations 3.5.1 General a. User control of windows should operate consistently from one display to another for each type of window. b. Users should be able to perform the operations on objects in a window. These operations are to move an object to another location in the same window or in a different window to copy an object and place the copy at a different location in the same window or in a different window. c. As appropriate to the user task, windows should be capable of the following operations: scrolling/panning, resizing, moving, hiding, activating, deactivating, copying to/from, zooming in/out, tabbing, and undo-last. d. The user should be able to activate a window by performing any of a set of simple actions in that window or related to that window. e. A window might be activated by moving the pointing cursor to the window and performing any action, including pressing a key or a button on a cursor control device, issuing a command to open a specific window, selecting a window title from a list on a menu, or selecting an icon representing the window. Additional Information: a. Cursor positioning controls should operate consistently within all windows. If controls in one window operate differently than in another, user confusion will be unavoidable. b. Control of predefined windows may simply involve "opening" and "closing" them, by selection of displayed option labels or function keys. c. If several windows arc open, several easy means should be provided for a user to shift among them. Typical methods of shifting among open windows include: clicking a mouse button, the tab key, cursor keys, or a function key. d. The amount of resizing, placement, and manipulation of windows required for using the HSI should be minimized. 3.5.2 Splitting Windows Definition: A splitting window is a user to split their window horizontally or vertically. This enables the user to view multiple sections of the same document and/or multiple files at once. CSMLab.@KlT A-81 Criteria : a. Window split capabilities shall be provided that allow the user to divide the window into panes at any location along the scroll-bar. For all windows that are capable of being split, applications should provide a split box. b. When a window is split, scroll-bars should be displayed on the panes perpendicular to the direction of the split. c. After a window is split, separate scroll-bars shall appear on either side of the split bar or split box. d. A split window should allow the user to display different views of the same information such as print view and outline view. e. All panes in a window should be kept within the window. Each pane of a split window shall be independent in its manipulation. f. The user should be able to drag the split box to a location in the scroll-bar where the new pane is to g. The user should be allowed to split the window into as many panes as is useful and practical. 3.5.3 Minimizing Windows A minimize operation reduces a windows presence into a standby icon button on the information line at the bottom of the screen. Criteria : a. When a user minimizes an open window, the window and any open secondary windows shall be replaced by the window's icon. b. Any processing occurring in a window should continue after the window is minimized. c. Any window that can be minimized should have a unique icon or label that serves as an identifier of the window it represents. d. Unless specified otherwise by the application, the icons representing minimized windows shall be placed in the lower left comer of the screen, arrayed in a row from left to right in the order in which they are created. e. A minimized window shall have a menu that contains the same options as its window system menu with the exceptions of the Resize and Minimize options. f. A user shall select a minimized window menu item using standard option selection methods. A user shall be able to remove a minimized window menu by moving the pointer off the menu and clicking the appropriate button. g. Where applicable, the application shall provide a minimize operation that changes a window into an icon button at the bottom of the screen. CSMLab.@KlT A-82 3.5.4 Maximizing Windows Definition : A maximize operation enlarges a windows presence into a standby icon button Criteria : a. When the window can be resized, the application shall provide a Maximize operation that enlarges a window to its maximum size. b. When the user clicks on the maximize button, the application shall enlarge the window to its largest size or to encompass the entire display screen, which ever is smaller. c. When a window is maximized, the Maximize button shall assume a Restore function and the button shall take on the Restore icon and function. 3.5.5 Restoring Windows Criteria: a. Where applicable, the application shall provide a Restore operation that enables a user to restore a minimized or maximized window to its default size. b. It shall be possible to restore a minimized window by either using the pointing device or by using the keyboard. c. The Restore option shall be unavailable when the window is its default size. d. A restored window shall have active status. e. A click on the Restore button shall change the window and any associated secondary windows to the size and location where they had been prior to last being maximized or minimized. Additional Information: Resorting operation was done by moving the pointer and clicking on the icon representing the minimized window or displaying the menu of the minimized window and selecting restore. 3.5.6 Opening Windows a. The user should be able to open a window by performing any of a set of simple actions. b. The action that opens a window should automatically make that window active. CSMLab.@KIT A-83 Additional information: Typical methods of opening windows include: issuing a command to open a specific window, selecting a window title from a list on a menu, or selecting an icon for the window. 3.5.7 Closing Windows a. When the window can be closed, the application shall provide a Close operation that enables a user to close a window, that is, to remove it from the screen and stop processing operations associated with the b. When processing is occurring or when unsaved data have been generated in the window, users shall be required to confirm the Close action before the window is removed from the screen and processing c. Users should be able to close a window and any secondary windows with a single action, b. When a main application window is closed by the user, all associated subordinate windows and dialog boxes should also close. 3.5.8 Moving Windows a. Window movement capability should be provided such that the user can move windows to different areas of the display. b. The application should permit the user to move a window without making the window active. c. Movement of a window should appear to be smooth and continuous to the user. d. When a window is movable and a pointing device is available, a user shall be able to move the window by moving the pointer into the window title bar, pressing the appropriate button on the pointing device, and dragging the window to its new location. e. The system should not allow the user to move a window containing critical information off the display f. The user shall never be able to move a window off the display so that it cannot be seen, although it may be completely hidden by one or more other windows. Additional Information: a. In some applications, users are not able to move all windows. For example, some windows are only advisory in nature, such as the amount of processing time remaining. These types of windows cannot be moved, closed, minimized to icon size, or resized by the user. CSMLah.(SKTT A-84 b. As the user moves the pointing device the window or an outline of the window will move on the screen resulting in the display of the window in the new location when the button is released. 3.5.9 Resizing Windows a. Standard buttons should be provided by which the user may control the size of the window. b. Users should be able to change the horizontal and vertical dimensions of a window independently or together. c. Critical information shall not be obscured during window resizing. d. When a user resizes a window, only the border(s) affected should move, not the objects within the borders. e. When the size of a window changes but the content remains the same, the image size should change proportionately as the window size changes. f. Upon resizing of a window, text, graphics, or icon layouts should reformat so that they remain visible. g. When a pointing device is available, a user shall be able to resize a resizable window by moving the pointer onto the window's border, pressing and holding the appropriate button on the pointing device, dragging the border to the desired position, and releasing the button resulting in the window being displayed in its new size. h. When a window becomes too small to display its objects, vertical or horizontal scroll-bars or both should be added. i. When a window has been moved or resized in the current session, it shall appear in its default location at the next application session. Additional Information: a. When dragging the border of a window, the window itself or an outline of the window shall move with the pointer, indicating the changing size of the window, while leaving the window displayed in its original position. b. When appropriate, the size to which a window can be reduced may be restricted so that its objects cannot be obscured, C SMLab, @KIT A-85 3 WINDOWS 3.6 Window Navigation Definition: Navigation is ability to move from field to field within a from, to proceed forward and backward through a form and move from form to form. a. Short navigation paths should be provided between display pages that will be used one after the other. b. One approach may be to provide broad, shallow menu structures rather than narrow, deep ones. c. Other features for reducing navigation distance should be used such as navigation shortcuts and buttons for accessing previous displays. (Example of shortcuts: buttons for jumping to the top of the menu or major branches without accessing intermediate nodes) d. The user should be able to switch between software modules in a quick, easy manner using an interface such as a tree or organization chart. e. Navigational links to and from high-level and lower-levels of information and to reference and supporting information should be provided when needed for operators' tasks. f. When using an overlapping window structure, applications should provide a user-requested iconic or text map indication of all open windows to allow the user to easily identify all open windows. g. An overlapping window format should be used in cases where • the task requires variable or unconstrained types, sizes, numbers, contents and/or arrangement of windows; • the visual display is small or such low resolution that users cannot view meaningful amounts of information in individual tiled windows; • user activities cut across independent tasks, • tasks require frequent window manipulation and • users are expert or use the application frequently. h. Overlapping windows should not cover needed, underlying, screen information; the underlying screen title; or navigation controls that may be needed. i. When windows overlap, neutral background patterns should be used instead of complex background patterns because the complex patterns may create unwanted visual effects. j. Users should be given the capability to designate the active window through the iconic or text open window map by highlighting the window representation. k. When possible, the user should be able to query an open window map for expanded information on the file or application operating in the window. l. When an iconic or text map is provided for determining the numbers and names of open windows in an overlapping system, the user should be able to bring a window forward from the map without having to resize or move other windows. CSMLab.@KIT A-86 Additional Information: Minimizing the navigation distance can reduce the amount of time that information must be held working memory, thereby reducing cognitive demands on the user. CSMLab.@KIT A-87 INFORMATION CODING Definition: Use of a system of symbols, shapes, colors or other variable sensory stimuli to represent specific information. Coding may be used (a) for highlighting(i.e., to attract a user’s attention to part of a display), (b) as a perceptual indicator of a data group, or ( c) to symbolize a state a attribute of an object (e.g., to show a temperature level or for warning purposes) 4.1 General a. The coding scheme used by the alarm system should assure rapid detection and interpretation by the users under all control room operating conditions. b. Coding (e.g., flash-rate, intensity, and color coding) conventions should be consistently applied throughout alarm displays (e.g., on tiles and on VDUs). c. The number of different coding techniques should be kept to a minimum, so that the coding system does not become too difficult to use or understand. d. Redundant codes (e.g., color and location) should be used for alarms that require rapid action. e. To establish the priority of visual signals, discriminatory characteristics such as flashing, color, shape, symbols, color contrast, size, luminance contrast, and location should be used. f. All coding within the system shall be uniform and shall be established by agreement with the procuring activity. Additional Information: a. To be effective, an alarm system should attract attention and help the operator focus attention on more- important rather than less-important alarms. A flashing visual signal is a preferred means for directing attention and indicating alarm status (e.g., unacknowledged, acknowledged, and cleared-not reset) on SDCV and computer-based displays. b. Coding shall be used to facilitate discriminating between individual displays, identifying functionally related displays, recognizing the relationship between displays, identifying critical information within a display, and to preserve conventional practices and arrangements for warning and alerting systems. CSMLab.@KIT A-88 4 INFORMATION CODING 4.2 Color Coding 4.2.1 Contrast / Luminance Refer to 1.7,3 Contrast/Luminance 4.2.2 Brightness Refer to 1.7.4 Brightness 4.2.3 Location Refer to 1.7.5 Location 4.2.4 Use of Color Refer to 1.7.10.2 Use of Color 4.2.5 Color Selection Refer to 1.7.10.3 Color Selection 4.2.6 Color Coding for Discrete Data Categories Refer to 1.7.10.4 Color Coding for Discrete Data Categories 4.2.7 Color Coding for Relative Values Refer to 1.7.10.5 Color Coding for Relative Values 4.2.8 Unique Assignment of Color Codes Refer to 1.7.10.6 Unique Assignment of Color Codes 4.2.9 Redundant Color Coding Refer to 1.7.10.7Redundant Color Coding CSMLab.@KTT 4.2.10 Unplanned Patterns from Color Coding Refer to 1.7.10.8 Unplanned Patterns from Color Coding 4.3 Symbol Coding Definition: Symbol is a representation of something by reason of relationship, association, or convention. a. To the extent possible, a symbol should be an analog of the object it represents in general use and well known to the users or based on established standards or conventional meanings. b. When special symbols such as asterisks or arrows are used, they shall be used consistently and with unique meanings throughout an application and related applications. c. When used to draw attention to a selected item in alphanumeric displays, the symbol should be separated from the beginning of the word by a space. Refer to 13 Icons and Symbols 4.4 Spatial Coding Criteria: a. Spatial coding should be used consistently throughout the system. b. Spatial coding may be used to indicate alarm importance. c. White space should be used with group-related items. d. Spatial coding should be used to give meaning to an item of information such as to identify it as a menu item, or to indicate title pages, information fields, alarms, and active and static display areas. e. When there is no need to show a relationship between items, spatial coding should not be used. 4.5 Size Coding a. Size coding should be used only for applications where displays are not crowded. b. A maximum of three size levels should be used. The major dimensions of the larger symbol should be at least 150 percent of the major dimension of the smaller symbol. c. When the symbol size is to be proportional to the data value, the scaled parameter should be the symbol area rather than a linear dimension such as diameter. CSMLab.@KlT A-90 Additional Information: a. An increase in symbol height must usually be accompanied by a proportional increase in width to preserve a constant aspect ratio and so facilitate symbol recognition. b. A user's judgment of the 'size' of a symbol will correspond more closely to its area than to its diameter. 4.6 Shape Coding Criteria : a. When shape coding is used, codes should be based on established standards or conventional meanings. b. Shape coding may be used for search and identification tasks c. Shape coding should be employed if rotary controls used for widely different functions are placed on the same panel. d. The designer should use shape categories (e.g., circles, triangles, and squares) to code related objects and to support the user’s ability to discriminate between various categories of displayed data. e. Where geometric shape coding is used and each shape is required to be identified without reference to any other, the number of shapes in the set should ideally be 5 and not normally exceed 15. f. The designer should ensure that screen resolution is adequate for shape coding. Additional Information: Coding with geometric shapes should be used to help users discriminate different categories of data on graphic displays. Although shape codes can often be mnemonic in form, their interpretation will generally rely on learned association as well as immediate perception. Existing user standards must be taken into account. 4.7 Pattern Coding a. Pattern density should vary with the value of the coded variable so that the least dense pattern is associated with one extreme and the most dense pattern with the other extreme. b. When patterns are used to code displayed areas, simple rather than elaborate patterns should be used. c. Color coding should not create unplanned or obvious new patterns on the screen. Additional Information: To aid visual discrimination and identification, simple patterns, such as hatching, should be employed rather than complex patterns. CSMLab.@KIT A-91 4.8 Line Coding Refer to 1.5 Borders, Lines, and Arrows 4.9 Area Coding a. Display Area • The sufficient viewing area should be provided to display all important information so that repetitive transitions between displays are not required. • information that is particularly important or that requires immediate user response shall be displayed in the user's primary viewing area. • Any interactive elements used in a screen (e.g., prompts, menu bars, command lines, and message areas) shall appear consistently in the same screen location throughout the system or application. b. Icons selection area • The selectable area or hotspot outside of the area of the icon shall be at least 4 millimeters. • The selectable area of an icon should be made large enough to reduce the risk of error and increase the user’s ease in selecting the icon. c. Graphs Area: Refer to 1.6.5 Areas d. Map Area • Codes, such as texture patterns, color, or tonal variations, should be used when different areas of a map must be defined, or when geographic distribution of a particular variable must be indicated. • Where different areas of a map are coded by texture patterns or tonal variation, the darkest or lightest shades correspond to the extreme values of the coded variable. e. Small Area • Users shall not have to discriminate among colors in small areas. • When small areas of the display must be coded, they shall be coded achromatically. f. Command Entry Area • A standard command entry area (window) should be provided where users enter the selected code. • A command entry area in a consistent location should be provided on every display, preferably at the bottom. Additional Injognatipn: a. Reserved screen areas, for example, might be used for a display title, alarms, display control options, instructions, error messages, and menus. b. Areas used to display data, control options, and instructions should be distinct from one another. c. The size and number of areas highlighted shall be minimized. d. That entry area should be in a fixed location on all displays. CSMLab.@KlT A-92 e. In a customary terminal configuration, where the display is located above the keyboard, command entry should be at the bottom of the display, in order to minimize user head/eye movement between the display and the keyboard. f. Orderly assignment of code values will help users perceive and remember the categories represented by the code. Refer to 1.5 Borders, Lines, and Arrows 4.10 Text Coding 4.10.1 Abbreviations and Acronyms Refer to 2.2.3 Abbreviations and Acronyms 4.10.2 Alphanumeric Coding Definition: Alphanumeric coding is coded a set of letters andzor numbers used to identity a group of data. a. Alphanumeric codes should use either upper case letters or lower case letters consistently and not use mixed case letters. b. When codes contain both letters and numbers, the letters should be grouped and the numbers should be grouped rather than interspersing letters with numbers, c. The use of punctuation in alphanumeric codes should be used only when the code may be confused with a word. d. When arbitrary codes must be remembered by the user, characters should be grouped in blocks of three to five characters, separated by a minimum of one blank space or other separating character such as a hyphen or slash. e. The use of the letters O and I in a non-meaningful code should be avoided because they are easily confused with the numbers 0 (zero) and 1 (one), respectively. f. Alpha numeric character size should be a minimum of 5 x 7 per character in a 7 x 9 pixel cell. g. Alphanumeric characters and symbols shall subtend not less than 4.7 mrad (16 min) of visual angle as measured from the longest anticipated viewing distance. Additional Information: Alphanumeric coding should not be used as the sole means to call attention to important or critical information, CSMLab.@KIT A-93 4.10.3 Underlining Coding Definition: Underlining draw a line or lines underneath to call attention. Criteria : a. Underlining should only be used for mildly emphasizing information, indicating key words or phrases, or distinguishing fields from text. b. When a line is placed under an item to mark or emphasize it, the line should not impair the legibility of the item, e.g., by obscuring the descenders. c. Underlining should not be used for large amounts of consecutive text. 4.10.4 Bold Coding Definition: Bold coding is coded a typeface with thick heavy lines. a. Bold coding should be used for strong emphasis. b. No more than three levels of bold coding should be used. 4.10.5 Numeric Coding a. Numeric codes should be limited to fewer than seven characters. b. Data should not be presented in digital form unless the user needs specific numeric values. CSMLab.@KIT INFORMATION CODING 4.11 Display Range Coding Criteria : Zones indicating operating ranges should be color coded by edge lines or wedges for circular scales. Additional Information: Zones can be used to indicate operating ranges, off-normal levels, and dangerous levels. 4.12 Flash Coding a. Flash coding shall be employed to call the user's attention to mission critical events only. b. A particular highlighting method should be used consistently, c. No more than 2 flash rates shall be used. Where two rates are used, the second rate shall be not greater than 2 per second. When two flash rates are used, the higher rate should apply to the more critical information, and the lower rate should be less than two flashes per second. d. When flash coding must be used on text, the flash rate should be 1/3 Hz to 1Hz with an on/off cycle of 70%. e. Where one rate is used, the rate shall be 3 - 5 flashes per second with approximately equal on and off f. When flash coding is used, users should have a means of acknowledging the flashing which, when appropriate, automatically stops the flashing. g. Data or text that the user must read should never blink or flash because a blinking object is, by definition, not displayed continuously and can be read only when it is displayed. h. When a user must read a displayed item that is flash coded, an extra symbol should be used to mark the item such as an asterisk or arrow, which flashes rather than having the item itself flash. Additional Information: a. Highlighting methods associated with emergency conditions should not also be used in association with normal conditions. b. Placing a blinking cursor at the point where user input will be accepted is a common use of flash coding. Overuse of flash or blink coding has a high potential to distract the user. c. Only a small area of the screen should flash at any time. CSMLab.@KIT A-95 INFORMATION CODING 4.13 Texture Coding Criteria : a. Texture coding should be used redundantly with another form of coding (e.g., color). b. Simple hatching should be used instead of elaborate patterns. c. Texture coding should be tested by users to avoid potentially distracting visual effects. 4.14 Multidimension Coding Three-dimensional effects should be used in moderation on any single display CSMLab.@KlT A-96 5 INTERACTION 5.1 Genera] Criteria : a. User interactions with the display system should be within the skill capability of the control room crew and should not significantly increase personnel workload. b. Where two or more users must have simultaneous read access to the computer program or data processing results from multiple personal equipment interfaces, the operation by one person shall not interfere with the operations of another person unless mission survival may be contingent upon pre emption. Provisions shall be made so that the pre-empted user can resume operations at the point of interference without information loss. Additional Information: No additional operating staff beyond the normal control room operating crew, should be needed to operate the display during normal and abnormal plant operation. Interactions with the display system should not impose workload demands that detract from other tasks performed by control room personnel during normal and abnormal plant operations. CSMLab.@KIT A-97 INTERACTION Command Language 5.2.1 General a. Where possible, guidance information should be accompanied with graphical illustrations of command content and syntax. b. The system should tolerate minor variations in input commands for interface management functions. c. Command language syntax shall be consistent within an application and across related applications. 5.2.2 Command Entry Definition: Command entry is an acting of control entry that enables the user to initiate a message to the system that will specify desired functions. a. A command language shall be designed so that users can enter commands in terms of functions desired without concern for internal computer processing, storage, and retrieval mechanisms. b. The last few lines at the bottom of every display should be reserved for status and error messages, prompts, and command entry. c. Command entry area • Each display shall provide a command entry area that is located consistently across displays, for example, at the bottom of the screen. • When used, the command entry area shall extend across the bottom of the window just above the message area. d. If a command entry is not recognized, the user should be allowed to revise the command rather than rejecting the command outright. e. Experienced users should be able to bypass a series of menu selections and make an equivalent command entry directly. Additional Information: A general list of basic commands, with appropriate command format guidance, should be available to the CSMLab.@KIT A-98 5.2.3 Editing Command Criteria : a. Users shall be able to edit textual commands, after they are typed but before they are executed, using standard dating techniques. b. Editing commands, such as MOVE, COPY, and DELETE, for adding, inserting, or deleting texl/program segments, shall be provided. c. Where editing commands are made by keying onto the display, the editing commands shall be readily distinguishable from the displayed textual material. 5.2.4 Complexity of Command Language a. The emergent features and their interactions should not be so complex as to be susceptible to misinterpretation. b. The complexity of a command language should be minimized, especially for untrained or infrequent c. The command language should be programmed in layers of complexity such that the basic layer will allow the inexperienced user to control a transaction. 5.2.5 Spelling Errors Criteria : a. Where the set of potential command entries is well defined, the computer should recognize and execute common misspellings of commands, rather than requiring re-entry. b. Commands shall be selected so that likely spelling errors do not result in valid commands. 5.2.6 Abbreviation of Commands Criteria: a. Users should be allowed to abbreviate commands b. When a command language is necessary for the system and if the operators may be experienced users, then commands should also have abbreviated forms having five or less characters. c. Experienced users should be able to define abbreviations or aliases for commands. CSMLab.@KIT A-99 5.2.7 Blank Spaces a. Single and multiple blanks between words should be treated as equivalent when processing command b, Blank spaces should not be used or interpreted by an application. 5.2.8 Punctuation a. Users should be allowed to enter commands without any punctuation other than the spaces between b. The use of punctuation in commands shall be minimized. c. Long numeric fields should be punctuated with spaces, commas, or slashes. Conventional punctuation schemes should be used if in common usage. Where none exist a space should be used after every third or fourth digit, reading zeros shall not be used in numerical data except where needed for clarity. 5.2.9 Use of Delimiter a. When a delimiter is needed, one delimiter, such as the slash (/), shall be used throughout an application and related applications. b. If command punctuation other than spaces is required, a single standard delimiter symbol should be used for that purpose. 5.2.10 Wording Criteria: a. All words and their abbreviations in the command language shall be consistent in meaning and spelling from one transaction to another and from one task to another. b. Words in a command language should be distinctive from one another, and emphasize significant differences in function. c. When a system will have many novice or infrequent users, it should recognize a variety of synonyms or alternatives syntax for each word defined in the command language. d. The length of an individual input word, such as a command or a key word, should not exceed seven CSMLab.@KIT A-100 characters. Commands shall have at least one alphabetic or numeric character. Additional Information: a. System messages should use familiar terminology. b. The command language shall be designed so that its features (functions) are organized in groups for ease of earning and use. c. Command language interactive control may be used for tasks that involve a wide range of user inputs and where user familiarity with the system can take advantage of the flexibility and speed of the control technique. d. Words for use in command language dialog shall be chosen to reflect the user's point of view and shall correspond to the user’s operational language. 5.2.11 User-Assigned Command Names Criterion : A command language should have flexibility to permit a user to assign personal names to frequently used commands. 5.2.12 User-Requested Prompts Users should be allowed to request computer-generated prompts as necessary to determine required 5.2.13 Destructive Commands a. If a command entry may have disruptive consequences, the user shall be required to review and confirm a displayed interpretation of the command before it is executed. b. A command that produces a benign action in one mode should not cause a different action with serious negative consequences in another mode. c. Unique commands associated with actions that have important consequences should not be easily confused with other commands used in the same or different modes. CSMLab.@KIT A-101 5.2.14 Recognize Command Criteria : a. The computer should recognize probable alternative forms of command syntax. b. When the system or application does not recognize a command a user has entered, the system or application shall inform the user and request the user to revise or replace the command. 5.2.15 Aiding Command Recall The system should provide features that support i in recalling command names. 5.2.16 Confirmation of a Command a. When a control entry will cause any extensive change in stored information, procedures, and/or system operation, and particularly if that change cannot be easily reversed, the user should be notified and confirmation of the action should be required before implementing it. b. When the execution of a command might result in a delay, the deletion or modification of data, or other potentially adverse consequences, the system or application shall inform the user of the nature of the consequence and request that the user confirm the command unless an UNDO command is available, c. Confirmation shall not cause displayed data removal. d. User acceptance of stored data or defaults shall be possible by a single confirming keystroke. 5.2.17 Feedback and Help Criterion : If a display has a freeze capability, the display should have an obvious reminder that it is in the freeze 5.2.18 Error Correction Refer to 5.10.2 Error Correction CSMLab.@KIT A-102 5.2.19 Defaults Refer to itemsg, h, and k of 2.3.5 Defaults 5.2.20 Execution Once a textual command has been composed, an explicit enter or execute action by the user shall be required. 5 INTERACTION 5.3 Function Keys and Hot Keys Definition: Function key or hot key is a key whose activation will affect a control entry. Detection of the signal usually causes the system to perform some predefined function for the user. Criteria : a. Labels of Function Key and Flot Keys • Each function key should be labeled informatively to designate the function it performs. • If a key is used for more than one function, the function currently available should always be indicated to the user, (see Additional Information a) b. Layout and grouping of Function Keys • Function keys should be grouped in distinctive locations on the keyboard to facilitate their learning • • The layout of function keys should be compatible with their use. (see Additional Information b) c. Logical Pairing: If chord-keying is used, the functions paired on one key should be logically related.(see Additional Information c) d. Easy Return to Base-Level Functions: If the functions assigned to a set of keys change as a result of user selection, the user should be provided with an easy means to return to the initial, base-level functions.(sce Additional Information d) e. Feedback • The system should prompt the user for confirmation if a function key is pressed in a context unrelated to the function, (see Additional Information f) • Refer item i of <5.8 Feedbacks f. Consistency • A function assigned to a particular key in a given task context should be assigned to the same key in CSMLab.@KlT A-103 other contexts.(see Additional Information g). - When a function key performs different functions in different operational modes, equivalent or similar functions should be assigned to the same key. (see Additional Information h) • If double (control/shift) keying is used, the logical relation between shifted and unshifted functions should be consistent from one key to another, (see Additional Information i) g. Frequently used functions or available function keys • Frequently used functions should be executed by means of a single key action and should not require chord-keying (e.g., use of the shift key). • Fixed function keys should be available to control functions that are often utilized and continuously available. h. Active and Inactive Function Keys • Function keys that are not needed for a current transaction should be temporarily disabled. • If some function keys are active and some are not, the current subset of active keys should be indicated in some noticeable way, such as by brighter illumination. i. User Defined Function Keys • Users should be allowed to assign a single name to a defined series of entries, and then to use that named "macro ” for subsequent command entry, (see Additional Information j) • The use of user definable macros and programmable function keys should be limited, (see Additional Information k) • A user should be restricted from modifying a macro or programmable function key as defined by a different originating user. • Users should not be allowed to duplicate macro names. j. Access to a function keys or hot key: Users should have access to an index of their macros and programmable function keys with their respective composition of commands. Additional Information: a. If a key is used for just two functions, depending upon defined operational mode, then alternate illuminated labels might be provided on the key to indicate which function is current. In those circumstances, it is preferable that only the currently available function is visible, so that the labels on a group of keys will show what can be done at any point. If key function is specific to a particular transaction, an appropriate guidance message on the user's display should be provided to indicate the current function. b. Key arrangement should reflect the general principles of organization, such as importance, frequency, and order of use. For example, keys for emergency functions should be given a prominent location. c. Functions assigned to a given key should be related. For example, if a particular function key moves the cursor to the upper left comer of a display screen, then that same key when shifted might be used to move the cursor to the bottom right comer of the screen. As a negative example, a function key that moves the cursor should not be used when shifted to delete displayed data. CSMLab.@KlT A-104 d. Tn effect, multifunction keys can provide hierarchic levels of options much like menu selection dialogues, with the same need for rapid return to the highest-level menu. For some applications, it may be desirable to automate the return to base-level assignment of multifunction keys, to occur immediately on completion of a transaction and/or by time-out following a period of user inaction. e. The function should not be executed unless the action is confirmed. f. A particular function should be accessed in the same manner in any context in which it is used. For example, the SAVE function should be invoked using the same key whether the user is saving edited information or new information. g. Functions assigned to a given key in different modes should be related. For example, a particular key might be used to confirm data changes in one mode, and confirm message transmission in another. As a negative example, a key labeled RESET should not be used to save data in one mode, dump data in another, and signal task completion in a third. h. Consistency in the underlying logic for double keying will help a user to learn the functions associated with different keys. For example, one consistent logic might be that shifted and unshifted functions are opposite, so that if a particular key moves the cursor forward, then that key, when shifted, would move the cursor backward. Another possible logic might be that shifted and unshifted functions are related by degree, so that if a particular key deletes a single displayed character, then that key, when shifted, would delete a word. i. In this way, users can make frequently required but complicated tasks easier to accomplish. The system should not accept a user designated macro name that is the same as an existing command name. 5 INTERACTION 5.4 Menus Refer to 2.7 Menu 5 INTERACTION 5.5 Form-Filling Refer to 2.3 Forms CSMLab.@KIT A-105 5 INTERACTION 5.6 Direct Manipulation Definition : Direct Manipulation is defined by the close temporal and physical relations between the movement of the control device and the cursor, or other screen-based follower (e g., an icon or a window). Direct manipulation control devices include the mouse, the trackball, and pointing. When a system provides direct manipulation, a user should be able to move and copy data and objects by first marking the data or object, if necessary, then placing the pointer on it, holding down the appropriate button on the pointing device, and dragging it to the desired location. 5.6.1 General a. Direct manipulation should be used primarily in tasks with actions and objects that lend themselves to pictographic representation, and in which the actions and objects need not be modified for the successful interpretation of the command by the system. b. The user should be able to manipulate information without concern for internal storage and retrieval mechanisms of the system. c. The direct manipulation interface should include windows for containing the data file and menus for additional objects and actions that arc not easily represented by picto graphic icons. d. Direct manipulation should be used for casual system users as a means of enhancing a user's understanding of control actions and offered as a simple alternative to learning a command language when computer response time is fast. e. Direct manipulation should not be used when the computer response is slow. f. The effects of operations performed on direct manipulation interfaces should be immediately visible, 5.6.2 Manipulation of Objects 5.6.2.1 Pointing and Selecting Definition: Pointing is an operation with a graphic user interface in which an input device is used to move a small display image (such as a pointer) to a specific location on the display Selecting is a user's action of identifying display elements to the computer in order to ready them for use in some way (e.g., to open a valve by an input device click on a graphic representation of a valve). CSMLab.@KIT a. Pointing • When user input involves frequent pointing on a display surface, the interface should be designed so that other actions (e.g., display control) are also accomplished by pointing, in order to minimize shifts from one entry device to another. • Where graphic data entry involves frequent pointing on a display surface, the user interface shall provide display control and sequence control by pointing, in order to minimize shifts from one entry device to another. b. Selecting • Selection of an icon, menu, or application-specific capability from a function area should be acknowledged by highlighting the selected item. • Users shall be provided some means for designating and selecting displayed graphic elements for manipulation. • When functions are represented by text labels, a large area for pointing should be provided, including the area of the displayed label, plus a half-character distance around the label. 5.6.2 Manipulation of Objects 5.6.2.2 Scrolling, Paging, and Panning Definition : Scrolling is a method used to move through the contents of a window or list in a dialogue box using the scroll-bar or scroll arrows. Paging is a method of viewing and moving through data in which a user conceives of data as being grouped into display sized pages and moves through it by discrete steps. Also Panning is to summon by calling out by name. a. Scrolling • The user should have the ability to shift the text information shown when the user cannot view all of the characters in the horizontal line. • Scrolling, not panning, should be provided for moving through continuous text. b. Scroll and Panning • Large display outputs that are viewed by continuous panning/scrolling should be provided with a graphic indicator inset at the margin of the display frame to indicate current location. • If the selected text, table, or graphics area extends beyond the bottom of the displayed page, the screen should automatically scroll until the user stops selecting or when the end of the display page is reached. c. Paging. CSMLab.@KIT A-107 • Users should be able to page in one page or multiple page increments. • Paging and windowing should not be used when searching through continuous text data, • Users should be allowed to move easily from one page to another for displays that are partitioned into separately displayable pages. • The direction that users must page (toward the top or bottom, left or right) should be evident to users before they begin to page. • When moving over multiple pages, the movement should be discrete with no display of intermediate pages between the starting page and the selected page. • When a data set contains too much data for presentation in a single display, the data should be partitioned into separately displayable pages. Related data should appear on the same page in an integrated display rather than being partitioned into separate pages. • Each page in a multi-page data set should be labeled to show its relation to the others. For example, the first page of a three-page set might be labeled Page 1 of 3. • Paging instead of panning or scrolling shall be used for a user search of logically grouped information such as data forms, d. Scrolling and Paging. • Display structure used for scrolling and paging should be common to all files. • Structures for horizontal scrolling/paging should appear only on displays for which horizontal movement is appropriate. Similarly, structures for vertical scrolling/paging should appear only on displays for which vertical movement is applicable. • Only one scrolling/paging structure should be used for vertical movement in a display and one for horizontal movement in a display. • The function of the scrolling/paging structure should be clearly indicated by either a textual or graphic ■ Scrolling/paging structures should indicate both the absolute and relative positions of the user in the data File. 5.6.3 Manipulation of Window a. Actions by the user should primarily affect the interactive window. However, actions in the interactive window may affect any other window. b. Window types should be perceptually distinct. c. The user should have the ability to scroll through the contents of a window both horizontally and vertically, if scrolling is required, or at any point in an application. d. Users should be able to resize windows. When resizing windows, maintain line lengths of 52 to 78 characters for continuously scrolling text. These line lengths have been found to produce the fastest CSMLab.@KlT performance. e. Use windows which provide at least four lines of text. Windows sized smaller than this degrade performance. f. Users should have the capability to select between tiling and overlapping window environments. 5.6.4 Manipulation of Control Icons a. Representations used as icons should require minimal interpretation. b. Items on the screen that are displayed for selection should be a minimum of 0.2 inch (5 millimeters) on a side and separated by at least 0.1 inch (3 millimeters). c. A user should be able to "open" an icon with a simple, explicit action. d. If icons are used to represent control actions in menus, a text label should be displayed with each icon to help assure that its intended meaning will be understood. 5.6.5 Manipulation of Graphic Data Criteria : a. When complex graphic data must be entered quickly, computer aids should be provided to automate that process. b. When graphic data must be plotted in predefined standard formats, templates or skeletal displays for those formats should be provided to aid data entry. c. Computer aids should be provided to help users specify appropriate scales for graphic data entry. d. Graphic means should be provided for displaying the context of current control actions to users. e. During graphic data entry/editing, the selected attributes that will affect current actions should be displayed for ready reference by the user. f. Automated plotting of computer-stored data should be provided at user request, with provision for subsequent editing by a user. g. When graphs must be constructed for data plotting, computer aids should be provided for that purpose. h. When data entry requires exact placement of graphic elements, users should be allowed to request expansion of he critical display area ("zooming") to make the positioning task easier. i. Automatic registration or alignment of computer-generated graphic data should be provided, so that variable data arc shown properly with respect to fixed background or map data at any display scale. CSMLab.@KIT A-109 5 INTERACTION 5.7 Prompts 5.7.1 General a. Prompts shall be clear and understandable. They shall not require reference to coding schemes or conventions which may be unfamiliar to occasional users. b. The system should provide prompts for the next sequential rigid test procedure in a task sequence. For example, if a STEP key should be pressed after the completion of a step in a task, the message area should display Press STEP key to continue. c. The system should provide prompts for entering data or command language inputs. d. When the computer is waiting for input from a user, it shall indicate clearly where on the screen the input is expected and, to the extent possible, what information is expected. e. If a prompt requires an input, as many features of that input as possible should be specified as part of the prompt. f. Where appropriate, prompts and help instructions shall be used to explain commands, error messages, system capabilities, display formats, procedures, and steps in a sequence g. Users should be able to request computer generated prompts to determine required parameters or available options for a command. Users shall be able to request prompts, as necessary, to determine required parameters or available options for an appropriate next command entry, h. Prompt messages should provide direction to the operator and shall display required action or options. Prompting messages shall be displayed in a standardized area of the displays. Additional Information : Using a HELP function key, or perhaps simply keying a question mark in the command entry area, are satisfactory methods to request prompting. 5.7.2 Prompting Definition : Prompting is system or application shall prompt users for all required input parameters, request additional or corrected information as needed, provide orientation (as to the computer processes to users) during transactions, and indicate any errors that are detected. a. Prompting messages shall appear in a consistent location on the screen. b. Prompting should be provided for required formats and acceptable values for data entries. CSMLab.@KIT A-110 c. Users should be provided with clear and specific information to guide entries during logon/logoff or command or information entry. d. When a user must specify the address for a message, prompting should be provided. e. The location of prompts for data or commands shall be at the location of the desired input whenever possible. When the prompt cannot be placed at the location of the input, it shall be located in a standard message area. f. When a command entry is not recognized or inappropriate, users should be prompted to correct, rather than re-enter the command. g. Cues should be provided to indicate the size of a fixed-length data entry field. h. Users should be able to request computer generated prompts to determine required parameters or available options for a command. i. When a computer requests information from a user, any instructions about how to supply the information should remain visible until the user complies or takes some other action. Additional Information: a. Prompting could occur at the beginning of the next line to be typed, in the data field where an entry is to be made, at a command input line, or within a menu window from which a selection is to be made. b. Users might request prompting by using a HELP function key, or perhaps simply keying a question mark in the command entry area. c. Prompting might consist of a series of questions to be answered, an address form to be completed by the user, or reminders of command entries required. d. Underscoring gives a direct visual cue as to the number of characters to be entered, and the user does not have to count them. For example, "Enter ID:______" is preferable to "Enter ID (9 characters)." CSMLab.@KIT A-lll 5 INTERACTION 5.8 Feedback Definition : Feedback is a system or component response (e.g., visual or aural) that indicates the extent to which the user’s desired effect was accomplished. Feedback can be either intrinsic or extrinsic. Intrinsic feedback is that which the individual senses directly from the operation of the control devices (e.g., clicks, resistance, control displacement). Extrinsic feedback is that which is sensed from an external source that indicates the consequences of the control action (e.g., indicator lights, display changes, aural tones), Criteria: a. When startup is complete and the system becomes available the system should remove any messages indicating that it is unavailable, return the pointer to its normal shape, and enable the keyboard and pointing device. b. When the system is not immediately available after system startup, the system should provide feedback to the user indicating average system response time or known periods of unavailability and disable the keyboard and pointing device until startup is complete. Example. This feedback could take many forms such as displaying a message stating its unavailability, showing a status bar, or changing the pointer shape to a watch or hourglass. c. When system functioning requires the user to stand-by, periodic feedback should be provided to indicate normal system operation. d. System response • When the system takes more than 2 seconds to respond, it shall provide periodic feedback to the user indicating that normal operation is occurring, • When a system or application takes more than 2 seconds to complete an operation initiated by a user action and during this time it is incapable of accepting further input from the user, it shall inform the user that action is continuing. » When system functioning requires the user to stand-by, a WORKING, BUSY, or WAIT message or appropriate icon should be displayed until user interaction is again possible. Where the delay is likely to exceed 15 seconds, the user should be informed. For delays exceeding 60 seconds, a count-down display should show delay time remaining. • When the computer response to a user request is greater than 15 seconds, the computer shall give a clear and positive indication (e.g., an auditory signal) when processing is complete. • When the system rejects user input, self-explanatory feedback shall be provided to indicate the reason for rejection and the required corrective action. • The HSI should give the user feedback indicating the action that was selected and allow the action to be canceled before it is executed. • Where system overload or other system conditions will result in a processing delay, the system should CSMLab.@KIT A-112 acknowledge the data entry and provide an indication of the delay to the user. e. Feedback message • Successive periodic feedback messages should differ in wording from presentation to presentation or be otherwise indicated. • Feedback messages should inform the operator of changes in system status. • Feedback messages shall be self-explanatory. (Users shall not be required to translate feedback messages by use of reference system or code sheets.). Abbreviations should be avoided. • Automatic feedback for data transmission confirming that messages have been sent or indicating transmission failures should be provided to permit effective user participation in message handling. f. Mode indication • When multiple modes of operation exist, a means should be provided to remind the user of the current • When the result of user actions will be contingent upon prior selection among differently defined modes of interaction, a continuous indication of the current mode should be provided, particularly when user inputs in that mode might result in data loss. g. Feedback for data entry • Visual or auditory feedback should be provided to indicate that the system has received a control • Feedback should be displayed for all user actions during data entry; keyed entries should be displayed stroke by stroke. • The system shall give the user warning information before a command is invoked that it will be time consuming to process. • The computer should acknowledge completion of a data entry transaction with a confirmation message if data entry was successful, or else with an error message. • For a repetitive data entry task that is accomplished as a continuing series of transactions, successful entry should be indicated by regenerating the data entry display, automatically removing the just- entered data in preparation for the next entry. • If a user has deferred entry of required data but then requests processing of entries, that omission should be signaled to the user, and immediate entry (or perhaps further deferral) of missing items should be allowed. h. Feedback for controls • Each adjustment control should provide feedback. • Feedback from the display should be apparent for any deliberate movement of a control. • Discriminable audible beeps (used to supply feedback) should be used when more than one touch screen, light pen, or graphics tablet is employed. • When function key activation does not result in any immediately observable natural response, users should be provided with some other form of computer acknowledgment. • Soft controls should provide feedback about their operating stale after activation. CSMLab.@KIT A-113 Additional Information: a. Feedback shall be provided which presents status information, confirmation, and verification throughout the interaction. b. A user cannot be relied upon to remember prior actions. Thus, any action whose results are contingent upon previous actions can represent a potential threat to data protection. c. Momentary controls, which operate only during actuation (e.g., while a button is pressed) should provide feedback during operation. Continuous-operation controls, which remain operating after actuation, should provide continuous feedback, CSMLab.@KIT A-114 INTERACTION Status Information Definition : Status Information is information pertaining to the state of the system or components (e.g., on/off, open/closed, automatic/manual) that is displayed either automatically or by user's request. a. There should be an indication of whether or not a step was completed. b. Users shall be provided at all limes with system-status information regarding operational modes and availability, either automatically or by request. c. When the effect of a function key varies, the status of the key shall be displayed. d. Information necessary to select or enter a specific control action shall be available to the user when selection of that control action is appropriate. e. Users should be able to obtain status information concerning current alarm settings (c.g., the dimensions or variables covered and the values or categories established as critical). f. When interaction with other systems or users is required, status information about the other systems or users should be available. g. The alarm function is used to call attention to abnormal situations in which the status of the system, subsystem, or component requires user response. h. Computer-based HSIs should support users in rapidly assessing the status of sequential actions in progress. i. One common function of computer-driven displays is to provide a qualitative (I.e., overall summary) status of a given system, subsystem, or component. Such displays should permit the user to tell at-a- glance if the system, subsystem, or component is in its expected state, or if further detailed evaluation or action is required. Such overview status may be given in a discrete format, (e.g., ON/OFF), it is normally of a continuous nature (such as a temperature reading that shows actual values). To serve the detailed status function, a display should be available whenever a user desires the data. The detailed status function may be provided by an on-demand display device that does not need to be available continuously. j. The CBP's timing, such as status update rates, screen changes, and navigation features, should be consistent with the time demands of the task. Additional Information: The indication can be manual or automatic, depending on whether the CBP has the specific criteria and information to determine this. CSMLab.@KIT A-115 INTERACTION 5.10 Error Management 5.10.1 Error Detection Definition: Error Detection is means to minimize the probability of the occurrence of errors, a. User errors should be detected and reported by the system as soon as possible so that they can be corrected in a timely manner. b. A user should be able to stop a control process at any point in a sequence to correct an error. Additional Information: a. Error-mitigation approaches should not be the sole means for achieving error tolerance, but should be used in conjunction with other means for error prevention and system-assisted error detection. b. Error-mitigation mechanisms limit the effects of incorrect inputs after they have been entered into the control system. Two strategies include reducing the rate of the system ’s response and deferring it. Both arc intended to provide time for detecting and correcting input errors and for reversing them. Error mitigation should not be considered a substitute for error prevention and detection. c. Error-prevention measures (e.g., interlocks, lockouts, and lockins) that cannot be overridden by the user may be detrimental to safety. Sometimes a normally undesirable tactic may be the only thing a user can do to solve a problem. 5.10.2 Error Correction a. When the system detects an error in a user input, the user should be allowed to make an immediate correction. b. A system or application shall allow a user to go back easily to previous steps in a transaction sequence in order to correct an error or make any other desired change. c. A capability should be provided to facilitate detection and correction of errors after keying in, but before entering into the system. While errors should be detected early, error checking should occur at logical data entry breaks, e.g., at the end of data fields rather than character-by-character, in order to avoid disrupting the user. d. Where users are required to make entries into a system, an easy means shall be provided for correcting erroneous entries. The system shall permit correction of individual errors without requiring re-entry of correctly entered commands or data elements. CSMLab.@KIT A-116 e. All conditions and information relevant for user recovery from an error shall be displayed to the user. f. Inspection and transfer steps should be considered if inputs are complex, or if incorrect inputs can seriously affect safely, g. When the user enters correction of an error, such corrections shall be implemented by an explicit action by the user (e.g„ actuation of an ENTER key). All error corrections by the user shall be acknowledged by the system, either by indicating that a correct entry has been made or by another error message. h. Users should be allowed to BACKUP easily to previous steps in a transaction sequence in order to correct an error or make any other desired change. i. Automatic, self-correcting features should only be used if they include good 'Undo ’ capabilities, so that inappropriate changes made by the system can be reversed by the user. Automatic, self-correcting features should only be used for interface management actions, such as retrieving displays. j. Feedback and simple error correction procedures should be provided for speech input, so that when a spoken entry has not been correctly recognized by the computer, the user can cancel that entry and speak again. Additional Information: When a user cannot correct an entry, as when transcribing from a source document that itself contains an error, it may help to allow the user to defer entry of the wrong item. Alternatively, the user might wish to cancel the transaction. 5.10.3 Error Management for Form Error management is means to support the detection, error explanation, or error recovery. a. Users shall be able to correct errors easily on a character-by-character and ficld-by-field basis. b. When a field has a set or range of acceptable values and a user enters an unacceptable value, the system shall either provide an error message when the user tries to leave the field and not move the cursor from the field; or allow the user to continue moving through the form and, when the user tries to perform the completion action, provide an error message and move the cursor to the field in error. CSMLab.@KlT A-117 5.10.4 Error Message a. Wording • Error messages should be worded as advice or suggestions. • Error messages should state the error detected, the input field containing the error, and the corrective • Error messages shall be constructive and neutral in tone, avoiding phrases that suggest a judgment of the user's behavior. b. Indicating • Messages that require special user attention shall be coded appropriately and distinctively. • If a user repeats an error, a noticeable change should exist in the displayed error message. c. Placement • After an error message is displayed, the cursor shall be placed at the location of the error. • Error messages and instructions should be presented at the point of the error or in a consistent area of the display. d. Error Messages Type • Non-Disruptive Error Messages: Error message should be displayed to the user at the completion of data entry. An ongoing transaction should not be interrupted. « Multilevel Error Messages: The system shall provide more than one level of error messages with successive levels providing increasingly detailed levels of explanation. • Multiple Error Messages: Notification should be made for each error when multiple errors are detected. • Advisory Error Messages: Where data or control entry is made from a small set of alternatives, error messages should indicate the correct alternatives. • Cautionary Messages: When a data or command entry error is suspected but cannot be determined , a cautionary message asking for confirmation should be displayed. • Confirmation Messages: When a user entry might cause the loss or destruction of data or a disruption of a system, the system shall display a cautionary message and require that the user confirm the entry. e. Information • Error message should be displayed stating the error and possible subsequent operations. • Error messages shall explicitly provide as much diagnostic information and remedial direction as can be inferred reliably from the error condition. • Error messages shall provide information that pertains specifically to the operation of the task instead of offering general information. f. Correcting • Explicit error messages should be provided for incorrect actions related to the process. • The erroneous entry should remain displayed until the error has been corrected. C SMLab ,@KTT A-118 • Users should not have to reenter the entire entry, only the portion of the entry or command that is in g. To the extent practicable, a system or application should detect inappropriate user entries and actions, automatically interrupt the task, and either suggest an appropriate entry or action or ask the user to confirm or clarify his or her intentions. 5,10.5 Command Interaction Errors a. A system or application shall permit a user to edit an extended command during its composition before taking an explicit Enter action. b. A system or application shall prompt a user to correct an element of a command entry that is not recognized or that is logically inappropriate. c. When a menu selection, function key, or command entry is invalid or inoperative at the time of selection, no action should result except the display of an advisory message telling the user what is wrong and which functions, options, or commands arc appropriate. d. When an error is repeated, causing the same error message to be repeated in succession, the message should be reworded for the third repetition and all following error messages that apply to that error. e. Stacked Command • If an error is detected in a stacked series of command entries, the computer should either consistently execute to the point of error, or else consistently require users to correct errors before executing any command. • To prompt for corrections of an error in stacked commands, the system shall display the stacked sequence with the error highlighted. Additional Information: a. In most applications, partial execution will probably prove desirable. b. A procedure shall be provided to correct the error and salvage the stack. CSMLab.@KIT 5 INTERACTION 5.11 On-Line Help 5.11.1 General On-line help is additional user guidance information beyond prompting, feedback, status, and error messages that can be obtained at the user's initiative of the system. Information about features of the system and dialogue and how they can be used to aid the user in computer. Criteria : a. User guidance shall be displayed consistently in a format that is distinguishable from that of other displayed data. b. The system shall provide a Help command that allows users to obtain on-line guidance information. c. On-Line Help • Users should be able to browse on-line HELP. • On-line Help shall remain visible until the user chooses to remove it. • The Help function should be activated automatically when the user is making repeated errors. • Specific user guidance information should be available on-line for display at any point in a transaction sequence. • The system should provide users with appropriate on-line data, command indexes, and dictionaries to guide them in the selection and composition of data and command entries. • On-line guidance material should include all applicable definitions, lists of allowable entries, ranges of acceptable values, and reference material describing system capabilities and procedures. • On-line Help should be user-centered, that is, based on the task the user is trying to complete and not on the characteristics of the application. d. Help Requests • Users should be able to request Help on selected topics. • When a user requests Help on a topic, the computer should accept synonyms and abbreviations. • When a request for Help is ambiguous in content, the computer should initiate a dialogue to specify what data, message, or command requires explanation. ■ When an error occurs and the user requests Help, the Help should provide a useful description of the error and suggest at least one recovery technique. • Users should be able to print displayed Help information. Additional Information: Users should be able to annotate existing Help messages. CSMLab.@KlT A-120 5.11.2 Access and Return Criteria: a. A simple, standard action that is always available should be provided to request HELP. b. Any Help or guidance display should include any relevant control options. c. Users should be provided with a constant reminder of Help availability. d. When Help is not always available, users should be informed when it is not available. c. Users should be able to alternate easily between a Help display and the display from which Help was requested. f. Access and Return • Users should be able to access Help from within an application, and return to where they were before requesting Help. • The procedures for accessing on-line Help should be consistent within an application. • Users should not be required to memorize lengthy sequences or refer to secondary written procedures to access on-line Help. g. Help Icon and Function Key ■ The system or application should place a Help icon on the screen and designate a function key as the Help key. • Systems and applications should use the Help icon and the Help key consistently throughout the application. h. Synonyms for standard terminology should be recognized by Help routines. i. When a user enters a term for which they are interested in obtaining Help, the application should accept close spelling matches source. 5.11.3 Context Sensitivity Criteria : a. The information presented in response to a HELP request should be tailored to the task context. b. When the context in which a request for Help is made is ambiguous, the system should initiate a dialog in which the user can specify what data, message, or command requires explanation. c. When a user's request for Help depends upon the context established by previous entries, an indication of that context should be included in the Help display. Additional Information: a. If an error in command entry is made, HELP should display information concerning that command, its function, its proper structure and wording, and required and optional parameters. b. If the user types PITTABURGH, offer a list of suggested choices that would allow the user to make a CSMLab.@KIT A-121 correction without having to re-kcy the entry. 5.11.4 Wording and Style Criteria: a. The most important information should be placed at the beginning of each on-line Help message. b. Messages should be stated in short, simple sentences that are consistently structured in the active instead of passive voice. c. Messages should be positively worded. Negative statements should only be used for stating exceptions d. Common words with apparent meanings should be used. Abbreviations or contractions should not be e. Help information shall be appropriate to the experience and training of the system users. f. The visual style of on-line Help should maintain a great deal of white space with no more than 40% of the pixels used for words and figures. Additional Information; When appropriate, Help messages may incorporate special terms and technical jargon that is well understood and employed in the user's task environment. 5.11.5 Content a. On-line Help should include: memory aids, basic information likely to be of use only to novices, material selected from written documentation, explanations that go beyond written documentation, information that might seem obvious but may not be to all users, step-by-step instructions on how to perform the most common tasks. b. When a HELP display provides summary information, more detailed explanations should be available. c. Help displays should contain only information relevant to the current requirements of the user. d. On-line Help should provide multilevel Help on any displayed prompts or requests and definitions of all-important terms. c. On-line Help should provide multilevel Help on error messages. f. Each Help display shall have a title that identifies its contents and reflects the location from which it originated. g. The on-line Help facility should allow users to press any alphabetic key and obtain a list of the Help topics beginning with that letter, and then allow the users to select a topic from the list and obtain the CSMLab.@KIT A-122 Help information for that topic, h. On-line Help should point out shortcuts and infrequently used features to users.. i. Command • An on-line index and description of all commands should be available. • Help displays should include examples of correct input or valid commands which include realistic commands and parameters, not just formal syntax. • Help displays should include a description of the format of a specified command and a list of allowable commands. • On-line Help should provide multilevel descriptions of the actions assigned to function keys. j. On-line Help should include Help on how to use the on-line Help • a description of all Help displays; • instructions on how to access Help from anywhere in the system, including alternative routes • instructions on navigating through Help, including scrolling, paging, and moving to related topics • a description of the current window, including its function and any tasks the user can perform. CSMLab.@KIT A-123 APPENDIX B EVALUATION ISSUES LIST ON INFORMATION DISPLAY ON CRT - EtiB - * n 1 DISPLAY ELEMENTS (LIAgyiOl 2d:)...... B-l 1.1 Character (g XI)...... B-l 1.1.1 Between-Character Spacing (gXIZl Zl^)...... B-l 1.1.2 Between-Word Spacing (ElCHZI ZI5)...... B-l 1.1.3 Between-Line Spacing (HZ!)...... B-l 1.1.4 Between-Paragraph Spacing Zl^)...... B-2 1.1.5 Character Contrast (gXI CHd|)...... B-2 1.1.6 Character Height (g XI gO|)...... B-2 1.1.7 Character Width (S XI Util)...... B-3 1.1.8 Character Stroke Width (gX| ^ ^JUI)...... B-3 1.1.9 Font (g3)...... B-4 1.2 Labels (dlSO...... B-5 1.3 Icons and Symbols (0101 g E| 9J @ )...... B-6 1.4 Numeric Data (4^x| CH)0| Bti)...... B-7 1.5 Borders, Lines, and Arrows (Bl¥ d|, g, $19:5)...... B-8 1.6 Graphs (35H3)...... B-9 1.6.1 General XI9,0...... B-9 1.6.2 Scales, Labels, and Patterns (3?|I§J, dl^, ifflS)...... B-9 1.6.3 Grids (3 XI)...... B-10 1.6.4 Lines and Curves (g 3 ^g)...... B-10 1.6.5 Areas (S^)...... B-ll 1.6.6 Scatter Plots and Trend Plots (g£ E2I #A||g)...... B-12 1.6.7 Bar Charts and Histograms C3CH 333 3I3E3HJ)...... B-13 1.6.8 Pie Charts (S§ 3X13)...... B-14 1.6.9 Flowcharts (1§E)...... B-15 1.6.10 Profile Charts and Segmented Curve Charts (HEEIgl 3BH32I 3EH3)--B-16 1.6.11 Mimic and Diagrams (□ l sj 3 0010139)...... B-16 1.7 COLOR (^91)...... B-l 8 1.7.1 Number of Color g)...... B-18 1.7.2 Foreground'Background (SS/tiHS)...... B-18 1.7.3 Contrast/Luminance (LH 3/^13)...... B-19 1.7.4 Brightness (g|7|)...... B-19 1.7.5 Location (f I xl) ...... B-20 1.7.6 Pure Blue (El& 6")...... B-20 1.7.7 Pure Red (SZ.4!)...... B-20 CSMLab.@KIT m n 1.7.8 Color Combinations (-^g Slf(Sg))...... B-20 1.7.9 Chromostereopsis (3 S 2 3 Ell ail g A| 3)...... B-21 1.7.10 Color Coding 3g)...... B-21 1.7.10.1 General (SMAIW)...... B-21 1.7.10.2 Use of Color (^B| Aim)...... B-22 1.7.10.3 Color Selection °J SSj)...... B-23 2 DISPLAY FORMAT (Cl 3#ai0| %&!)...... B-25 2.1 Data Entry and Editing (010| Ef @3)...... B-25 2.2 Tcxt(K|3E) ...... B-27 2.2.1 Text Frames (S| 3M HaiSJ)...... B-27 2.2.2 Formatting (S^g)...... B-27 2.2.3 Abbreviations and Acronyms (gOI 21 ESX1)...... B-28 2.2.4 Capitalization (01 EX1)...... B-29 2.2.5 Text in Windows (EE^ g£| ^A.e)...... B-30 2.3 Forms (S^j)...... B-31 2.3.1 Fields (S3)...... B-31 2.3.2 Field Labels (HE 51*)) ...... B-32 2.3.3 Layout (tiH Xl)...... B-32 2.3.4 Navigation (HIbl 711 0|£)...... B-33 2.3.5 Defaults (7IESS EE 7|E&) ...... B-34 2.4 Lists m#)...... B-35 2.5 Tables (S)...... B-36 2.6 Display Controls (All 01 p 3S3I0!)...... B-38 2.6.1 Display of Control Options (*1101 S£°l P3Sai01)...... B-38 2.6.2 Icons (0101E)...... B-38 2.6.3 Palettes (El HI e)... B-38 2.6.4 Push Buttons (VA| til =)...... B-39 2.6.5 Radio Buttons (3 P 2 tHE)...... B-39 2.6.6 Check Boxes (XII3 ^3)...... B-40 2.6.7 List Boxes (£133 ^3)...... B-41 2.6.8 Cursors (Si AH)...... B-43 2.6.8.1 General (SeiAlg)...... B-44 2.6.8.2 Text Cursor (*! 31 3H AH)...... B-46 2.6.8.3 Position or pointing Cursors (5°J g 31 AH EE WX\ XI g 31AH)...... B-46 2.6.8.4 Cursor as a Status Indicator (& EH HA| 31 AH)...... B-47 CSiVILab.@KlT B-ii * «■ 2.6.8.5 Multiple Cursors (C14=2I 9U-i)...... B-48 2.6.8.6 Multiple Display Devices (Q4=2I CI^SBIIOI Sxl) ...... B-48 2.7 Menu (Dili-)...... B-50 2.7.1 Menu Structure (DJIA- AS)...... B-50 2.7.2 Menu Presentation (CHI^ HA|)...... B-50 2.7.3 Menu Selection (W, ££S)...... B-51 2.7.4 Menu Option (Dll A S-S)- B-52 2.7.4.1 Option Organization (Sd 2J AS)...... B-52 2.7.4.2 Arrangement of Menu Options (Dll A tiH xl) ...... B-52 2.7.4.3 Wording and Coding Menu Options (Dll Ar SS 2| SHHiVsSi)...... B-53 2.7.5 Menu Type (DHA ET)...... B-54 2.7.5.1 System Menu (A|^g DHAr)...... B-54 2.7.5.2 Hierarchical Menus (711 S DJI Ar)...... B-54 2.7.5.3 Pull-Down Menus (S Q E Oil At)...... B-55 2.7.5.4 Cascading Menus (#711# Dll At)...... B-57 2.1.5.5 Scrolling Menus (i3S CHI At)...... B-57 2.7.5.6 Pop-Up Menus (US Dll) )...... B-58 2.7.5.7 Tear-Off Menus (01E £HI At)...... B-60 2.7.5.8 Toggled Menus (AS Ofl At)...... B-60 2.7.5.9 Graphic Menus (32H&I CHJ At)...... B-60 2.7.5.10 Permanent and User-Requested Menus (223 CHI ArSf AJ#X| XI 3 Dll At)...... B-61 2.7.6 Menu Bars (CHI A1 til)...... B-61 2.8 Procedure Steps(3 X\ gl SS1A1)...... B-63 3 WINDOWS (ASA)...... B-64 3.1 Window Components (EEA B-64 3.1.1 Title Bar and Title (EiOIS tiiS X||=)...... B-64 3.1.2 Border (0! Adi)...... B-65 3.1.3 Working or Client Area (3S S^)...... B-65 3.1.4 Scroll-Bar (i3I til).... B-65 3.1.5 Message Bar (Dll A| XI til)...... B-66 3.1.6 Status Bar (3 EH EA E)...... B-67 3.1.7 Control Bar (S Eg tl)...... B-67 3.1.8 Push Buttons (AAltiiE)...... B-68 3.1.9 Action Icons (^S 010IS)...... B-68 3.2 Window Type (SEA ##)...... B-69 CSMLab.@KIT B-iii ^ a 3.2.1 Primary and Secondary Windows (7 1E SEE21 Ail 3 E El c!£?)...... B-69 3.2.2 Application Windows (ii ESEi SEE)...... B-70 3.2.3 The System Windows (A|Eg SEE)...... B-71 3.2.4 Data-Enliy Windows (Q| 0| Ei SEE)...... B-71 3.2.5 Text Windows (g EE SEE)...... B-72 3.2.6 Map Windows (g SEE)...... B-72 3.2.7 Utility Windows (E 7 SEE)...... B-72 3.3 Message Windows (LH1 A| XI S EE)...... B-73 3.3.1 Request Message Window (£2E CHI Al XI ?!£?)...... B-73 3.3.2 Information Message Window (3 S DilAI XI EE")...... B-73 3.3.3 Confirmation Message Window (S^oj y|A|Xl S£°)...... B-73 3.3.4 Warning Message Window (3E LHIAIXI SEE)...... B-74 3.3.5 Working Message Window (2f S DIIAIXI SEE)...... B-74 3.3.6 Dialog Boxes (CHS! A1XI EE ClOIgSE e|E)...... B-74 3.3.7 Error Dialog Box (Oil Ei CD ti&Xi)...... B-75 3.4 Window States (SEE EhEH)...... B-76 3.4.1 Open Windows (Eg SEE)...... B-76 3.4.2 Closed Windows (@§1 SEE)...... B-76 3.4.3 Active Windows (2ljE|E SEE EE #351 SEE)...... B-76 3.4.4 Input Focus (2J E S?iE)...... B-77 3.5 Window Operations (SEE XIICH)...... B-78 3.5.1 General (BJ E M%v)...... B-78 3.5.2 Splitting Windows (SEE Si)...... B-78 3.5.3 Minimizing Windows (SEE SES1)...... B-79 3.5.4 Maximizing Windows (SEE $1CHSi)...... B-79 3.5.5 Restoring Windows (SEE 371 #S)...... B-80 3.5.6 Opening Windows (SEE B 7 1)...... B-80 3.5.7 Closing Windows (SEE SOI)...... B-80 3.5.8 Moving Windows (SEE 0IS517I) ...... B-81 3.5.9 Resizing Windows (SEE 37|E§)...... B-81 3.6 Window Navigation (SEE HI til XI 0| S)...... B-83 4 INFORMATION CODING (3 H Sg)...... B-85 4.1 General (SE A W)...... B-85 4.2 Color Coding (3 ag EE i3| 3g)...... B-86 4.2.1 Contrast / Luminance (CH tl 1 / $IE)...... B-86 CSMLab.@KIT ^ XI 4.2.2 Brightness (§131)...... B-86 4.2.3 Location (91 x )...... B-86 4.2.4 Use of Color a] Alg)...... B-86 4.2.5 Color Selection (M ...... B-86 4.2.6 Color Coding for Discrete Data Categories(E9^ QIOIEH SSISB.IS 91 Si ^ SB)..... B-86 4.2.7 Color Coding for Relative Values (BCH § ^ 2 9)...... B-86 4.2.8 Unique Assignment of Color Codes (® E El ^ 2g)...... B-86 4.2.9 Redundant Color Coding (i^ ^ 39)...... B-86 4.2.10 Unplanned Patterns from Color Coding (^ SB 01IA1 3||ajE|I| aSS EHS)...... B-87 4.3 Symbol Coding (ti S 29)...... B-87 4.4 Spatial Coding (SZ1 39)...... B-87 4.5 Size Coding (371 29)...... B-87 4.6 Shape Coding (5gf 39)...... B-88 4.7 Pattern Coding (EH S SB!)...... B-88 4.8 Line Coding (£12! SB)...... B-89 4.9 Area Coding (g B SB)...... B-89 4.10 Text ('oding SB)...... B-90 4.10.1 Abbreviations and Acronyms (gCM £1 ESXI-CH)...... B-90 4.10.2 Alphanumeric Coding (S-SX1 SB)...... B-90 4.10.3 Underlining Coding (^i£! 29)- B-91 4.10.4 Bold Coding (BEXII SB)...... B-91 4.10.5 Numeric Coding (5cII SB)...... B-91 4.10 Text Coding (ei!^E SB)...... B-2#! §21901 Sill 4.11 Display Range Coding (Cl ESBIIOI E9I SB)...... B-92 4.12 Flash Coding (BEHAI SB)...... B-92 4.13 Texture Coding (BjEH SB EE S9 SB)...... B-93 4.14 Multidimension Coding (DUE SB)...... B-93 5 INTERACTION (£19^5 EE §S*lg)...... 8-94 5.1 General (EE Al#)...... B-94 5.2 Command Language (B B CH)...... B-95 5.2.1 General (E BA B)...... B-95 5.2.2 Command Entry (B B CH Eg)...... B-95 5.2.3 Editing Command (BBCH E @3)...... B-96 5.2.4 Complexity of Command Language (SBCH2j #gE)...... B-96 5.2.5 Spelling Errors (§11 £#)...... B-96 CSMLab.@KIT B-v m n 5.2.6 Abbreviation of Commands (g g Oi £| 01)...... 5.2.7 Blank Spaces 01 ...... 5.2.8 Punctuation ...... 5.2.9 Use of Delimiter (=?SSX1)...... ■ B-97 5.2.10 Wording (S C-)...... ■ B-97 5.2.11 User-Assigned Command Names (M@X1 XI g S§01)...... - B-98 5.2.12 User-Requested Prompts (AISX1 X|@ 5§5§)...... B-98 5.2.13 Destructive Commands (B3 S ^01)...... ■B-98 5.2.14 Recognize Command (§ gOi £]X|)...... ■B-98 5.2.15 Aiding Command Recall (g H 01 EE7I ^ §x|)...... ■ B-99 5.2.16 Confirmation of a Command (g § £| #21)...... •B-99 5.2.17 Feedback and Help (EIE^B ESa)...... 5.2.18 Error Correction (2# §§)...... 5.2.19 Defaults (Cl SiSl)...... 5.2.20 Execution (£-0 )...... 5.3 Function Keys and Hot Keys (7 1 ^51 £1 ...... 5.4 Menus (Oil*?) ...... 5.5 Form-Filling (S-gJ^)...... B-102 5.6 Direct Manipulation (5]§ ...... B-103 5.6.1 General MS)...... B-103 5.6.2 Manipulation of Objects pH XllSSh)...... B-103 5.6.2.1 Pointing and Selecting (H£J iJB ...... B-103 5.6.2.2 Scrolling, Paging, and Panning (EBSB HI 01XI 01 SB EHW). B-104 5.6.3 Manipulation of Window (S EBB ...... B-105 5.6.4 Manipulation of Control Icons (XII01 010IEB E4)...... B-105 5.6.5 Manipulation of Graphic Data (B2H HI 01 El ...... B-106 5.7 Prompts(E 15§)...... B-107 5.7.1 General (S y A I-H)...... 5.7.2 Prompting (ESES)...... 5.8 Feedback (REM-)...... B-109 5.9 Status Information (£tEH 3 2)...... B-lll 5.10 Error Management (2# SB)...... B-112 5.10.1 Error Detection (2#HX])...... B-112 5.10.2 Error Correction (2# §§)...... ■B-112 5.10.3 Error Management for Form (S °j 2# EB|)...... ■B-113 5.10.4 Error Message (2# CHIAIXI)...... ■B-113 CSMLab.@KIT m » 5.10.5 Command Tnleraction Errors (§ 9 01 519 2#)...... B-114 5.11 On-Line Help (SEl9 SES'5)...... 13-116 5.11.1 General (El EJAf-S)...... B-116 5.11.2 Access and Return (ES3531 515012121)...... B-117 5.11.3 Context Sensitivity (3$ B-117 5.11.4 Wording and Style (US 21 5*11) ...... B-118 5.11.5 Content (9 8 ! 9 )...... B-118 CSMLab.@KIT 1 DISPLAY ELEMENTS (Cl teg 21101 Hi) 1.1 Character (SX1) 1.1.1 Between-Character Spacing (SX}a ?h te I 921: oisteoi* a asoiite Oise] at sxia oise ois ese sxia siboibi* exib a^omn an. AIISAIS: sxia aas aim 9* *oia io~65%°i be* 50101 sin, si tea sxia «i 5mu 2 sis 01921 b^ioi aoi 01 an. SH: (1) EX1 UtilOl SI1*0I3 85% OlolgJ IH,(2) SI1°! 9IE(himinancc)01 12ft-L0l olg IN, (3) «E CH ti I (luminance contrast)]! 88%0I61S IN, (4) AIOI(Eif, visual field)] I 5? 35E 01 9W ra,(5) sxm 9*21 *oioi is* oioia in sxia aas sxi*oia 25% 01901 choi an. 1.1.2 Between-Word Spacing (B01 a B^) oisaoi* a ssohe =g 01501 a* eom oise oi& eaa ecna siaoiaig eoia asiomn an. AII¥Alth Boia a^s sitea a sxi utdias a0101 an. 1.1.3 Between-Line Spacing (8 /I: 93: 8ae #9 oiEoi be sxisi miss oig eg a Exm sboibis s a aEoinn an. MIEAIS: gas siaa sxi #i soia e hhli sxi *0121 is%oi aoioi an. e, rasxia otyiE aia(accentmark)U iSXia LH g S Xl(0H,j, g, p 5)01 Site SEOIIte 01 8501! CSMLab.@KIT B-l *3^21 02 01 2CH01 ea. S3: cma bsxioii saihs 5x12 ays ei±«soii sags aaaci 201 etci. i-Paragraph Spacing (0B 02) 02 02 s Also] as 5X121 aism xia eas 5x12 asxiae 0# a 0210100 etct. M5A1W: 0#e e s 9S3IS ss aoioi sm. 1.1.5 Character Contrast (5X1 CH dl) AH¥Mih a. sag xi=as a sum sxi aims 6:i~io :iaioichoi eci. b. LHtilXI 3:10151010 315301 101X10 15:1013010 AI22 i@8 5Ck S3: tings m°i aes ch tiiat soioi so. assit vie amis 10a-isaoici. 1.1.6 Character Height (5X1 feOI) S3: 5X121 5015 5tilS AH 25 5X12 0 01 EH OIIAI EH 2 SXI 2 2 21 Cl. (0, 0IH2JII31 ois as e xi a a ch ) M¥AlSh a. sxi2 sois as i55 , a:n 24501 a201 sm, gjsaas as aibes 205-22501 a. b. aim sss 0x1 as m gmi 22011 3 mm sxi sois as 10501a. C. acn OH a 31AI 31 El (viewing distance)# 53W HH, #“2 5X12 5015 AI2E31 165 - 205 01 3B510, 2IS AlSel 5X12 5015 215 -30501 3S61C1. CSMLab.@KIT S3: 5X1 3X1S X1AIX1BI* tiStt MOHS AlB5(vis,ial angle)* #35915 A1SSH01 61 Cl. AIBES SQ0IL1 5(°)£ 5555. (1° = 60') 1.1.7 Character Width (5 XI LHdl) 3°l: 5X1 Li til 5 5X121 AISS31 «§ A10I2 XICI* 8155. AH5A1S: a. gas 5X1 32 23 5 8011 80X1 018121 5X15 2015 SS, 5X12 50l:Util2 tiieS 1:0.7 OHM 1:0.9 A10I2) 2 2 01 SCI. b. El eg 80 5X1 01301 2015 SS0I15 5X12 80|:UtilS 22 1:0.5010101 SCI. c. M31 was 5X15 5X12 5 0! :Li til 2 HI21 1:1 01201 SCI. S3: a. 5X1 - ®1 #2 5X1 t(L2 25X1)8 XII2813, 5X12 Utils 5X15012 60%21 2 2 01 SCI. 5E.J21 LS 5012 50%,MS 8012 70%,WS 8012 80%« 5X1 Util 3 aseci. b. 5X1 - 5X1 131 4* XII2e 2X12 Util5 5012 60%XI 20101 BC1. c. ^S 5XI(Wide Characters)- 5)3011 A152 8 tiS 5X15 5012 UHI2 tilSOI X|5tilB(l : 0.6)011 A1 1 : 1731X1 Algtt 4- 212. 1.1.8 Character Stroke Width (5X1 #1 5XII) 32: # SMS 5X1* 01#S 52 axis* asl*£S 5X12 50IHI3 ESSC1. A1I5A1&: a. # SMS 5X1 8012 1/6-1/12010101 61 Cl. b. 5X1(225)* 01SS S(®1) A10I2 S3S Siff # SM2 2UHL1 5X1 5012 15%0I30I 20101 2Cl. S3: a. 501:# til(lt)- 5X1L1 5X12 801:#2 tilS 5HS 583538011 22 5:1-8:101 2 0101 a ci. CSMLab.@KIT b. ¥@s eg - ?3e ung^gsa si ase ung)oii saa ifae sits teOI:*l°l HIS 5:1 ~ 6:10| 01 01 SCt. c. ?se sit - otes ting on sots ?sb mit(¥SEa sa otsa sit>s S0|:S|4 HISS 7:1-8: 1 01 SOOt SCt. d. SE(iS)- aaag seii net® satonm cissaioi shichi hcniis sits SOhsnsl bl It 6:1 - 7:101 Ot Ot ®tPt. 1.1.9 Font(SS) ess sae aimist ags sue e 21s a msoict. ssfsta gin -he gee itsenot act. ess ?i a it a otznaint aotot sta, atsa si %M2t tii(tt)E imot act. a. aaa style* asaoot act. a a am eg mas stye ess nianot act. mas a (serifs), menus, oi hh ] ai(itaiics), iBis ms emt esana 3Xt@, sss e gam hois animu g as mini, es ascsit moi) amok® sai) ses ggs(sit until) mnm ==md anaao hois eitaie msnot act. es ama a st»i ass a^soict. b. Houma ciseaiom suit ms sits a mas a(s®serifs)* itssnot act. c. eitaia am enmsa ms g?, in as a(ScnfS)» itsstot amm s sact. d. etmoi ess onasoi ye uncoinMitre(L/M) es* asm. c. Bit as aa sa sit its in t eg* 4 aoot act. f. a st a on haieis ess e one maect. g. sa» SEotact gat in on a ctm a es* Atsenot act. CSMLab.@KlT 1 DISPLAY ELEMENTS (Cl^eBIIOI Si) 1.2 Labels (Etffl) 33: a a oil boixis ?su ?saiss awsm em# em shse a# ngoiai an. XII9 A|g: a. 1511 • aisa sioi aie eom ssb& sssois Sasun an. Bigg iiaa ecne aissixi as, seise seem aasnii Sasun an. ■ Bigg sex a ±xi* sssioi EAisBoi an. • xhi =oi sassi neon nxia in, bibs xneoi Aiene xisoiiah mis sa eoisxie sinoi an. • Bigg mssnsi gg aeons sseas wot an. Bign aussxis aaaoiu as 4-aon oixia smoi es see xnaoi as ggone aisshoi an. xnssxi Bigg a onn oi eh sues sg soi mn. b. a xi • Bigg sian ses aeoiu sseoii axiom siasn aeoiu sseon uHxian. ■ Bign ns Big aioioii ssa 2an e earn sn • oioiem ag esa nsHe nxnn Bigg n xhxhoii msioi uhxishoi an. c. ses • Bigg §=nxi am a an on amna, cngxi* aisshoi an. is ns sessi saniEe shoi an. a. gas • ssa asatem oili ses)oi sAia mom swa bibs aanni aisshoi an. CSMLab.@KIT B-5 (O4=S6||0l 24=) 1.3 Icons and Symbols (0)0IS3) tiS) oioies bboio oesxi eb eaoieas mli ™e(action)e see 3010. ess we gfoio, 2is, gg, aioio e^oiu os Aie-exn-se §§ aasixi ?!5I0I BSeES SB SOS S0IB01B OB EXI, SXISSI Sffl SB 3BISS liehhb aoib . • 0I0IS3I ess »a eeass seenoi eo. • oioiem ess stasis iu son ssaxioi set. • oioishi es oes e xhsiu ™ a (action) es chso H oi eo. • oioiam ess os oiois-esin ton asaoiot eo. b. oioie • oioies xiee ygsixn bbsio juishsehccki emea aisai)s sesyoi eo. • OIOIES EXIS SMB OSOI 5CHOI eo. - OIOIES EX|L| X|fe°| es(0ll: AH# 3Htilti9 2gf, S3) SB Se°l eS(0fl: SSxie VSfc B, * EE A SB B)S AIS8I0I Basis, O El US XHSISI OS a. $»s s ggsiss OXIB OCHOI SO. c. X|S • eee e$°i ese liolhe #se ess beai 3 seone aisshoi eo. • ^bs 333 ess odixi os §oe(comPiex) eso eeooioi sib, ese axis 20-hd aoi eo. • axixi os ess Aism ra, e eso xis e a*s es es°i xis e xibmo i5o%oie oioioi sia, es axis see oies aissixi ato. S3: a. oioisui eso a a eye aesi3 os oiois-esa sse -e as es essi aoi eo. b. e ess exixi anise xiggoioi eo. e os °mi°i ess aisooiaib e c. se eS(abstract symbol)S XI50II SBEIE BE# OO eSOILI iBIB3 axi-xixusoio es aeon ¥Banoi eo. CSMLab.@KIT 1 DISPLAY ELEMENTS (Cl if ill 01 24) 1.4 Numeric Data (4X1 01010) 92|: 4X1 010100 89£3 4X121 201* 0000 01010 010. AII¥A5Sh a. 4X1 010105= 0500105 4X5* A5S6HA5 936525 L5E5LH05 =50. b. BE 4X50 4gaol £10 05 60. c. 4X1 sat 691* 5SSH05 853. S42 a @91051 998521 5AI5H05 90, d. 0(zero)25 A19850 4X1 5310 AlgSlXl §50505 60.(051:00288 285 53|). 1 0162 04a 01852 4X50 OS 53160. (Oil: .43S 0.4325 531) =. 34EJ92 «OII 443S 5X1 250 0. 4X1 010105 9 9S 33E 443# 3IS25 3B8H05 853, 44801 250 980510 2E9 SB# 60. f. 0SS 0¥Ei 5A15H05 60.(49# 038 052H05IA5 916 080 5X1853, 4@S 03S a-OIIAI ¥=2S 0¥O HAI60.) g. 9562 SS5* UI55311 6981505 850 98 , 0 XIW 04*05010 @562 625* 2565* A5S85 CD 5AI60. h. 8 3H2 4X| 010102 X50IB #050105 850 98010 3 4501« HAI8H 4005 60. S3: a. 4X50 #6S SgJE(precisirai)S 5A18H05 853 , 4X125# 6S3 §2 XI01 2501 3 015 A5S850 98010 #36 53139# 8X581505 60. b. axia q4»0ioi0i SAia# 4xi0 sssi ## 4 250 955 sshoi 60. CSMLab.@KIT I 8 £ I I 1 ^ ju S 1 ss u A ii !pi I III if jij a ^ jij Iiiiiii I 1 DISPLAY ELEMENTS (2 2g Bll 01 E2) 1.6 Graphs (32H5) 1.6.1 General (88219) 921: hehhs am oiaa uss ess aioi ai ess Haste asaaioia a a#oia. AIISAlSh a. ZIEHHa A1SX10II2! 849 l^l°§ g#S12l ElSOteOl 92. b. 3ENH2 mate 4011 ¥1x1 SHOt BCl. 1.6.2 Scales, Labels, and Patterns (2218, 5)8, Mgl) 92|: 221 ws asa a sa as unsskxi haisih seon uei *xi-¥s-xis(ig*t) #m 5B8KK #9 Ste2 3315 228 ID AlgSte SAI* 892. SH2I 922 1.2 Labels gssiAia. mas a suae esa siua senli asoia. oieon 02 sais , 68S0I SBE1E1 Ste Si* SS 2012. AII^AIS: a. A 9 || 2J • as aaotiAtea boishoi aa. bbi esa 015421 saasa mis son sai sh on so. • Mg amiss as eseas as^ss aiseoioi ea. • 22122 23(nckmark)S 1,2,5,102 HNS SEHU 10XUH2 ES9225 Slli #201 ste, s sxi aioioii emote as(tickmark)S sen 9 on 010. . 4x1 22I8S 0011 AN AI98H01 Ste, Ell01 El2 9X11 S¥* 298H01 BQ, • 3ENH0IIAH 2S2 2218# A1S8N01 Ste 3¥, AlgXIOl #9 3EHH2 98 tiissie sNa aonaioi aaamoi a a. • S4E1 9011 201X12 3ENH2 221231 982 A1SX10H2I 242 9821 22182 sm°s a Aim oi a a. (oil: 822011 Aisaa eenhs mcr is mxiaioiiai A1SEIS 982 221831 4Ala IMEI X1I5EIOI01 a2.) • 2218 011 Algsa BXte AI2I9S 22 S40I1A1 S4B5 01BHCHIAH ¥425 S01SN01 a El. • 4 40112 5122 2218 2 EAI9OI01 a El. b. El a ■ 4oii hai @ eseoi sas aoisiaxi g#si2i haieoioi so. CSMLab.@KIT B-9 ■ buss aexm oexio b xii Bi5(SanSserioae aisshoi sm. • sms jus hboii eiasMi Oxiaoi aa a^oiiAi secern gis# sxishoi BO. c. HUB • MBS 96B 82(hatching)21 SSi AlgSHOl BO. S3: a. axi 41 e obhh * asaa, xissiqi Aiis^a sacooia, as S)smi snot bo . b. 05 a 01 Ah2! 3E||ES tilBSIB 380 B 005011 05 CMBH QIOIO SSS HIB81B 35011, 5™31 BOSS 51 XlSSHOt BO. c. 005011 5A|@ QI0IE12 #00115 BQIO 91X1 BOB BUS AlgBO. 1.6.3 Grids (3 XI) 6931 AS°S sue 3525 050 05 011 AH QIOIBI21 2x1 5A|B 55615 OS98 9X1B1 BO. AII8A1S: a. 3X1* OOLHXIO 6X15 08X158 X1I36H01 BO. b. 9X15 05 QIOIOO SOI OSSSIE# 00X101 BO. c. 6X1X1 95 9X1HO 6X1X1 55 9X1* SX1I EBSH01 BO. d. HAI95 XHX1I2 0X1* 39612* XHxllOII 9X1* SxHAt BBtt Id 89 9X1* A1SBO. S3: 9X15 9 BE(precision) BBS E£1 55 3 8011 B AlgSHOl BO. 1.6.4 Lines and Curves (5131 35!) BS WSB 9925 0IS61B 3S5 0180 5! XI8193 29010. BS B3B 9925 OISB B 32 B6@ 5425 018015! XI61949 29010. 9BS 3 2 OISOII H1B1 9X15 29010. CSMLab.@KIT B-10 AH¥An8: a. a - as siaa axis 4osas acnot eo. • a eh a aeae oioias snae a ¥oi(cy cie)s haish eonoi so. • a sansoni oe eae Msm in sa eas yy seoi a on 2 g (codings on sa yaoi ys omasa oe sag aioioii osaoi y$n ¥£siet hh ass ssoiu ye oaei aioiae as sea ygg ssn aaa a on Aiggonoi a a • as saoi bsi omsai sea21s m yy°i sas -bis sail on as sao 28ia earn aioies am yaaoon so. • os sa aasaioiDiiAH as sioa saoi #@a 2101s ssaa a sas son • Aigxie see ease ess aioiao hihoi gas in sae sma sms oaa§ oaunoi so. sms ess sea on on sm xngxne oe ssssoiiasi aasa snoei SEoiiaa asneoi ses s ao • sa#s 011*0010 sonooni eaisoho es #as 0101 as yxn 010ms eais eagssa saoonon mo. • as as saw a ossa y sags essis as xngxnon y yae°i mgs an aaof a on a =asa 20 ye *0=1= oiss xnoion w in so. ss sa eeheoiiai cm01 a oibiebis °j onae $ie as sasoi am sis a oons so a 4= sasoi a seal 01 oonon so. se on a eehso oe cnaes sss eono ay(a,iextunn g )S ¥on xiyyss ssoi sasnai asonxnon so. sons aaaiA-i ¥E ea oehh °i oe cuss saoiu a y ays eeso aaeaioia e ¥soio. AH¥An@: a. e ya xnoisi gys in yanoio smses oomon so, b. am so g«s onea n gy LH¥om Bias eon on so. c. SSEI8J a (profile line) 01 EH g¥S OS HSEfy(profile) 3l ¥B OE# 83 S ¥001 a a. Plots and Trend Plots (aS ESI ¥AII@) @21: t-iSEfe feSOI 2ite 2%l@ HUB Oil at at 2| 01019* EAI8I3 3 CHI 01 EH @£| @31B axis 39501 ci. 5 Alias a B4=oi Ai@a a 39321 wsoici. AIISAtW: a. @S5 • ass a9 *3 s*(datapomts)oi saa 21 dpi ys gsotit ae am as 9 sb assn oi a ci. • 34=21 ese AI012I @31* sioitt Mfc % @4=21 @31 g BAI8 IS aSS* B4=°l SB 4= as LI E| LH 01 a Cl. (91: @4=01 1,2, a, b23 HI 01X13 SS 1-2, 1-a, 1-b, 2-a, 2-b, a-b°| @31* HOI¥i= as SOI HAIEIOIOI act.) • Cl4= CHOI9 3*21 @4=3 @31* S0t¥@ 3SE0I a SIB SOUXI LI9 tit OH, aisxioi a set ciioi9 3*°i ass* stasis oiwe sisenot aci. b. sxiia ■ was S3 A13S 0I3B0ILI xBOll 3AI8I3, Al@2| sgg 21=0119 ¥Bgt»23 EAieci. • YBOII AI38 BAI5H0I It OH AI32I SSS 013011 AH 9IB23 HAIBCI. CSMLab.@KIT SH: a. OSES gs LHCHIAJ 3Z)BB SSO seb EAI1? IH AISSHOt so. b. gsEfe esa at bebsi ssib sotso am sieves aisspie so . c. eaiib syges gstet as x-iismxis atiie, oieh °i be as oiieotao bsi«b a## E as oisoi sto. 1.6.7 Bar Charts and Histograms (90! 3815 SIBEES) 921: ami EBHHS EXI3B 8tS 3ti°l a CHE UEtfcS EEHHOIO. 9021 30IS SXIM tilEHIBO. OCH EBHSS LISCHB at 7HXIIO tilEOII SSS EEHHOIO. SIBEEHS S|CH EEHH°I S @CHE BSSB BEHI EE(*», e@$E)2l S£i LIEUHS EEHHOIO. 3IHEEHMA12 BEB SI5ES OW E a Cl. AH9AHS: a. Qioicte tiia* in e sens go S #@ai pggomi sin, so §ga etoi e Erne wam e sue * esshoi act. b. sea ota at a eehhb hais ih echo ass esoili ebb ass bsoioioi so. c. ECH EEHE01IAH ifiB QI0IB2 ECUS 9E8H0I St Cl. d. BCH ESHHOHM ECHO Elte SESt lOSSOICHOI SO. e. am hai • EEHH2 at CHS Eg# E 9H 0101 2J.CH Ot SCI. • =topi a see sei m a ome swtt e at amoi aoot she , e sa aiE amot so. f. @XI (Deviation) • BXHB O OUlfe at CD EEHH2 OSS EEHE2 OSQI EXISHOt SO. • exie L| El LH S etCH EEHHMAHS 9 Eg SB BXIB SB SHEH2 BBS 5X11 B °I2 io%OIStE OEILIOI SO. eta on sea be( aXI atdl EM EE HAI It IH 2 echm beb exi am haishoi so . g. ¥3 BiCH 305 4 3 5 3 3.5 Z 1.5 1 0.5 0 sas a ¥c« oi on sea ¥ #as as# as a haijhoi act. 5#¥ch oasb ¥ SSt(segmmt) ¥31 SSS S¥ Hiatt EH AISBO. ¥ ¥oia sit 52s ise 6Aim SAima, asoi as B¥2 as sia aaia 3|0l3O(category)B 01 OH CHI, a 91 331121 3I0I3OB ¥#011 OEILHOt BO. S3: a. ¥CH 305S AISAI3I @3 E531I 01 oil # ¥ a# 03 AISJHOI BO. b. B3 3EHH2I ¥031 0101 OS = 323 3 3 2000 ¥3130 33# 6HI 8t3 s#h sa os as sas oisao. 1.6.8 Pie Charts (88 3015) 321: as 305S a# ¥AH8 3225 OVCH a SI Oil OB ¥ 3 22 til#3 OEILHS 305010. AH¥AtS: a. mm gas 53H oistm maao. b. a* 30HB 3101302 SB Oil CHB ¥ 3)01302 083 ESoHOt BO. e. OSS 8H3 ¥xH50il 53 812 0x1813 31 = 6100 ¥iHB OS OH HAIM 5H0t BO. 8201 OSS tfS ¥ StS 355 300, OSS 3 3201 Al 6 52 SOS 291 EAIBO. d. ¥ 322 OSS @#0HA| 2S#23 35# EAIBO. e. ate as haishoi sis as 3050112, soos ms mu a a as oolhs hai * ¥ 3 2°l OS Oil ¥3ISH0I BO. CSMLab.@KIT f. #9 g 9 B 95 SH01 tt CD), BUS (hatching)* 01861 X10 OS §920 55B1XIX1I ssea. S3: a. 03013 9 93 ¥XH«8 3X10 05* 0030. b. asm ggai axixi ges m3 @a nasso aicn aaa* Aigstioi so. 1.6.9 Flowcharts (®SE) 99: IBEfe 2iS A10I2I 2X19 3X11* SgSIXI 361 55010. tgSS 3X1 S35U H3AII5 XI Bl 53 5X115 99011 Alga D. 5=53 QIOIBO ™ 3 (action) 0! A15S2I seoii mo oiBxii soon 5aisi3xi sxi eiaoii oibhb 4= as# a«so. La Sarong Engine nKTaoatwMoeammnd MI¥AiS: a. aq xiga aibs 3 bio 23011 00 SAigoioi so , b. 3 3X1101133 3 @109 ass 210101 SCI, c. 1SE3 3093 333 5AI813 01 233 X129 933 5S01 813901 30101 SO. d. SB53 30 0 2X193 23* 113X10 113 353 993 0101 BO. e. se52i ssa xige a @=0113 2e=£io a oil 3 oiettsasa 53 0X119853 SiO. f. =85011 A1SS13 BBS 98115 ! XIS* OBI01 80 . CSMLab.@KIT 1.6.10 Profile Charts and Segmented Curve Charts (HEHtW 3BHH2t e aaiH) AIISAtS: a. oasoiiAt -s digitize! sas oishw ¥ as oietBB sens sssiiot so. b. HSEte ti OhBH 88S SSS AtSStOI Boll ¥BSf ¥ %E# BB. C. tia SSHi OEMS - at B4=e BWB ¥ 2JE = OtEH^OII BfflOl MOmt SQ. d. as EEEtB 3SHH - at BXIB BOH BE# HAI61CN 4>gt 4= 2iES BH01 BO. e. ¥B BB 38H3 • ¥2! BB 3EHS2I at g “S SSI aotl BB BBS UISE EAlEIOIOt BB. 4 15 3 2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0 • at sb see see exis sxieta, exut sts ssa g? eta atnisi 31 Ell 3 B(calegory)¥ OtEHOtl, EM|2| 3tai3BI¥ ?IB0ll BEtLHOt BB. • at g«g 8HS(hatching) 01Lt §«S OlSotOt BE 9 41 4S£|S^ 8H0t BB. • XtSStBS 8HS(hatching)0IB 88 SB* B 38LH0II BUS SAIoHOt BB. 1.6.11 Mimic and Diagrams (01813 B0IW3S) 921: Dies EBB 8 ffeXti EBB HAISI B SEHS 3 BSSE2I BSIB 3188 SSStS aoiB. B0KH3SS 018# 38 SBEE 5S6 #gB 8 EH01B. CSMLab.@KIT B-16 il-H HM@qciWS3 'ob hots 4- en ike bisiyb mi* e^ss amis ebckjiowo bbws • ■ob (OMSK ssic be * m gfiicioion ssivi wosg an sbcssss • ms lows lie aaa awe ions iBi lemw kymsiuioiowd • 'ob woiors * ssio woe sbes g ascwoiowo as ics wobb • 'OB OK)75 losem 3SIYH 3I5@WY MBOOIOWO BK)*01 SSfeB • 'OB tofoailSIYn SteiS a7% os wyb wymikb ms iowsiyh as as bbs aaoioioo as ich iiobb • BCIOIOO f os io use in saic Ege ebb noag awe wo Hawes buys ess biyh •> 'OB wooa waiYn meg sews BWBB WSSH BUS HI SSWY SIP MIY3 Sg fS 35 BE 85 W5S5BS 3 'WoB W0HS B5R KliE IOSB Ig 81 's 'WoB wowsBs 5S§ wa niois wsrs a siys iss sa sag as o 'OB W0H8IYH IkWeWsS 5n#W5 SSWB BBS '3 'WoB wowsiYn spwo Mass* Eix* r oiobbs ebbs as p woB wo waiYn sswo Hosssa eebbiy oiobbiy ebbs as ° 'WoB wowawn sale isppsp obsitt assB sa g 'Wos wowobss ike asss g ebbs a wo wo wo hoe id -q 'WOB WOWOBIYH IkWeBWc BIDE isSfS a flfflB BIDE EfvHO IY5 3BCWOIOWO WCtelD '* :WSWY^IIY 1 DISPLAY ELEMENTS (Cl iSHII 0| S.±) 1.7 COLOR (4S&) 1.7.1 Number of Color (AH 2| 4=) Ail¥Alih a. AIS8I# AH°1 = 4=S S ins AISS El S36I0UAI 47H 0181, ael^oi SIBOUHS solxi oi3ioioioi ala, seet «ai sieoiixis 77m 01 sis ahisish01 an. b. ah a sa°i aoisi aoii mam 4= as# 67ixi oisio ah* aisshoi so. =. misTii A«# #AH5171 Li susm sis ggoiis «7ixi oisi=i a»s aisshoi eici. S2: a. AHSS CIS 28* XI @81# BBSS AISS ¥2 a Cl. b. e ais 011 Aisg# AH 6i 21 4=# ohbei# a a ¥Seb easicN assnoi eici. 1.7.2 Foreground/Background 18 ! Albl; 71) AII¥AIW: a. uhsahs agon eoia 0101021 stii 4= a# ah°s ge^es aissuoi ei Cl. b. 01 All el sas SHOI W ID ni@AH# AISSHAI# S SCI. c. assies ssahs uugs^i si ioo4eoib cis a»# aisshoi eici. d. AH 21 0101X1=1 a AH# stMgcs agsH2l tiHgs»°| CHOI# 7:1§E a SOI a Cl. e. maai e Hugs msnoi eici. f. ^ISSHI 7ISSS S6IAI3I7I sen BES2I HHgs" AI0|2| CHtilb 8E8I SOIOI SCI. g. aSAHS 7 1AI ^(visibility) • ileus 8171 ?I8HAH# HHgAHSS SB AH (neutral achromatic color)* AISSUOI EICI. h. AHes ass 7nsiB saisi# asoii tings a ah 21 as eaae ah# aissuoi EICI. US: a. HtigsHe A«# aisei sas eiximegi g§§ e 4= act. b. 06! AH OIL! SAH2I BS as EIS2I s»g SEHLI tilW Sfia &S ¥71 SH HAIOII AisgcHoi aci. c. cuss ssbehoiiais aasi chbdi soixhoi act. CSMLab.@KIT B-18 1.7.3 Contrast/Luminance (CH SI?IE) AII^AIS: a. M3 2801 AISB EH 9ES 10cd./m2(3 ft-L)OI 301 01 01 @Oh b. & M3 EB01IAI 3 MS 20DE(CIEL»u*v)OI3 flOIXI UOI @Ch c. M3 sae Ahstt ehs 3iie cum* oisoioi sis ahcklhsi oie M3 3saf U2SS sxism aoi. d. M3 tiS • CHma 991 ES3EH0IIA1E HH a it! CHI CM ties 971 612 BSXI1 9it 9 5 (HOI a oi • M3 tiea xisae aa# eh ties unaMai ioode(ciel* u»v)oi3 xioixi us MB Algoloioi au. S2: a sioi7i°i ms hhb2 HUSM2I cHsamoi act. b. a 6X12 XISSS M2 9E0II ase asu. AH¥AI3: a moi §aa 8 eoii Aigaaa ra xis es moi xia gas 32011 Aisamoi aoi. b. ex | 23S aaoiu 3X1 2 a (shape or size coding)3l 3MI AIS20I2S a @01. c. axi xi 01* oiga mas vDuaa ubilis 9 xixi ss2 xioie see eh2 ?aa oiseaioioiiMs ah xixi oiaie see eh Aisaoi. d. exia 3Eoii me ma ■ exia aEoti me mas gsa as a 32 aiois ses 9 sum a aisshoi aoi. • exis 295 oisis aisshoi a oh • 9 OH 32 9B CH 32 9X1 952 t)|S 2:1013010101 a Oh • exi mas oiseaioi #E2 33%a ioo%2 sea 9ss aisshoi aoi. exi 3ES 6ft-L(20 cd/m2)OI38 AISSHOI @01. 2OH 3ES 18 ft-L (60 cd/m2)OI 3 29 ft-L (100 cd/m2)OI SI* AISSHOI @01. =. exia aaoi xissiohb 92 * a sis 9a ass asg an aisshoi @m. f. exi2 @SOI 322 B32S AlStt EH Ole S3 OIL! 9 23 2! 3E2 9B2S exia ass aisshahs a so. ®2: exl2 ass reverse video @ SOIS AIS2XIE 8ISQ1, eS UHSOII 29S SXI* CSMLab.@KIT Atgeioio m ya2i ai°5 xhchoi jftsm. 1.7.5 Location (9|X|) a. gBAI(iIlS§l, peripheral vision)* SEI fflOIS 4" 2 EggOI 28(0. 0312E AlgX12 es aioioii emas ogonet ss Aigsnot bo. b. fflltll ts as Eb SMS EHAI2 0HXII2 3 a Oil Algtt 2 320 K3i31 ggg ebaioh as ogoii agon AigsHms b so. ESAI01I 2fc Sg2 E OH ill SOI OB OH HI Si SStt E 20. 1.7.6 Pure Blue (®&4») mss uhsohai exio ois a es a sh 2E2 ga haioii ee megs aiss mmoi bo . 1.7.7 Pure Red (‘SB21 M¥AHSh Sia*!SS| AlgXISS 01 mg OH B3810! MSOII CIBSaiOIOIIAI 650nm (nanometers, 02061)0122 OSS fflSHOt BO. 1.7.8 Color Combinations (22 JS(SS)) a. OlgB 2 231 gg2 ES2 AlgS HI BO. b. 22 030112 "SEE" 2*21 AHSS #81 1118H OH BO. c. os a OH oas #2 mas mm 01 bo. StB g 31 ills2(saturated Red and Blue) #0231 g 2 (saturated Red and Green) lilB #31 S g (saturated Blue and Green) EBg3l gg (saturated Yellow and Green) CSMLab.@KlT 2B12 til92 232(Yellow on Purple) S2 tiHfoi 9 2 (Green on White) ¥2 tU92 232(Yellow on Green) as^ til#2| El22(Blue on Black) N2 till1"2! XIS 2 (Magenta on Green) 382 til 92 SS2(Red on Black) 382 til921 XIS2(Magentaon Black) 82 Hiaa 992(Yellow on White) 1.7.9 Chromostereopsis '3222 CI9IH Al 2 AII¥AIS: CH¥@ HU9 011M 88 K920IIAI 99 El3221 3ElCI|0|g(gradation)2 Algg HISHOl aci. 1.7.10 Color Coding (29 28) 1.7.10.1 General (gJtDAlg) 29 298 met sa haioii Aiseci. aag (a)Aigxia 92 * sji gisn ast in (b)Qioia ass xiais in as warn @2 222s aw a 9 am 09 s uaw ra Aisem. 9 * yai =?mm 9 aoiot §tci. b. Ill CHECH AlgS 29 288 0121 S@8 2283101 CHSia 29 292 KflAISIOt 8 Cl. c. 9HAI0II §8 #3231 KOI 98 9E2 29 29* AIS81S 6 21 B9 * 9 SIS 28 eisnot BCl. d. ahs aas as sena 293 aa32s aisbioioi eo. e. is ssomonAH aisxib bissis as as geist in 3 hsohoiiah aissb sg 01 a #ehb uaufe ±saa @aax yon shoi so . f. §g5£39S 28 AS <8325 6011 aSBIS XtS HI38H0I BO. g. as ssesioi eg 011 as sye asane aisw an As#*oim sit 4= sis os s xnssnoi §a. h. asa SUES* CUES AigxiEi ssw in, As a agoia #01 a weoio gs son ai gas 4s#s asa 4- sun snot so. i. 3 SOU Algols ASS 31521 A|gXI3| AlgSIB A»#°| flSIS El El 01 El El. j. B4-2 8CH3BO 3CHB0I S2tf OH El H4=2 3EHBS SS8IS0I A«a 3 El 0101 ti a AISSHOI 80. k. 3isieixi axis ssiBix as ahss as # 3SS bbomss a so. #3: a. eas Eiseaiom eiysoiiAH, as aib sohb at Aigxxi a me asnx 01o! ae 3 s si on saishoi go. b. QI0IEI3I Eiseaioi son sygoi saie on asa(S=tpomt)oiLi ais @2 # All a (actual value) Oil AS# 3gS SSBI3I AlSSf 4= 20. ima 3S) AII¥AIS: a. 3 0101 EH 919I3EIB CHfiolS ASS S#aX SOlOt BO. b. 6011XIS AISX1 3B0I □ I El 3 SIM Algols A»# Alga 3$!S EIBIOI 80. c. saass onEt. anno a#s so as seh* ootno. d. Bin si xi aoiE as oaa ass 8HS(hat Ching)Bos ## aisshoi so. e. BBASOILI 2B1XIAS ia B 1132 ASS 3S0IO BSS 281 EH AISSHOI 80. 31 sas 3i gAsa sis 032 Asgs agsi3Es Aisaxo 3eh as mg sea os saioi bisQ i Aisaooi eo. f. As## oise gas SA« otealoi0i as aisshoi ao. g . @28i3io x? sesnoi sis 3s saioiib sas aeA« mB#a aiss eiswoi eo. gAS3i ae as a bba"# bbw ms stum as sa aissioi see ton sn41 CHOI 80. h. sexiAS-SBAs 3 ei 3 EiBAs-BEiAsa yoi see Aioia saiss a on saie as AISSHOI 80. CSMLab.@KlT S3: a. 39 011 AlgEIS ASS SS8I3 WSSSAII AISSHOI El Cl. b. SAItl AS8 Algtt CHS SaigES 5)S@ SBHAIOII AISSHOI SICK c. 4-521 soie said o soi son my as eisass aissioh haishoi yci. ah2| a msto gest asm aioiae oisgo S g^sitr choiis ah21 syaioiae aisshai s ei sci. 1.7.10 Color Coding (ASS 39) 1.7.10.3 Color Selection (AH21 All “AID: a. y ymu xheai ss a »s gas qioibs aisxici ^°i* sms in aisshoi so . b. sta soi sis sons ggAisoi m sson sys"s aisshoi eici. mam as 9 6 011 til« 01 Sf CHS SAHS SSAHS AISSHOI SCI. c. SSS 6 711 SIS# gy AH (700 am) - 2 8! XI AH (600 nm) • 2SAH(570nm)- @5?AH(535 nm) • S AH (500 nm) • S^AH(493 nm)- EISA“(470nm) SS AISSHOI EtO. aycl AISXPI AH saw SSOIIS 650nm0lg2| ElgS El SHOI SCI. S3: a. ay ahs Aigxi2i 5=21- goioii sssiu xilixitii aoi aissib eysiau sa Aim sai on sae s 4= yci. b. ah g 2go Aisxig ais a« ais sss myoi yci. 0821 ss gjygys mason a Aisas ah 21 mmoici. CSMLab.@KIT B-23 gg| sska gaa ma attEioti Afggg ¥ sa pjoi ¥pj @e mai^h gg ¥ ti^9¥ |oja Good $¥ 816 Good 38^ ¥°j oi¥E nfE¥ UI9&¥ &eh 516 ¥¥ ehS Poor ¥^ 6¥ S8 uf^ @3 Poor ¥6 38^ AI66 18 m¥ 9H Poor ¥6 6¥ E6 x4d|SJ| atg # X^S¥12 3S&EH Good *!!]■ 6¥ S¥ 9 31 Poor ¥¥ ¥¥ 1 38^ i8 m¥ 38^ UHS Poor ¥6 @¥ 1 t3^I ¥¥°J £|DPh as 3¥0|!E 5|g ¥ Atg ¥¥# ®§a. ST2[¥0| 8 6(open)/SS(flowing)S HAISHQ ¥¥01 6§j(closed)/SX|(stop)g UEUHE %E 5I#PI &SE0IIA1 A|§B^ ^8 3018 5HS0II/HE E03E HA|E EWO. 2 E^MOII Al§& X|- S ¥ (magenta) E EX^ E£H>ll/d AhS¥E SME0|| □ £[ ¥¥011 AfgEO. CSMLab.@KIT @4) QIO10 24g AISBOII QIOI0O g g (command)! BS SHg 2481b @91* BSB. sas aioiae haisibu m@spi yen 4=4 oio snssig; suiaai bqibo . a. 3 Em qioib a 2 4! ea»g soon a hi 42011 sas ois in aisxiai saw s ag §h * haishoi an. b. sene @4oi ag 4asa 24! eas m in 45521 am 2 4bah * yoixne aisxpi ks 4°s es tugg Aiw# x-nssnot an. • aikelectronic) 05*91010114 91010 2201 S5HXI 2!# ID Ql0|B «5(data filed)* §481X11 HAI8H^0O1 SO. • qioibi 24 xigg qioib 24 aaion bibboi a0101 8U2 AISII 2 4! AM ?Si SI4SI snot BO. EB QIOIB21 00*3101! 24011 g}23(compatibllily)0[ aoioi oioi, Aisxi xison Qua sasoi aoiot ao. • QIOIB! 4X110 Sgg DELETES I* ggg 5Sg “ HB @401 50101 BO. [aaaixi] xigoi as m isxi 01421 §s4xmg -ax-nsiAiaaoxi?" ohaixib mm “oraia sa°s omoxioi ao. • QIOIB yg! QIOIB hai ygg ssa°§ a 24 "jas aisshoi ao. • Qioiaxn Dial sa@ seh 2i omxn 24358 in asu as* eu*i aisxkh a an oi ao. • soia qioib a son 2*425 24# shoi ar in qi 01 a 21 2401 ggaai 01 #01XIB 3 614 46101 XlbSIE* QIOIB US* 24 AlbB 4EHS HAI8KX 614 OPIBEHXI BE* 6H0( BO. • qioib @E2i yg a01 a* eias me shxi aaii snoi ao. qioib he °i 24 xiasxi §sna ygona a a on obs H9i yxi swe be* shoi bo . • Aiaaoi o?;i 4eh §a oigm qioib 6J4oi xiaaa Aiextonxn 614 xiss AISXIAI QIOIB 248 58 -9 SJg OM# HAI8H 50m BO. (Oil: 0144 8® HAI Oil g (MM/DD/YYYY):_/_/_ 5 404 WWHXIOIIfc (YYYY MM/DD):_0/_£I HAI8H 2 4 011 OB BE* SO.) • CHIAlXI 44 04 010 *81 445 @2S OB WB4B QIOIB 24 2231 *0101 BO. • ax# soixixi 2b qioib a=a eaoi aisxioii aen omch a in Qioiaxi HSaol soil Dig stoi HAISIte SSOI a0101 BQ. a oil qioieib gj^sr in ssye om as® yeas asmxite a aci. aishs senaa 0101 a°i s#on oa ssss esas xis^as as^ kboili a® yea shoi bek as gjgs aio! a a sate shs soili a 01 rase haieoi bek sissoi assn s eonia ssss aesnoi m in gss see mg o'aaAjas »sas esaoioi bek #, cnsxis gjgsnoi w in sexts ssoi as xissas oiexis eaaoioi bek seom aoi si m oixie a my in era eoixiohai giu xisas cibeoixioii xi^ate as Aisxiraiai aaoi bck S3: a. Qi01 Eia sms Aiaaaate xisxmiai a$* y?aoi eci. b. m01 a axis a01 a a son xisae S(form)s ss(format)oii stfSHot bdk o. as@ 0101a see in xissas aioiaai aea tesise ason am essite oise raemoi so. d. 0101 E|a BiSte AISXKM SAB BEIS 588101 BEK CSMLab.@KIT 2 DISPLAY FORMAT (CliSai 01 84} 2.2.1 Text Frames (Bt^S H0IS) ngiss AtgXPt a,'^E= gjagife g«o S 3 33S 4= ao. 0I3WS @a ase say S(form)oi2 as stae t^g. ama. bi3e Saias gy^sm ^ARsom as ass Atss 4= sia. a. ii§ saias yet mow 33ie sit 4= as as(handie)oi ymot ea. b. eiss eaissi 33i« saw kh asms A«me saisoii ami s msoi gotot c. ee-gii as eiem saiojon 501013 as ra seas ass sgf°s uauot d. saisoi ssaas iw ay as i» she sswot ea. e. salsa as aisaiB eaH3(drag )swAi yssa aaias 01 s# 4= aowot ea. f. yssaxi as saiaa lwse ss(ciick)sw3 Eaw3(drag )8 HAi saiaa oisw 4= amot ea. (HSSil) 59 flss 5101 a* uwgoie is a a ass stoiea. s. 84 (format) • semoj S5 aeeaioi aes aesoi amot ea. • oiBsoia is (tab) s see miouie timi eaaste oiss a 5 swot ea. • VDU 01010 E (form) SI 89fe SKHI AtgElS y±W S AH SI g"U SAISHOt BE. • a#. esE, steal aaie gf= ass Atsxt aisoii ita ess ateswot ea. • isasg ojasf mi Bowas sae yasss SESteoi gotot ea. c. aseaioi s • y# HAiau-i e gt(coiumn)ai unis ais soexie yes gge aoiowot • Atsxtoi miA@ eoiu, lhsoi 41 s as gw mot a m see 4ssi isamot eetoti CSMLab.@KIT soiot etch • ajss qssaioia saoi sieaoi mb rat gtsm* be aa mg shcis as a ms cieilhoi a a. d. s his / mioi xi his • esss qssanois isaa siois aiss sissieig eoie fjissugs a act, • xis e tiis/mioixi his xisa aisxi §g s uis / aioixi his °i ass xn San ot aci. e. mi 01 xi bs • ItllOIXI BSE XIS22S 1SB AIBSHOt a Cl. ■ cis mioixie yoiy in xisas mioixi bsb sxishoi aci. f. as • saa siss- cis aisssi sbsixi asHAi siss= smi/gimi maci 22 ag SES CIS S5»9! EBB AISSHAH SS5H01 a Cl, • a§2 haici s£§ fi:n iss aisw in aeoi asa xisam soisaAis a a ci. (ins axis aiseb in sms aisshoi sib sasnoi act.) O: a. Bf as ass Cl seal 01 on Ai Aiggoiot act. b. lhsoi sasiaci oia mgs xtE stasis a sons sci ats mssxt aois# ts°i se tewoi act. c. masoici aas2 sis s s« xisa s Moiot act. (2,‘oia ssxi) S3: a oi a boi ci ? ss aissixm eoi 2 on a sxisb a on be sehoici . bois esxisi sb, §2i §bseh 2 soie amaci. ssxis a sxie aoixn saa am oi ci. AII¥AlSh a. Aisxtxi @21 oisna s ms Bot @2 ebb aisshoi act. b. aoist sexisi §2 gsis ea xiss itaot act. =. bois esxis sja§es Aissnot act. a. b Moist esxis sesia cis Bom sexist egoi a mot sia cis son 21 ssaxi atoiot act. boici sexai a§ axis # me §2* eqsnoi act. =. EEXICl BOI HAIM SESa SB SHAH 2 012 SSOIU 26H2 CM XI Cl M2B EES HOIS SBSHOl act. f. an %(#) oishsi eat aae gam aoie sstxi atos s,°tstxi atom* ea. g . °4(at st aexts lieuho * ea. h. a “ton Atgat a text a as gas atom ya. • texte He,pH,Hg a stot aesies Atsat maa ewon Atgea. - sbi xfs esaoiiAi west igin ta, g§a a sxm xne ib saia oieoiu sss ateaioi/xnaa mas a ex** Atgsnot ea. spds 2* yoi xt^ easts got* mae east Atgg awe goto* ea. j. AtgXtXt Xlgsnot SIS SXtt 3-5013 SXtS SD (chunking) ot 9 Xtge SeOlU - (stoig)a /(gEHAi)its exta Ats# si teen ot ea. k. saaie ext on ia aiss ext oom mt esaxi esss eibhoi ea. l. EXt£t *Xt* SBtSta efOt» 93 6 IH EXI9 SXt* 41S 3 Ha EXtt BXtXJISI sxts axtxiai wot eo.cnswsa nwsxt oishxi ea) a. aota Atges series sxiaisaib e so. b. saie ss« ae saa Botaoi xusaoiot ea. c. mat y eota ea sAte 9 txte ssstE# ea. d. acts is 01 e aota in Atgsnot ste, etota a Die uaute gotxt eysi e ssoti Atgsta Atgxtxt exn oisnit s aotot ea. c. se xtimss sen gaxt yen ss ma gens weses sta sixta sse sn ee st s at ease estea. (CHSXt) aexts got as a xte sxtotiAt, e as @ axte me a. AH¥At&: xtiE, 5Iee, ea, gae snot stt as as, sea $ axt st xneoiu a#on st $ exit aexts wot ea. S2: sea Aiee in aexte Atgste sot Ets* a ea mtsxii ms s sto. we^Hs aextt a a sea esste ass Atgstxi stta. e eat aexts # m ti m oi sum n aa. a at At eei aoixt at earn aexts sxtea. at ats, on At xi, oti tf esxt, me asa soiiai ctttexte egstot At sea. CSMLab.@KIT 2.2.5 Test in Windows (9£? &2| SJig) AH¥A(Sh a. gE¥01l 2ifc 3H»llCHI SSB HAISHOt 9 IB, £0( SfeXfeat oiyuioi akssb of ea b. S2¥0(l HAI@ 501*01 a EfH!, ABSSSAB5 BS HSSf ¥ git Bj SS512S 26oi swot ea. c. sjSfa 8(01521 A(gS 3(s5 HISHOB =5. S3: a. ag xiAiAims see ggoicxot ea. b. rasAia xia5(6 aea ton ss * %ow ea. CSMLab.@KIT 2 DISPLAY FORMAT (Ui«5ll 01 13) 2.3 Forms (S±l) 2.3.1 Fields (BE) 321: sss qioiehs axis! aas 9i & asaaioi ggoio. AIISAtS: a. SB • bhj °i aaiai uisw a, si mm qioieh see sbs shoi bo . ai3 32121 tuns m m, 21ms 2*^ see m3 chioieh i£t sssss ea • BE Bill HISS SHS OU3 9IS S90II SIXISHOh BQ, b. SBI • BIEBI QIOI EH BB a«S SiS B SXt 3213 g2£I SEIOOIOt BO. • SEE SEH2H 3 2(121 SSaHOt BO. ES 0101 EH BEE DS BE£( EBBS EtSOI 5(HOt BO. • os HAigs eisa chioieh «E2( gstmxn 3*3211 snot bo . • 2J Ql01 EH @E2( 01 KE3 ES^OII BSB OB At01 011S SIEB All B3(three spaces) 3213 SBS SOIOt BO. QIOI EH HE3I 3BBS 3i 02! BB(five spaces)3 321 # SCH Ot BO. c. = SB9 • BE21 =SEH9l£t Ml HAigoiOt W IH 3 391 S B1HJOIO BE Oil BStgoiOt BO. • Oxl(inch)2t SBIDIEH(mm)xHS =SB92( OS in AtSX|2( B9* BSAI2IXI SE= SHOt BO. d. BE3 SOI • S3 i!OI2t QSB gSEIE SE3 32I2H SoHXH 30101 BO. BE3 SSi a:,# HAI8KH AtSXKH H3S SS 3S0IIE 321011 CHB BE* aAian soiot so.(oii: ______) • sg a*°j soot og# in emi # ss see xne shoi as# anot bo . S3: a. 3ISES AtSStOt 3§n» 2 SB B 9EE HE2I XHISgCHOt BO. b. CHI010 «E21 SMi S as 530 CH SS 9EE2I 3S MS 3XHI3 S|ES* S 4= 3E# S3* ti!2H aOtOt BO. c. extot B as soots as shee see bssjee oso as b s a (Hot BO. CSMLab.@KIT i hi ij I ill “ I i 1 ! III!s:iss p “ ■ i I 1 I I IplElEpIp 3 3 h liillllli Xra©-quqWSD * SB IS I loss 5SI0 Inis ItOlY# BIYIIO(«np»^ p3seq-re 1ndrao3)| Yttg SBB 'S ns loiors 4 mss man sisbissiy ■as ski s s snrs 4 mss mma an 4 ‘assix as essn « ns io lore 4 mss man ssm 5 ■BBS 1104 g BSIC SIY IC33SIX IX16 'J ■ns I0H8SIK eCvilsAor-n^om, 'ssn™ I =0|A3P a am 3% 4 mm §51 4g STS HU 10SI0 Sl¥3 15 SB it 3 ■ns to tonew 10 am# to an ss is^ IS5 ■ BIO IB HOB g MI8SIY ■ 35l£ 54 P ■ns 1010% 4S lose ssm 5BI0 B# IK£S >m B55H ms 10iok 4 msio man sbb sn n# m(^ Sosa# a nog ichb bto -ns loHes k hy 10 IXICS SF siy eio man aiioioiY 5i bioib n ice g bio lie in in iioss six iscs ‘hobs bsk gs esk gs a bs S5S 'IBS IOIOBSIK ICES BIOIKlnlB 3ll05g 3IBES 4IX log ItES^lIPW dP>l)Sn S§5 C(uon«om™mM)e?IYI5 ‘SIXES SIB ‘Eg ‘154 nl0(§*il)54 3 ■ns ioio% 4 mn ns iicesiy sues sn 45 5oS4 in 5KB ms niosM^ 5jnpaoojd)KB lam s s 10 IK in in ■« ■ I0IY g S 33 516 h S 5# S I0SI0 5I0IY Eg 5B S B ssioiKinin 'PIS4S3 Sfe 31g») 3°|: 3isaoia aibbioi 3iess 3ia ss a# gaiao. 3i=ae xi^ Aiggt Aisxig Oja gijys gol3| ?I5H P|BI SSHIeS fflS gDIBO. AIIVAfg: a. esa 3ieats bob sags =mw 4= aotot bo . b. xi^ Aisgg -s gey 3 soil 31 sags SAigcnot bo . c. 3isaoi as ssg ss qseaioi a in xissgs xisaoi oqooi bo , a. eg #3 he ssaoi 3i° 1 on a ae as xixis as, 01a ssaoi os sag 3isass LIEILIOI BO, e. 3isaoi esaas ra xisas os sag son gss boiais ogm shs @5011 SiB 3isa0l HAiaOOl BO. f. 3isas AHS XI3SIS SS, 3X11 tt s aoiot BO. g. sis ssa SB is SB SS awoi aisoo , U(nuii)a2s xioa^ aoi xis ssaas an, 31s ssas haiochoi bo . h “SB gg* S&ISIB 6 011 AH B sasixi ssa 3IB H3(default parameter)# BAHHOI BO. i. ssa ss 0019 ssoi hisei sen oi#om on, ses sah « ssoi as BSt -a soiot 513 s'Aia 3i“as $189 si asm saioii aioxhoi bo . j. gioiae assi3i son sxm ssa 3iaas haisioh aisxixi a sag xiai sehb ss #s# s as# bh on bo . k. a son cab xis oieaoi xish ra 3 3iea@ ooiag bbs as 4 aoot 81X10, 08 3 a OS SAB 0019 EtiB S8AI3IXIS 80101 BO. CSMLab.@KIT FORMAT (UiSSIOI #4) 2.4 Lists (=1) 92|: i§Hsagg a eh on oa c-iioiei stsss am aiiss hoi^s ameaioi smoia. a. iSAiaS • s#2 ass 9 01, naag e*i ag xisoili esaai aoi oienw s as gxis aaaoioi bei. • ssoi oiei 9(coiumn)=s oisgaioi a m unaas sss 4-asEi 4=bes ■ & 9(column)OI SS2S AISH IB SS9 S BSS AH5S S (row) OHM AIS8H0I • oia ssoi a mioi%i* aouie a mioixia oixis is oioixib mi01x 121 sm soil haishoi bei. • eaoB sogg s^°s oiswa ssoi & mioixie am* m, oa a a @ aase bbses gse saishoi an. • hsxi ¥«@ ¥#2 ssoi a mioixie smisig as 012 * ass gssas Ha* baishoi sia * aasaiomio abss gas aissha-ib a act. • Alls (hierarchic) ##011 Al 8=35 SSS Li SSIXI *01 S8HAI 918 HfiS E# U El LB 01 a El. b. as Eiaeaioi • ssa a# gat oieihioi sxie aisshoi sib,is aissboi bei. • s#2 ass SAixi aisxi ssxi baishoi bei. • ^#2 asm a a 2 2i» sssies eisoh bsshoi bei. • ssa sag aaa aaas ai@xi°i ^ae boioi bei. • sss a a#oi a some) oia xisa ra, wa xixi saas *#2 gas SSI5I2I BAISHOI BEI. • a sss a a e 6121 a* at a a 21x 1a web g(coiumn)HS lisch ass s B(colunm)2 BOH ¥S(vertically)2S till Xl BEI. • a mi01 xi oias a sss gas as ssss seises m # as# 91899 ?5i AIS8H0I BEI. • sa, sa, osam, xis(criteria), Aima §a yoi 3:1x 1 01* abs aaa mss as aoisol 01 m m sses Eiaggoi snot bei. SS2 BSE as X Kb 81 XIB, SS0I1 if SS 9 9 81X11 HHxIolOt Oils SIS AlStf 4= CSMLab.@KlT B-35 iIH®,qe rmsD 'Oil iotors * ssio mioio h tcnseo boss • ■as totosirti 5ixe OEB 0130 5HYK)BeE5 §1C 3(raun,03)g ntoWiS HI S IEy BH S Oil iOOBIYS 5EE 0(»<3>iS OSIIY 3(umn10o)g 5EIB3 03 IDO 'Oil 10 03 IDO 01850113 5EB 0(™nl<”)B O^o-OiS 3 ■Oil io warns eoo o bio id sib oh 'Oil iOWBBt io(l|33"jep)W BIO ID OH SEB 'Oil iOWilYH 3tt3HD 35 5EO 'Oil iOHSlYH IDIX10IM 3 SSIK OB ‘HI fiBn BIYIOE is BBIOID OS 'Oil IOIOO ID IX I* BSB hYIDH 33IK 'OilBH 51Y5ID 35 sfelK 'Oil HOB 05into 5 0 150 H 5810 'OS iOHSBS 5HYIDI0IY H te Ohio 3 0IDO H is 3 8 0 'Oil iOHSBS 5H3I0 BY 11013 5 03 003 0135 ID31Y 0(™m|°=)B ‘OBC Oil iOHBOe 55fei5 OIDfeB 5 05 C 003 iC33 ID BIO ID lo(-*°->)B • 'Oil iOtoSBHA 55Is03 3(ram,oo) B o(*™)8 . ■Q3SIY BiR «Ey ID = 3 ‘O 55 H50 ‘fe OH 5Hi 6 0508 I0IGB5D OS T ‘Oil 10H8S3 H03 SOS SSk IDIOiY @C("#8 ‘IDIOiY (rann,o=) B -o 'Oil 10HSPIS SBC 3550 SS55 50gO)55 ‘SIS feB5 3BI0ID 08 ‘SHS feO 5 BIO ID 1Y5S 3 'Oil iOI03 lOSilfg OIDIOiY E BfiiS 1330 H 50E OB# OIY58 « ■OilSiY OHSS 0305 5308 BOO B5S 55 '010IIY HD B83 11 08 #08 SSI C BSO 08 ‘ZTiSSH ■ BIO ID 5S 'Oil 3ICI8S5 35#S 53 SID #WS OSS SB 08 » 03 isIX3 IDO 08 lOIBSOO 50* 55ID IEy ‘i!5 03 • ^91 (tabkey)nr SXH fflSJ £5* iS 9) At# 0ISAI9I01 StO. • -HfiSSl @ 91# SAIOI! ¥S@ SXU @21 SB SIS 91X1* OISAISOl £)Cl. a. fib e oi&tg cuei2 tufisibai bsi sssici. b. XIS tilSiUOl Sib * (column)* S 2515101 SI XI SH 01= el Cl. c. soil bxl QI0IE1* m, A|Ef8l91Ll flDElSb 20191 gib 0(zero)8 2 S) 51XI asB snot yci.(oil :00024 sb 24.000011x12 0) CSMLab.@KIT 2 DISPLAY FORMAT (PiBaiOl W&!) 2.6 Display Controls (HI 01 E| E#DI 0|) 2.6.1 Display of Control Options (XII 01 SS5J U^SEIIOI) 99: xiixeis aioiau ohxii es ph mi hi ash doib, dde mea as 3Bxn* oissix ag 4, oit 3bh«ioid. AII9AISI: a. 31 = 2l(defaull value)0| $3= HE* Algtt 1(1 3IE2iS E1EAI = AIEIX0t SD. b. All GDI* SSfSf m 3 III CH3|2| AIS 9SE 1109 (X 01 SID. c. sxbohai sqa up3i 3(wb ssd ussiaxot so. d. sieya xiix3ia ana xiix gas gsisra yssixi saieixoi eQ. e. BID2| 20011 D=tSI XIIX31# HHxlW IDS SSAI310I SID. 2.6.2 Icons (01015) 1.3 Icons and SvmbolstOI01 SD 3| #)# StEEBIAlE 2.6.3 Palettes (HI Eli S) 99: maims eisjoi sie yga at°s a eyes as Aiygeoii saieo. aas oioi 5, IBS, SXI SEE XIIX* DEI LBS 38X0. EiaiSS 3B 3D 31 011 UO 01 S3 XID h§ exi aaon ?3tax ao. R.GB31E18 r * Ffe View Help n ##...: FT 151 #A _ ra £■ ■■ v :'j AIIEAISI: a. oss ni aims ss asasia ses 99 gooiu ses yea xu= a Aim (title bar) 9 XDCHI 9X1 oB 01 SO. CSMLab.fgKIT b. s?* see maisoiiAi ama E?b 9 eshai sAiaooi mo. c. meoiu ms sea saieoni sxh ama mas amoi eeiooi sms sxh am oi gsa nixit gas Emsiot eaibhoi ao. a. maim on ws mas eehs w m a mss msaxiu aae eaibhoi mo. e. sxh mens amon am Aims hiesoi wool mo. 2.6.4 Push Buttons (EAI fflS) ¥AI OSS 6IEBIIO XII (H Sxl S CHI Ad EES SS2I 015*3101 SiaOHAH tiSKS ID me am* saas xiich mass s xms a°ie 4- wo. 1 i / ;; j , ;0- r - ■'' [ AII¥A|S: a. mom g on ah ¥ai oes mama aau xiasxioii mas sais uhxihooi mo. b. ¥ai tnsoi essi Sam as aisiixi a 4= wes mam eiesoi wooi mo. c. ¥ai mem amoi eaaxi son aisxioh #01 sae xhsbhoi tc ra, asimuxi oaw as waes eai as «g (caption)S xiisbhoi so. d. aEsmo =ai o=s was sxisi sass warns xixsot mo. e. X|B 0e(defaultbutton)S OS EA| tiiseas $1415101 EW9O0I SO. f. EWEI tHSS ESS SB EAI tHSS 953CHOI SCI, SWEI OSS *WS ID xiich xi s nasi a choi sis, 9 ai dies am men a ewes *012101 mo. g. ?Ai as an • ¥ai mss assn sam anoi wool mo. • ¥AI tHSS S4B XIS S tilS ESW E WS SXIXI a0101 SO. • ¥ai tHe ams aea ms aaia ss esses on ai wch os sms wsshoi mo. S3: sai os ass m ss hssm mas ss esssohah aasoi wool mo. 2.6.5 Radio Buttons (OCI2 OS) 321: ss tii eoi as a wess aoa mss ama- am bhxm aoi, s xixi yen on ah CSMLab.@KlT baixi gaet vmm 3 ms meoin. aae mss ae e°i wei ss s ei sum B^SHOI w in Aiggoioi BCI. Add new object: C Webpage! O External link & Upload files ! AII3A|Sh a. MBS SXI3 3BEIB El Cl 2 tH B ¥13 01 SB CIS SEI SXI2 tHSS BBSIM Eici2 mas ye-w g moioi eci. b. El Cl 2 tils ass 32 3 OH Oil M US mill 21 SB# SB# 3 a C|. c. bs sag Algol soi# a as, a sag stxig bsiaisibu, seiaii shah uittssi @ as lieiuoi eci. a Ei ci 2 til S3 Eias gas snot bci. e. El Cl 2 tHS 3S2I 9ISEIS CIS CI3S9I0I AH All 21 A123 23 SMBES SHOt BCI. f. SIBOICI @23011 El Cl 2 EHtiOl SI LIB °[8 CH, 5IB0ILI @23 AIIBS IH« EIBIS El#3 E»J 3 2JCI. g . a ei a 2 hi s °i sb on Eimoi mm sib eici2 msg am ams eici2 me3 Elms 5B8H0I BCI. h. 31 MB SB OH 0ISBIK8 OH 3 SB2 El SI 2S B S SI Al LI EISJ @91011 SB 6TOB HA] SIS S3 as a BIB OIS8IOI B28H0I BCI. i. gagoi bais mss am sous b behai bbib 2 so. j. El Cl 2 mss a AH# BBjSIB B BBLH2 CIS El Cl 2 mSSS tilWSSI 2 0101 2.6.6 Check Boxes (XII3 *43:) xna mas aisxiai sgsiEts sbw 2 a ah bbchb Aiasoici. mages aia mas iaixi 01 gg sae age 2 ms i« aisbci. CSMLab.@KIT turn ons: assertiveness i'~ body- prerongtsj ' power candlelight •" sarcasm dancing shinny dipping intelligence thunderstorms long hair A||¥W6h a. ma atii aei ft in, ¥ hi a ¥bhi soia Libit smoi bq. b. b a a ¥o* yasis asm°i os yen oil gg§ oixu -ib ft so. c. SB a,Bfe BftS SXI (pointing device) O BSE* OISBHAI tti ¥ a d«i BN HIM ft 6 a CHOI bo . d. hi a ¥B°i ¥ aeoo om'oi aim bo . e. HI a ¥B°1 SB • hi a so 2j ss ason iiei j\s xi6 aissie hi a ¥oe s^oio a^oii OBIS 6X1011 OB tillXIBO. • HI a ¥06 @5; §|g 8 H0t BO. • HI a ¥OS 6S2E tiH XI ft 3? SftOI HIBS 01 ¥ HI a ¥0 XIOIOII All ¥21 ft 5 ft (three spaces) 0| ft CHOI BO. HI a ¥0011 SAIH6 BBI2I SOS B SSSEaei LH¥£ft OILIBI BBS SSHSB3 ft Oil E glftSOI Si CHOI BO. 2.6.7 List Boxes (BIOS OB) 321: BOS ¥06 OOiasa ¥B01IAI 7I6B ¥## 2I0IBO. Belgium Bulgaria CSMLab.@KJT AH¥AfS: a. tasaii as asui ass atEi w=s ecu sail haisnoi &a b. as ass #sa axis SAiaoiot a a. c. seas ass BiSEi auis waenot ea. a. ass a,*si 3~83fxi see BAitt 4= as seet soioichoi a a. e. 9 xtxi oiaa iteoi at seat e#s 4=# tarn axt aaot ea. f. ass Baa ==21 umao. iteoi ye m #*9 otEueoii 4=@ sae apt aotoi a a. g. as bjs Chardonnay - - Drop-down combo box (Style 0) j—Simple combo box (Style 1) | Fuine Biaric™^sj Chardonnay 35 3- Drop-down list combo box (Style 2) • etststas saoi as 4isi =*oii aaa Aigxixt a as y#et 4= as# mot a a. • ss ssasioi ae sae aestxi at et e#a set saatss unsenot ea.ose 8tnt5ss, ass a tat) • yaaie Atsstot 3-ia-ib as wasi etsiass oisw 4= a cum eta. h. SS SCS Left! I0-7" L Bight: r~ Spacing fiefcte: |0pt After: Itlpt • aastat esoi se asm ass a^e ahexpi a as a aw s as# snot eta. • se asm a at @31 a, arrow)* eaetm ae exists oia eet si (down arrow)* CSMLab.@KlT B-42 S^oKti &±M%i 4= &CH0t mc\. UDOCTYPE HTMLPUBLfC'V/WSC/'DTD HTML 1 View fotf-? in browser • etas afioi] extsi* saM gxtee 4= aotot act. • aiis gson 5Aia ^i§i a^, sa, aai as ssw 4- as os os act. • ota a°i ajis staoti as xtsxt a sots eotxpioti u? acts cts eon ettaotot act. a. dig sBi a# sAitt ra xtgsnot act. b. ia Hfig xtiea oiaa cnoia nea aagAts ew ?sa aot atas c. ets a,Btr eeon fixia at a on At stm a st statu- sat 21 a on 21 ats a^s in Atga 4- act. d. sects ga atife sa xnaot as in eg ga aass cnastot xtgsttot act. e. sh uaa =eot aeon sots 4- as a set stsoi acts saebts xtgstot see ciseaioi act. f. Sf§@ fig gBCexlended-selection lists)S SBOtl SA19 E4§E stSS SB 01! stuoia astsnot w gsott xtgsnot act. g. Ctsast SB (multiple-selection lists) S S^^OIXI til! ESS tgS BE Oil StUOiaRI gig snot e- moti xts snot act. 2.6.8 Cursors (?t At) §2|: suns at e a on m xtsxta ^a ?ixi* Liams asset gmois got saa CSMLab.@KIT * I 2.6.8.1 General (SJ BAllf) AH¥AIS: a. g EIES0I1A1 31A1S ffl 3HS1 5IHSH01 SQ. • E3HAHt= toil SITU oHOl 61 CL • 31AHE HH331 ¥6890101 61 CL • auis aaoiLi ams s°i as as see oissioi Ai^es as aisei ESOIOlOl el CL • XH4SS(refreshrate)S 15~20Hz°l @91010101 6? CL • aiAib axie sisai genai gags ei a a. • aunai gas ¥a §a s^s hiohshais a gcK c. ai ah hi oi • aiAis Aisxiy AB2i saga a#3mi sus aui xiioi aisoi msgoioi a a. • AlgXISI ¥501 LI ¥S 011 [0 El 3IA 01 0 % El 3"E(scnsitivity of the cursor movement) ■ Basis aisoi msgoioi aci. • a01 eh s= soi xis asemioi a m aiais a 0101 a gca a sxi xiymi atisHoi so. • aixis 0101a SM me mi a mass li a a m aissixi ss 9 x1011 aaa 21 mi X1S2S L1BL101 61CL • 31 A3 9 31 S9I XI (HOME positional DIBI XIS3 0ISIS HI, 01 3IE9XIS ¥015 SEHSI es siBEAimi sag mi gggoioi eci. • aas AisxiLi asami °i®hah oisgai amis am 9 x1011 aximaaoi so. e, gxisa as ®$°i =ss @@ ssaisg gsmis a#ami am aixiai mags aoi saai ms a:i. - a Aim eaass xis 9 xi u 9 x13 asa woioi aoe, aim* geasxi sis 9 xi mi xisass 9 x1 Aiais aisoi 210101 a a. • aiAis mm mi s*iou, a#simi soixioi a a. • s sis 9 xi a assmioi ss see se a#stmi aim* oisais ¥ 210101 a a. • aissie a Aim sxi, e(iine), bioixi Et?m oisaih ¥ 210101 a a. CSMLab.@KlT 2.6.8 Cursors (?i/d) 2.6.S.2 Text Cursor (SEE 3H/d) AII¥A1S: a. & SEgong see gja 3UH3j a xhb =10101 so. b. see °js 3-1 asoi 3iwm me oaoot bo . c. SEE O/dfe tiS #EH(inserl mode)S EJ 1-29010 01 SI2 ES 9 EH (replace made) 81 hh sxi son aio @ saoioioi eta. d. ES SI XI 5HAH (placeholding cursor) E SIXI& CHB SX1E 31£Alfe B SO. (OH: *= SAIte 813IB OCHS BO.) e. BXIO 331X1 081 Si EH 3U1°I 33lt SIXIsi SX1 331 OH g>3ll BaOCHOl BO. 3£13 SEE Oja 3(A)ter BSB SEE gxiS°l 8010 BOI* # = 61311 6H01 BO. f. ssa - xisxia #°ie *31 sib see as si so assy sisas 3hz SE31 a0101 BO. SEE 31AIO 9S0lter HISS 2~5HzA10l 0101 BO.OSOIter 31AH31 @X1* 331 OS311 iHArlfc B SO. Oil: 99018 31AI8 axiiexi* 310X1 SB IS a eh oi oi oi si aoio.) g. 31 AH 31 231E* sag SEE 3H All Oil 218 EH 31AH8 g"4a§ SS401 BO. 3HJ1I31 E3iE* 31XI3H aa gas a shaie 990101 so. h. @E#31 231BB a 01 31A131 At 03 #011 OAI BEg31 E31E* 820 31 AH ter ae sixion oAi oeiooi bo . i. BES31 XI g as 231EB 31X13 2(8 EH, SEE 3HA1B BSOI BBS SI XI 011 210101 BO. j. SEE aS01 B318B SSEE 31AHB OISAlii 4= 210101 BO. k. §8 HE3SOIO ga ite oaeaioio g sibsaib see as si ah a sixit asaoi am gsxisi siais sixie m 4- 210101 bo . 3 oi# see as siaibi sixit Aisxia xiimoil moot bo . 2.6.8 Cursors (313d) 26.8.3 Position or pointing Cursors (E2!S 3l AI SB SI XI A tel :A A11 saa £Aig OEeaioigoiiAi sine xig# ra aisbo. oi siMt os shxhsih oeoi saai me 210. sag 3Ait aagoE ssbb sisB(t)oio. as bsw ra, on g 2i xii oi w se ssw eh, bee axis si e ra, xhxhib assist ebhes EH, 31 Al* 0IS513X1 81 ter SIXI011 BStt EH SO SgOll A1SSO. CSMLab.@KIT MI¥AIW: a. agf • ¥2gs as uses ay 5!a aygg hsoichoi s-ck cwi:it) • ayg sung ass 2@#si oieg oiene §s saoicnot ea, • sag 3\mj\ ss asaeisi @a msoil as in 01 9221 ass xnasi sot exch. («!: yens si oil ah & a# as 920112 mas ea eass soioiy 92=1 asoi i-aaa eggoioi so.) • suns ass hoi ggoi sen aeonM son sin aoioi so. oissioi sa g*ia an s$(hotspot)0i am sun sgon me sai eoiot bd . a a as as onxna esgouns y so b. as - sag si ns as aea a sons ass aaaoi yojoi so. c. sss - ssi ass &Hfoia y @o. d. ois ■ SSI 912=1 0I5S 91 AH XIIOJ gxlS 01 SOI 9*8101 SSSaS ¥Eg9 ll LEH-IOI SO. • ayg 9 uhs AisnesEi sgoi as axis oissnas y so. • ayg 9 HAHS ayg axis oison me si assnoi so. (ioo m/sec oi si) c. oiAia • eyg 912 91 saois axn as on on 2 92 oioixis §s siishoi aa. sen 91221 aixis aissoi eg aioib sgois #y gmsion hanoioi act. oise 3901s as aaasnoi so. • ss aaaeoii2 ayg 22s &g haieioioi sia aisxis as on yenoi gxi as a heeixioii eaisui soie a a. • ayes exists Aigsia aieixioi sia sxi ai§ seoiu ayg 9x1* ssioia ayEHoi eiai ueilioi eo, f. a as - ayes @901 ass sis g#a 9 x 1* baispi 9$n sgsy $ ass xixioi aci g. 0921 ELI EH, XI0191, 92* AISSIOI SEI EHS9B W IH tlOS 923 9XIS Aisxionon ssision HAigoioi sd .(2o ayg on 2 s on 91 a aucion 99 hai SOS #9 SI a 9 H2S AISXI0H9 II HANOI 01 60. 20 & 9 H29 I S a LI EH A|0|* ssnsie 999 ss* 2012s eg oisshoi aci.) 2.6.8 Cursors (92) 2 6.8.4 Cursor as a Status Indicator (9EH HAI 92) AH¥AIS: a. 9EH HAI 92S OB 12 9221 9190101 a&|. CSMLab.@KIT b. §s HsaaoiiAi aassion 2-3$ oie sags 3 asas eisn os ag* xSE 4- as in Hsasonxie sin egg asaae eauis yen eai bahs a as sasHon so. 2.6.8 Cursors (3) Al) 2.6.8.S Multiple Cursors (04=9 ?|AI) a. b peaaioi a eon mei xng ?ung aiss a a ohm e gee gsofiet AigsHoi b. cnei xny 3\nm Aigsfe a? eey suns aggcuot eg. c. aag aua si ch ai. anxie Aiseiw sei eieus b ra as a mb axis Aigxionxn s»mai eaieioioi eg. d. gag sung gs sxi on gen moias as a sma a won essiss essnoi (oil: soiaes a°5 s in sn api sis oisaiss gcoyga gs soieaoiu see @a @Hi* gas w in gs axis ss oisshoi eg.) e. wei a Ai a a a a on gen moiae as a in moms sms s*tsixn saishoi f. 3\h xii w sxpi wei on ye in =s shisi sag gxng sea ess seinon eg. wag gs sss a a gs sags xisgoiot eg. gxi* oiei on Aigsia Aigxionsi sss b s 531 in son ei e-hhois axn on ah Aigsga agsigi seibhoi eg. om sasonxi qioibb saw in gsa bai * Aisais soi sgsig. is aaig egonxi as asms qioieis gat? in sun* gsgi sis oiiEi yg. 2.6.8 Cursors (3) A1) 2.6.86 Multiple Display Devices (g4=g QiBEIIOI S A ) All “A1S': a. tie 33ig cissaioi aeoi ahs easioi ye in axis gs geegioi axis ¥gB3n eaag* oissnoi eg. b. gsaaioi sum eEiass worn yg 55 gs ssoig gs axie in gxig 91 x1 sas ggss xise Aissnon eg. CSMLab.@KIT lIM©to*'IIMS3 ■■are 3* *3 gis* issio 33 oho on hxe iss^g ss 01010*310 sn SBS 1010*310 Sto A3 3B toHegto WmiC BUS 3iB5 WHS 10 3teg BB isiy ye sb iioice ba obis nose bio More s sere icisbio icixeiY ■ ix * Bwye Are hoioixsic bis hi §n oimo oios 3bis 1010*310 p 05 lorn six 31X83 AIX* SIX 35B3 teB BIX OEC 'Ot5 3 fBS SBIY A1533 IBAS wwye (018 IfcB 3 SteB ■ IX*BIK) 333 51101010*310 SB 5B6 10 'OS (OlOiS 3 fiSIO 31010*310 S3 3H03B3 te.B SBIX 1018 (8S A33 '= '05 to lore 3 a lie io 3383 SSIO 31010*310 333 Hi S8I0 333 *105 1010*310 BIOS to 'OB 3103 IXa33 SSIO 333 HI *3 10,BBS 333 to 3 3(81X1* KtoiS IC1XS 1010*310 2 DISPLAY FORMAT(Clifia| 01 §Aj) 2.7 Menu (DIItt) 32: mite sss ase eaa swoict. out sea aisoiu ss citeaioi sum uehj 4= act. sma on wont oia sa aei ag 4= asset a get m on Ait sma sae assta s asts sma onwet at 4= act, eotu ss at cts ext* itse as iso 9241-1421 aeon ua mi wet a 4= act. 2.7.1 Menu Structure (Oil W 252 32: out 4$fc me 35 ct nes ?s§ ee out ast Atoia etmioict. All “At It: a. sea 4=e met#01 miaa aoist aoit xmasnot act. b. oil Arc S3 5JS 35 set irj3 US 35* AtSSHOt act. c. mite #s ssoii state at seoi BAiaa* g mi snot act. <1. out tteon Etagoi citeaioi as sat xtse §t mi01 son eaibh ot act. e. IS OHS-(primary menu)Lt 01S 6t@25 5Sf @5121 Stt 2 SOI CHISf SIS 352 semi At sisaotot act. SJb mitt ct4=2 ms semiM ye-snot stt aeon Atssitot act. xte oisstt saoiLt sae aeon tests saxt Ateon set. saa At ext as on mtat on a as a ot ct oise 4= aotot act. (§.ct@;s-s) 2.7.2 Menu Presentation (Otl t SAI) All 9 At#: a. mit35t AI2S2S CI5S9I0I aotot act. b. xtee as SEH(mode)U ext at ah 5.1 on ah mitt steam staa aximi citeaioi a mot act. c. out see misssma xte sssnot stt aeon mitt sea #s axion mi citeaioi aotot sta cte aioiaa aeaotot act. CSMLab.@KIT B-50 @W »@ (i5 S lo ICE a I K n Mr 550 jf Kr m o _ * ^ s y si y nm | UIIU |5J Kh = OU sr g “r. »j Bin v W ^ - oJ so oJ 5 Jr « t W a ® so sr 21 B y = S * »J H] m § 0)1 2.7.4 Menu Option (Oil tt SS) S3: 0114? see oii^FrOii ah sxm xis ss assas fiAiamsit as xise sss s 2.7.4 Menu Option (OIItt SS) 2.7.4.1 Option Organization (SS3 ?S, a. SSS DHS5 S8 HI Oil t SSS SCISS 3B25 5AISH0I !!Q. b. 4 0114?SI Sfl^g 4-97IXIS SS25 5SEI0I0I SCI. c. ssHsggj siesoiiah sta gxixi sq # m* xnasms mis sses as* dhxahs a so. d. OIItt aSSOIIA 719 XI? AlgES SSS Cl«5 SS25 SOI SCI. e. Dll tt Oil AH SSOI ti|I23 XI? SSES SSS 4S8H0I SCI. c sasiTiu xi? sses sses 7is6is si? axis ae# ? schoi set. g . aisxisoi mis ass gAisss snot e in, 4 axis ass sie= xies DHSSZ* tfXISHOt SCI. h. oils* AISSE2I as sse 7IS2S asm m,-sai(Delete)’u ‘LiSfExitysi as sB7i ssas asmt miss oia semi saisiioi sa. i. as cubes xiss xia sses sssixi hhaisih s act. j. as xnm ass ss as aeons saw in, oi sses aisiie xisoii si esixH li lies a miss ciaeaioi sci saga si a on ?xi5 axiaoioi sci. a. mises aisxixi g#sixi m 5 at oiise xigss axifloioi set. b. mittiis g?es axis as ssaaot sci. c. 3Digit s?xi out ss @eh 5 xnsa ? ana a one* aissbs css snot 2.7.4 Menu Option (Oil t SS) 2.7.4.2 Arrangement of Menu Options (OIItt SS3 Hh XI) iotoEivB rare33 b e snigw, 108 ® bib bibiye ses-so ,, nio„ uo„ 3 33 10 Hi *0#n*M)3G BIO Hi BBIX SteS B l¥B 388 BIB 881C SHY 'f 'Bis 10H181Y K1313fS kYHOBB S 318IYE SBB BSE tti *g S81Y *35 «B IBkiB BIB '! 'Bh 3 10HS81Y BBS i5 151? 1I0IB BBS BBS 318 HOB «55 IIS BBS 15log BSE tc HI »8B lOkiB E3II0 SSteE 12SE l£ 0 33 10H9IYB HOB S 3B3 Bfiio BSE 83 BBS '* 33 10H8IYE BBSS EBBS BSE BIBB 1EBS tc 0 SBIO WS1SIYE ■H31 y BBH3B Hi SfSHiP? »KHC BSBIii SUB S¥ ESS 33 10H01YE ■lOSS BSS BSfa BBS 15588110 P 'BPS lOHiBB HS8SB 1181 C 3Sg to 3 8 3S8 BBS '= '33 ioto b seio = 51538 BBS BB EgBIB E1881Y *to@ 33te B1X81Y §SB EBB 3 33 10 n§ lie Bern eiYB ess ebsbs ‘m s ioibssb sbib Boioieesn eto •« :8IY3I!Y 33 to 1553 % BE BE 318S3 53 Hz IK IS Sfett tcfc 88B BS k ‘SB B5B lii318BE »5g gii Sto (S53 ESS ESS 8IIO) s“»»‘ 33 10H6IYE HOB S5HY toilR SB SH3S #9 SB EBB f83 BBS S ‘HI SIYE SBBSBIBSB IBS 9= P 33 10H!»g feg ‘E18IYE 5(mnnioo)g ^ isHC 5 BBSS E3IB 1315 IK *108110 '= 'BIS lOtoTS 3= m B1X81Y 3WCJ5 1X18 SEES BBSS 8 Ha io 3 'BB 10 Hi re S SIYS1XS BBS HI Sffi BE- EBS BBSS IBBC 158 HO fllOBSS • 33 10Hireg BB H05E81Y BBS k B3 BE Ife ICE EBS BBSS HOSE E8IK) BI0SBS • 33 10 Hi re g 5HYS1XS ‘BBfS BBS EBg • 'Oil 10toBre § 539133 BBC BS Eg 8 HO • 33 10toBgE BBg EBS ES3II0 • sis yis Aims aiiVffe fiAiaooi so. SH-. raw ssioi agoia turn AisgAio game chsshai aissob , sxigs raw gag ssa ai Alias ass sos aasa ago asxi waara rasacxoi so. 2.7.5 Menu Type (1HIW ##) 2.7.5.1 System Menu (Ali ID CHI W) AII¥AISh a. #ws aissj as raw gass ms ai@ Aisraoi so. b. a Aisas ass amt ssoio em, dieisai s°i Atom raw* as snot so. c. Alia raw gas Aiam raw tii(bat) so aiits gas sen aish a ooiot so. a. sagas Alias Aims xisos# Alia raw ora saishot so. SAiaam ais, oims as xisee ra* a a an. e. s Alia ae(ievci)2i gas assisia oss eoioi sio so 2 Aiwa AISOSO SfiSOII DEI Eli SHSIOIOI so. 2.7.5 Menu Type (Dll W ##) 2.7.S.2 Hierarchical Menus (All S CHI W) osts aem ess sis rawa as* aixis saoiu rawea aiis raw bis so. sa( aea raws oe rawa oiboi e a am. maisraa gataBim soi as asssiaio saoie a geo. All ¥ AI&: a. aiis raws @aoi ioaixi 01 am in aissio ssis ?si aagoioi so. b. ass ■ aiis diiwhi oigaioi asm aa mas as 0 hi on ah msaoioi so. ■ aiis raw°i sam ais@s a ss asagonxt mi as on asaaoioot so. • xhch g“2i wsa Aiass aiis raw asg saw rawraa xnsaoioi so. c. as ■ aiis raw ass assis exng a* sssisiae sxishoi so. ■ sa as raw asaos ws ms raw ass aisshoi so. CSMLab.@KIT d. as • sis miss sis oil* axi* * 4- as ygoi xiisaotot so. • oils BdOl SE|5|0i 3191 B9£ 3BSI @ SS, 9 SSi @8 SIS ygoi 50101 SICK • 819 oils XII9 S SIS DllSS| gd StBSS AlgSBOt SCI. e. ciseaioi • SIS mis 9S0IIAI AISXI2J BXH SxIBAie XUSiHOI SCI. • sisg EsiB^e Aisw ra a sis miss ssmisai Aiaass bseioioi aci. • a 9smiM mis a^ie shoi sm semi ss saeoi ciseatoi s? 9 ae ra, a si21 a cis mi01 xi misacis misdeal sai « xnsmot aci. f. S5S • sa eel sis aoi mis a sis mis* his d@im =s yoiot act. ■ mis a a mi a ais gsa xiyg aximi msm a 50101 aci. • SIB mis Oil Al SSSIDMLI Xia dS"9S StiS OIS SSI 011 XI CIS XISW 9 5 CM 01 a ci. • Aiainei ss “sags csa bsi°i mis a§ie ggoi gass ouiiw a as miss xiiso H oi aci. g . uiHisioia • a xii as iias asa mism a si aoi* a aoioi mo. • cms saoiiAisxi sae xiioiggss xiag esimisu cis as miss aois 9 aoioi aci. • Aigxixi mis ssmid eoixia a sis xisoiu gas ygxia aeotxis# sis xiae HAisis sisoi xusaoioi aci. • a=E=ncH mi Hi si oid ssEss aisxixi =g mis* sa asss a as* xusaoioi aci. 2.7.5 Menu Type (OIIS SS) 2.7.S.3 Pull-Down Menus (SCIS OIIS) a as miss sboi ass 5 x1a, aisxixi a sis misni aioie amid d§i msa saa g@£is misoici. CSMLab.@KIT AIISAIS: a. aisxiji eisis aeiae oibsio ^bj&osah bos onsa sea tiSjtt 4- S1CH Of BD. b. eos misa saa soies xism aeisiB ^ai a^s sb mans, ueiooi so. c. a eiua eaooi chi ^chiah a si smm ra, os sea yn- sotajjixi esi fiAPife a a- gates ois oasm sun, oia a^s miVr ss as xisamoi BO. d. ggsas aa-a = jibs gai saamoi bo . e. [Jiao =s ss a eos asw asxi a mo bo . f. mis Hi boh ah eos misa gas samoi ms eases #os onsa saa bssdio #am a as jibs his sib q so . g . asso ssi HAiaa oi#ai oe misa oiss eos ojsa saa a aibs in oiee am saw a amoi bo . a. sib mi a axta axui aao sa earn! shsixi sob eg miss hob eos mis* Aisenot bo . b. eos misa sas osa as cm jixi «ehoio ; @§m, oaeaioi as asso §g oib , oe misa oibs uhbis saa am, uhei ^oixi as saa a6oi aa. c. ss uheisb sam ss emeoixi as saa sms see a son sat e amoi so. oe misa oisa on* ss, misa oow xiaon sxia a#s hi CSMLab.@KlT 610. Ot "OJ y Algol! 5 6 M =MB s;i s Hi 0I8H8PI S Is i ro m AfgXCT olii si 1 ! a s o i SS Jt * B SO Btl! 4=51 | 2 s i fW Sis 1 a i 3 AIISAIS: a. HOIS SBC1 as StiBOl ass 3 4= aotot SCI. b. magg seom Eaon as s^sm soi xissa onsoi xi lixijii a shows i3i oiss a saw oi as. c. ga haisi sggon sa* tne ?ixisnm so. d. S3* mshi es gas asms si a @®sie easiai « s aioiot so. =. chiSfon xiisoi as ih, xiiss axis gas son sxishoi sis as earn son SgEICHOI SO. f. as* mi son axis gas e eon a xwa say baihe* es- saeo. g. 33* ohspsi sas ciitiixiioias sesisies seenoi so. h. on# aisheli sens is as sxis sas sbsioioi gasixi as m sas exi sss ssoHoi a a. i. 50 oixi oi6fa saoi as as E3« onsoi a m, ssassas sa°i a axina eioisswxi gas ss saoise xnesnoi so 2.7.5 Menu Type (OHS SS) 2.7.S.6 Pop-Up Menus (B3 OIIS) @s Ouse xis oisei gas axisw a s aioixi xigxioi sa ass oission sal li a$a aas on y sis eei on a °i oissa xiioiew ss s, xissaon ows s§i* 4= a a. ss dues sas onsai ssixis onstiioiiAi aas miss eisaoiaxi sm. eg dues oisE seiEioi oi= asg“i a an a gg non a ass sas m aseaioi @a. ss dues aensi ggonxi gg assioi EI9HXI Biesi2l XIS5IE DUE Eg# 5gSO. 0601 38 EgS @@ DUE 011 XI 0I@ CSMLab.@KIT A!l¥AHh a. O eg D1IEOO XIIS# EAISH0I BO. b. as mitt uHsa a hi a on siau son on os aw uhsb esshoi bo . C. es BllWfe DI1E SA! SWSIb 8SS0I WSitt IH ESSEICHOt BO. d. EAIO BS5 SS DI1E2I BXHMSB AISXKHIXII gBIEOIOI BO. c. eg OIIEb BS|8lb 501 BO sew =r Ob MPH9SI 3 BSI 01!E)0I| 5§B EBB 0 PH Oil SAIOOHOt BO. f. eg DUE Oil AH AISXIO fflSIb SB2S SOB* SEOIE eSB tHBS figSIOI SB# Bern 4= OOI01 BO. g. eg oiiesi seoi mb 8£s see seoh see eg eestMe ss aioie si on s xi 8H oi bo . yea es ess xne esaoi sis on sxnxib dueo xhses xiiamoi bo . h. sms e eg 011 Eg esoi aeon eoioe mi, o ess esaoioi eo. i. eg dii e on xim Bis sib s-eoi hais ih on maxi at om sse eesioi as 4- 00101 BO. j. eg oiiEb ets boas tmeib aa aoi mesmoi seao ooiub g EH Oil Alb AlStt b go. CSMLab.@KIT 2.7.5 Menu Type (DJI tt ##) 2.7.S.7 Tear-Off Menus (01B 01140 321: ois tniw= mis bhcni ah as axis ois ass misoim. ois miss •« as (tacked)’ SEfe ‘*SOH^(pushin) ’ 1QE ESO. AII¥AHS: a. ois miss) fixis as* ssw 4= aoioi §m. b. ois mss sei a as mg sss ame 4 as# mxism bo . S3: am# a eh hi ois oust ae sag g#oim asm ms sag #sa mxi* shsh sms* asAisixi mm trn ahssho ) bci. 2.7.5 Menu Type (OHS $S) 2.7.5.5 Toggled Menus (£5 OHS) ss mss sags # mxi aa e sms asms aas a axis; am aisso . AHSAHih a. sb mis sse xi4 aisshs s mxi sags saeae Aisem am. b. SB ms sae ms as* asms saa a#ms# sxi* wsaot am. 2.7.5 Menu Type (Oils ##) 2.7.S.9 Graphic Menus (350# OHS) 33: am# mis(ss eaisjs isl#ss as Aims a on haibs ei* as ssoim. ass saa menus ohois , me, earn as soi a 4 sm. aaist as ms mi uni Aisaxie, a a sahbs ssaamws tim m 4 210. AH¥AHS: a. am# amis a# saoi a xixiis ggoi s#sie eisoi xisaaoi am. b. Aigxmi saise oisxisia am* sst 4 ms msoi moot am. CSMLab.@KlT B-60 c. sitioiu s^sie sxh be* lieilh # e+ahb > aisxioiixii xusso-ioi sci. 2.7.5 Menu Type (Oil# @#) 2.7.5.10 Permanent and User-Requested Menus (2§ 0II#2I AlgXI XI3 Oil#) All ¥ MS: a. 33 Oil# • 33 mi#si aiss aasmoi set. • 33 Oil## AISXI9 si TIB ¥ SOI 01 SCI. • 33 mi#* Algal ID, BS 38 011 AISEI# 83 HSSCfe o|L|8 TIBBS b. AlgXI XI3 mi# • AISXI XI3 Oil## oHS 38 AlSmi 3 S2S SB* XUS8H0I SCI. ■ SAI SBS SIS#01 SCI. • AISXITI S3Sf MB 3 Oil#* CIBBaiOl 8H0t SCI. • AISXI XI3 ffll#fe AISXI SI ®SB B ouy so,, 5AISO-IOI SCI. ■ mi# ss sesoi gy #mi mi## 6#a sens aoixiot so. oi33 B aisxi as mi# ami# aisxi oil mi mi# @38 bm* xussib sibohai AlgXIXI S BXII SSSIXI 83 9M« 38 S30IXI 83 SS8 titiSW 3 8801 SCI. 2.7.6 Menu Bars (Oil# bl) mi# til# AISXI BS8 CUB @91* SAI61# *3513 XI# 8801 Cl. BBSS S 39 011 3325 LI El L|# mi #5 3 SB mi## acts mi# SEH5 SAISCI. CSMLab.@KIT g in % ^ E 4 »i it m s-j a n I 2 ^ fl 4 : w JIJ s I w £ g Sr 0) Kh * «■ a JIJ H 51 oT 51 w oT E CSMLab.@KIT :Step S(S» W 3XIA1) axis asa 3ie}ei axi ami* 4=@si@ ssscho a mom. a. a»fe yasHot $12! aiea saiase was sass smswoi mo. b. a axis xiisxims, ossa, m»2i eesse #e owe see smoi c. a axit @aoio ssnai as a axio s^a ss @a, Aigxisa mem d. a axis ess axio osss ssochoi mo. e. axis ms o@m onnm smoio a os xiaiisi ssshoi mo. f. XI Alim mss 3 XIA-)(CBP, computer based procedures) 3Xlfe HIS2I WSSOICHOt SO.. arp oil axiom assoi, go, asa asms ms21 aaaxi ssbhoi mo. g. am SI aXIA)(CBP)XI SAIOS VDUCvisual display unit)£| SS 3X121 SSS S 2(^21, 1XIA|(PBP)2| amsi a XIA axio Lflso aes bxibhoi mo. a. SOS a XI Al (PBP, Paper based procedures)^ S 051 BXIAKCBP)* AlgSf S SIS ID b. e±«s axiAH(PBP)s Aise asm m a mss axima exHsxi, se/oiss sm ssgm bo s ass axion am ass xissim wse xusshoi mo. CSMLab.@KIT WINDOWS (8E?) 3.1 Window Components (SE¥ 3.1.1 Title Bar and Title (El 016 til21 %l@) Eioie ms sessi xis ye Oil Liemt xn@ haise nmoim gg seebei oiss SBeo. St? @2i earn Mgxi ei eh mi 01 ^(guiichi ai gg hsehbi oie, eseboiim Algols EA121 01# §g smsis ¥S2S, ?E ye Oil mexis lie ecu asm $1 e asm, s°i msm sees gs me ss exie suck xii @ haib °i Bus nsexi mesexie eew 4 aci. id http://™eb.C*oly.edulcp„ . Cal Poly ■- ■■ - "■' ■ ' AIIEA1S: a. Ill# • SEE HIES BE? E10IS U101IAI @81 011 LI El HOI SICK • Eg cisaaiois ye oil lieuhs jibes aisioie cisaaioisi =@e aesi eaishoi eo. • xii =s @y ay ohm as gei xiamixi a 4= sici. • AlgXIE SElEl eCHM XH2I81E XII = OHM SES SOIS CH5X1E SAI5H01 tie. • xn@e gems oi# - ggssng oibes Lima 4 am. • EioieoiLi cimoi oia sses ciaeaioi a ra mess e 45011 cue esi Ei# 4 sis Aiyy eMi xiisshoi eci. • as cisaaiois @xi°i 4 a @0121 °me xn#s m mi01x121 ye me a HM81ML1, Aigais aseaioie stem 5 sis cie SEaximi sis ssss Aiga 4 aci. b. E10I* til (SS Xll= SMS) ■ Eioie ms ses as a lheei ye xiaxiaai aisses @es°i xii# a @« sea 5 aci. • eysi a a ses eioie his @@ maxima xiichxiss sesHoi sie ss# CSMLab.@KIT xiaxiaone S2i axis siea, iiaa/essia se xiich mi am xiigoitof so. @Sg a CM a aaa SS/S OfSKRestore/Maximize), 333 BXI(Close) SSB seme aoie me as? *011 , 3BI3 sie? a ei sea mi a x-iioie as «mi axisHo) ea. 3.1.2 Border (81 ¥ El) AII¥A1S: a. @E?t sg gaaii seme aigEixi sichoi ea. b. as as? aiaaa mi as - s as asem aieeim xiisa aieme a«a sasoKMO) ea. 3.1.3 Working or Client Area (2(8 S S) §21: as ss se aisxi ass aisxixi saom gg ssese sag mxi ae aass asa am* se gee °ioiea. AH¥Alth eg ae?g ms aaoi aoioi ea. 3.1.4 Scroll-Bar (i3* til) 321: earn me aeeaioi axie same xhsi « aisxixi * g scan me xiichxisx ! exH see seat sxiionAi oms gximexie haish mxis ea. CSMLab.@KIT B-65 AII¥AtS: a. ±ae ttt2 sxiga sxt #s aattg a±3t aaeaioige 3311 saw OH xtsaotot eta. b. ±3» tita ±3B ¥±* OISoHAt 4=51, 4=@ ti 22 832 22 e±l HAI8H0I eta. c. y§iit 010112 4=b ±a* citt ±aee Atssnot Eta. d. 4=51 ±31 22 5012 2252 4$|ES ±31 3t52 ¥22 teOICHOt SO. e. 4@ ±31 Ut2 UH12 @252 ±31 3t2fit Util2 1/201 #01 EICHOt Eta. f. ±31 title *#St@ I! 2 ¥ Oil At Et ¥2 EH XI21 BAIStiOt StO. g . sxtxt ci±saioi §2S satstxi as not, ±ai tita bshshah xtsstxi atotot 6t2, ttsstgotau 2 a a. h. IE? 331 Lt exit EAIS §22 ?lxl 3t @W IU ±31 tit 2SH±2 BOI esgotot 2a. t. ±3i a±2 3312 a a a ah 2 a on oust exit q±saioi a 2x12 as titaiass B0t¥0i0t BQ. j. ±a* a±2 ntw a si soiiai exit a±eaioi a she am a gxie BAisttot eo. k. ±3§ a±3t ^¥22 a eta sense xiasas assaan haisuoi sot. l. as HAI 9B3E ±31 22 S8i UEILH2# ±31 31282 22 IEE SS sxt setts xti52otot eo. atss ±amoi extaw tm 3 asa sseai st#E2 ois «3ts8t3ta tiiwsagotot bo . 3.1.5 Message Bar (Oil At XI tit) aiAixi ttta (i) ¥±aatAH as see a aetata (2)os xtgxta Ai±gt2S¥Et sea aioiEte sxtsta tttoict. CSMLab.@KIT All¥AISh a. mi aim ms taas saea oieh ?s«i hhxhhoi eo. b. maim ms 6isi, gg *g a xi oil a a a eh gaa e§@ ga, gsa on-woii me ass HAISHOI BO. c. OH AIM HIS SSL! HO 2# S¥# 4= a CHOI BO. d. MAIM HIOII H Aloises U? 21 MAIMS OH AIM! 00182522 ¥2x 6011 SAI5H0I BO. e. oh aim ms eiH2i a a at on aim as citss ahsshoi bo. f. OH AIM Hlfe i-iSB 065112 2x0*# AIS8I0I OH AIM* HAI5I9 B SCI. g. SSL| BOB ESS ES 6 EH OH AIM 6 OH AIM ti|2| g# SBXiaM 3AI8 H0I BO. h. oh si a oieoio eiioim @s as bah siesoh aa sat on aim m°i SBXI21 011 BAI5H0I BO. 3.1.6 Status Bar (BEH EAlg) aa : bed 2Aiee ssBsaaa bahbehbi gae baisis hiaixi ma #ea sehoio. AII¥AIS: a eh baiss bbb mai xi U 3i Aia bxh axi as as* bbb ssHsoeia bah b eh oh as sae baishoi bo . 3.1.7 Control Bar (S Eg HI) SO: ase his mbs as ombes , moioli asm n eae bs sbw 4= as ooiaoiLi Bios tus @a sob aseo saisio . CSMLab.@KIT B-67 AII¥AiSh a. am* tite xim soie xisai xnme @sn Afggoiot eg. b. 23 am* ti!5 SS 2S3B! SE? LHCHI/d 23S 5011 5IXI8 H0I BD. 392 OIS aSB am* tii5 AISXPI BS)§ 9 X12 83 81 5 55 35S @25U goiB52 gaoii xiigsiiot eg. c. mi a @25011 Ai 23 @xi am* tug aw aas sag 011521 me sees a. Aisxia set 522 am* wig @xie 113w 5 50101 eg. e. @2521 see 01s am* g@ sae a eg. f. 01s ase am* g@ se goie dig am* mis gag 501 oi eg. 3.1.8 Push Buttons (^AltiiE) Ail¥AI6h a. 3S sgg 3@(top) 01 g siacbottom) 2s aeon 5Aigss @e sas 5woi eg. b. 5Ai@as @259 5s(row) 01 g 53(column)°i s&'oil sAiggoi eg. c. 5 Aiwa sas ss mmas a a on essoi goioi eg. d. sag, XI55 asoi 55 ¥A|dies g»m geoi gwas ei eg. c. BBS 5A| dies suhi gaeaioi eg. f. Aias 3s3soii 5Aiess aisw m raises its as aaeaioion BAigmoi eg. 3.1.9 Action Icons (911(9 OiOIS) 39: oioies aisxpi Aissg sassBt ra gags oioisoig. M¥Ai$t: a. @250)1 one OiOISOI 58 M, OiOISS @259 @S aSXia* 119 UHXIoNOI eg. b. e @25011 55 ga 010159 3H55 200H* sma -15 a eg. C. 3S 010155 @25 ¥2S 0I0I5S 86 5 58 5 5g. CSMLab.@KIT -Type (SEE 5#) Pis a£?a ahseei as?) XIS SE¥fe §g ES3B2I XIS am E52 SEED. All a ESI SE?fe X|g SEE B0IIA1 BAIEIE SEEXI LI, E CIS AIISEBI SE?tt All@561 8E¥fe MSS a. Primary Windows (XIS 3E?) • BE SS HSESE ESOil XIS SEEXI CIEgillOl a0101 5!Q. • X|S asgfe ElOie til, EIIE6I, SEE SIOl(window controls), Sg S g (working area), oiiaiii gge 5S8H0I eci. • as SESc ss esbsssj cis as seeb saaoioi go. • ss Esaiss b E3B0I uasaioi axi se urn ®?ai as seexi libiuoi • sa 4= is oil iJasiciB ss hsoss ues as see* saioii m a aoioi b. All a 5 61 SEE • AIISEBI SEES ElOie til, SS! gg3l SS SSEBIOII ^|g CIS SEE ESSEX! 5010| SCI. • ah a e 6i SEES xn a oil a si oi bailee *xias ess sis, oils ss BAisiscii Aisawo! aci. • All an 61 SEEXI LI CIS in, All a E 61 SEES 6tS SEES SSI BO! LI a on LIBIUOI SCI. S, SS SEES! ES0II 5XHX4 LIBIUOI SCI. - xie 8EE3 aisxixi samxiu as agon aii as a seexi a*u EAiae • aii as a sees *s xis seeu os AtiaEai sees sasoiot act. • aii ae6i sees amass ssaixixi saw exi aias6i see* *aa a ■ Alias61 SEE* BE 301 SS SEEOI! g&S OIXtME B SCI. • Aii a Eci sees ss seexi xiixis mi xnaaoioi eu. • in tii ai oi a sxiixi Basis as oiibsixi asn ahbeei sees ss xiieiaaoi • ssas aiaaci see sens oisw e mount a su. - EE81S All as 6| SEES Sxl OISW E 210101 fid. • as son Aisxia gsia- saoi sse 42 sxns se auseci see a eh as CSMLab.@KJT B-69 a i S W 5 < i Oh n 11" ol g a = ss ® ou i ll .s U H7 ll a Hl «*J MO .11.1 MO * 3 51 £ T~7 ur OIJ J|J m ou op so so g jij Mr a a g if I | n n OH OH W 3 SO g «' m n hi n w up a g MO n 3 Oh OH ofj ® w an si oFJ oFJ RO e lioJ 010 m m a aa rin ix IX °lr Data-Entry y ® i » a*S cl rir II m Windows rir i> H210 s IX m Q|0|Q (Q -in m i )S M II0(« I 1 E! ^) !E iE mtom ' * rir Oti m I I s 1 Text Windows SIES) AII¥A#»: a. sn §a§ ciaeaioi ate sees s@ aa* atoi es a ee e e sis a# essi soiot so-. b. a a sax# ex# see* si # ra, sa am* a e as# as? one Ea aa* am es aa uiae xisa sioup# sees a§#oiu eb^o# msaoio# ac#. c. eiaaa Qioia* s«?a aasa xie sois 4S(mw)2i ss§ ■ a sis erne a wo# a a. d. a a i#aE §E=g :iB LiHia 50-sox#* ctesaioi w 4= shho# ec#. S3: a. SEE SOIX# 46 Olo#£i 3E? EC# 46 axia @esx # a bs ESSE* UEILlia 4sec# a s?= 4sa §?s# esse a ohm a a xioix# sic#. b. ea*5#sA see sis ra,52~7sx#a c-taia x#a me ese* msec#. 3.2.6 Map Windows (8H SEE) AH¥A#th a. s H£“a cfoieoi aeo# ec#. b. a sees as, aei, ais, xi ea# as gs* sen# e aoio# ac#. c. sea eixi* c#e#l#be xiEge# s#a xiaixis # gee x -hchxi * x#xio# ec#. 3.2.7 Utility Windows (EE SEE) S3: EE sees ee eaiati# biseb xnsa#s ysge seech c#. AH¥A#lh EE SEES SAI S£E2| gBO#! CtegaiOl SHO# ac#. CSMLab.@KIT B-72 iH@q=qivsD 'OBSe esihv BIAIYd 5fi \l»n«3)^|6 ‘l»N)S|HO \»AJ«0 OIO (a,3H)m@5 ‘(ON)S|-H0 ‘(^A)l|0 EOC ‘IXIYIIO ©IBSI #65® IXIYIIO Bis '=> 'OB iOHilxS SBB BIBC55 8* 1X0HI SSf 11065® IXIYIHJ Bis BiXSiY S 'OS iOHSSIY H8I6 ICS EOiwS IIOB ICO SBte ICIXSiY #65® IXIYIIO Sis ■* NSiYsW (6513 IXIY110 Sis) 'OB S BWHfigiY IBBOOn BIXS lYfa OBC55 §i #65® IXIYIIO 56 P 'OB iOHSS5 SS0IY6 BS (dl=H)fflS5 ‘fSO)Si* ‘IXIYIIO ‘«B 110BO IXIYIIO #65® IXIYIIO 5S "= 'OB 1011905 #S# ‘EI9 40I0R lOlvB #5® IXIYIIO 56 5 ioHssiY hb i* icoas ibs ere ixioosb #19 65 as# boss ixiyiw ss e :SiY6IK (6513 IXIYIIO 58) 'OSS# SB0IY6 #13*6 SPY# 61? iE(dpH)ffi = 5 ‘(P™e3)^,* ■(Ps3'a)g$HX ‘(Al OR 5# SfS ER 5# #R 101?IS #6513 IXIYIIO ■oss ik ess one so iiob ® siehxs nsisio ere ixiofesm #5 sg 8S 3BB B OSS IC6 5BS 65® 05BUY #(#to IXIYIIO #5)65® IXIYIIO b. 0 3.3.5 e. d. a. d. c. a. CSMLab.@KIT f. c. AIIEAIW: OSiHCI ^elfOKV ailoi 8! aaioissioi oiiAixi AI0XI2I ess 32 33 33 ^ 32 om anxi SB * K | Al a OIIAIXI 8 gcHO! Working OIIAIXI oiiAixi MAIXI OIIAIXI eg AISOI MAI Warning Dialog X| sees sm ssei (Pause). SOI! ESS SEfCancel), XI SEES e^oi SOI. Boxes SE?b SEEOII SEES SEES sees SEES 21 Message hoi Message LI ra QA|AI3(R< 3E aseanoi El E E 2^ (CHS! mxi OS 2-1 SS XI SEES o Window AlgXI2l 32S«(I), naggioia £1 JUS Ease, oseaiois Window E8tt(Help) es 2"sg AH 3X1 Al nos 5S233 Eg SOI 8X121 go see ES (33 (931 diiaixis SSS SEEOIEI. 22* Bit 01 ys( OIIAIXI OIIAIXI, °l CIOISSO SS3S * so. 213 an OIIAIXI A>2i OIIAIXI SCa EAltHS 231# til siesi 21 IH 32 ie)* BOIL! as; aae 011(010. OIXI Oil SEE) ESS8I2I HE?) (Yes), XIS8ES hoieoioi on oiiaixi EH, pLE_SS(H m 3E) ME* SfflS SS qssaioi ysHsis in AIESS £8#(Help) OILlajNo), es sees AI2I S8H EB6IO. SygOOt AIEIXIOt so an* e y 8S l ES B AlgSIS ) gm EAltHS . go. ES OIU sxianoi E8B(Help) SS* OIIAIXI s±t so BO. 3 QI so. 0U°l KOKV £1(010, A||E* . 2IIESSS SEEM eo. owxi SEES OILI ESSnOI 33 CIS* 3S AtmAtSh a. as sxts BXH21 stag asmo sou see gee xtiset a# Atssttot eta. b. XtlOt @£¥fe SS HSima S£?SO gotot so. c. ast gxta its xtiot gsaa east a ra as aaeaioioti HAiaotot eta. d. ois aws atst sxtt mot otisst aoieoi 91s ooie ute 5esnot eta. e. a§@ cmsxts aoie ute sttatAtt et a a. ss ssaets 01s ctss otst sxte xis2s snot so. f. cm sxts e xtiotxi xmsi as# gateau sAists aiaaa xiisoi yotot so. a at st gxtt an 01 eta ¥Aiutee xtxtot ea. e. Acts ssext sxtat a tut, ss ssasts ois ass cttmtgxt* Atsaot eta. h. SAtsutu stag as# asssts stoats aestaot sta cmgxt(xtiot Seaton tw xtisaotot eta. otstgxtfc asgxtu, 01s ass? a sta, as s acuta zcna aciw 4.2 an, as son sea easts @a, xiiai is, bebsoi sts as asm xtietg §g as Es g a set as# xtisat se act. 3.3.7 Error Dialog Box (Otlfit CHSt&Xt) on a a stems gui aa hxiioiiai otiate stotas as§ cts you ahs haibb M¥Atgh a. so?* Atsstt aias oti At otia a yxiaet, mat sms e#oti otatot SMsai UBtutot eta. b. oust etEss gxt* otissoi aistt Atsxt sis easts saoiotot eta. xtsxtct oust* #2!8ta at St 4tXtB AtStXtOt StB Otl St* EStotB get 01 SEEIOtOt SO. c. oti a customs oust a on aotAta y get. d. Otl a OIIAIXI StESB Otletse, OIIAIXI, OIIAIXI OtSHOtl Sty(OK), SB(Omcel), ESW(Help)jlt its ¥A|fflSS ESSHOt SO. CSMLab.@KIT WINDOWS (S!E?) Window States (BES #01) 3.4.1 Open Windows (Eg BES) AIISAlih a. yea sea sasHxi bes» a* sicmoi eo. b. sg bess yaaoiiAi aa mm essa mi bbsixii ciisaioi goioi so. c. 2S BESS AISeoilAH O'a# |'i 4 StCH 01 BO. 8 BIO eSSIS BESS AISXIM 3^8 g>B 4= 50101 BO. d. Ames BESS] £S SEHS XIIA All 381101 613, AlgXIOIlXII 2g BES°l ### useaioi sis sag xiisshoi eo. 3.4.2 Closed Windows (BE! BES) AII¥A(S: a. BE! BESS BESU 0I0IE g 61 US SIBOflAi ■ S 2CCH0I E!U. b. All BE ELI BES5I Btt mi, 5IS SES2I 0121 BBS All BE El BESS besoii ass mxixi as aieixioi siu. c. seias besxi a# 55!se 5ixi3 §se sssoi ssaxi as mi, Aigxis gia 535= 51X151 S8H US BESS gaji S 30(01 SU. 3.4.3 Active Windows (9lj El B EES ES £f S 5! EES) s°i: A|gXI5l BXH BS#gS SIS AI5SU BESS eSEIS BES ES tSS EES El 3 eo. smsss ess bess w aisxi a=e exH a3 sum w si°§ aisxiu ame Baxiu.w aisxi ess mm a# sue e #eb» unieu. aisxis assms earn xibi eoixm, aiess xnoma, pioiei * aesi3 as ass* -eas(Es essiraia aeu. AU¥Alih a. aAI”25 EAias BES 5HXIIS #SSI SES2I SEE! HI01 Sfi2l SSOI 5^1# a#6i5i[ useaioi snoi so. b. aecm si xi# besb esiiaoiot su. c. tans bess Hies si besu saacnoi eu. d. wb#b hi oi sehoiiai ess bess 5ia a#oii cmsaioi snoi eu. CSMLab.tgKIT B-76 e. essa assa as assa onoieon onaxuite a so. f. assi 3x1 aseaioi sit 301 aga ra, ess assa as son am sm, ae asson onaxu-na a so g . as on a on a asson aeon useaioi was, #eon astf 4= aa asses SAiacHOt so h. .ass* ns s"as Jif°s ass* essa01 snot act. i. ass saia use easnoiu, ass mis* a^sssw assa its aa on on aa. j. ass* taa sna ones ass msa a a on xnses axixis xnsxnon a asson me m s as# anon eo k. tii# assa saoi onxixi anstaans e aasot esaaae in umxi asst mesa aonon so. l. asson dai «ssii in, a a eaon ass oixuna a so axi east aaa m assa axis essn aas m°i yens aee s a on on so. 3.4.4 Input Focus (El# sonte) a# sonife e ass m°i e on a onaaoi saa sxiu oibss aas eon ean s aaa one 01 a. All¥ xn W: a. a a aa assa son yaaoi e asste sag sxiu oibss me is s a on on eo b. sag §xm si as* oissnot le ae asson a-is onxna sons oise w s a a on gen. c. seas oigsnon hois sson as sas* ss m s a on on so a. 3i seta xngsnoi asson ae a/non in on m saa* aas saw a a a on eo e. on a on a# ssia* ons in on a a axi axis saisoiu assn on on am on §0 one eon, asson xis a aw m xngxnon ss asms onxnon si ah* axiAisiolu essHon go. f. asson as sons* sstoon oai asste in, asson ai onxiass a# siAi* one on a on saaon si xi sh on eo CSMLab.@KJT ii I !i a sal d. sm oiaisoia aasois #a ga» as soisaos * 4= 30101 e. as efts sas sEgyoii 3010s sis a sw aao ebs suaotos ao. f. ahss eft geioi Aiaae iaiui sss ses else* eehe ft 4= 300s ea g. AISXI4I §E?I 486! Si2l StS 4425 eft ft 4 3010s bo. BE# 3413 SIESIB 3E?i i36! 8!S3 0K)IB OS2S 431 SIS 38 a S3. a. hb ses* m±mm ra, ana as?a as as ahseo BEse oioisss ataiacHot a a. b. SES4I SI ESI@ soil SE43 Eg SIBI3ISS 314 01#OIXIOI 60. c. sesis 4 2ie besb as bessi seae sse oioieoio aioieoi Isa a oi so. d. SS HE3H0HXI as sg£5 tf SOI #41# SIS, SESIS BES* 2 A] SIB oioiss aeois exis s^oiiah es^es saga as sib oil a es memos ao. e. SESIS BESB BE4 341 E33I $14SI S6S All3a BE# AIBS 011421 tig §as sftsie on44i 30101 ao. f. ss sa B4EE aEsia be# 0114 oioiss ti#w 4 30101 ao. aaae 0I55I41O ft SIS mss S48HAI SESIS BE¥3 0114* HI 41 ft 4 30101 BO. g. SS HSOag E3S3 61 ¥ Oil 34 0I0IS OSES BEg* SESiaE# B3ft 4 30101 ao. (BES aCDS) 410siB oioia me sews sma ses* aaaa 34iae oaeaioi sib as AII¥Mft: a. BE44I 34IES0I 4|#ft W, SS HS38 IS BE# 341* S OH Sift 4 30101 b. a cm mss sb® ih, ss ssnag 3ig s a:iu oaeaioi a ami « s xi o) so. c. BE¥31 $02)11 M, g£? 33| SB MSOl a010| 813, 3 MSS SS 0101 S3} oisS xixot so. 3.5.5 Restoring Windows (I! E¥ 33| SS) AII¥A)@: a. $b» as so as @es°i aoie 3is«s axis ss® 4- as hissho) so. b. £»JI EEL) BEE* A)S8HA) SMS SES* 01S 3312) ® ¥ a010) BC). c. ses 331 ss sas ses3) xisss axis mums oiss 4- acnoi bo. d. 33131 SSS SESS «asi BO0101 BO. e. SES 331 SS MSS ¥SB, SES2I $15 3312) ¥1x1 S SE¥2) BBS All SEMI SESE B 8)311 mo) BO. S3: SEE 3312) SSS EBEie 0158)0) $02) $S2) 0)OISB S58)31L) $ES) SOS) Oils* SSoHM EStt ¥ 50. 3.5.6 Opening Windows (SES 3)31) AII¥A)th a. 3BB SS Aim* ¥ IS 8)0) SES* S ¥ 5M0) BO. b. SEE* Olfe 2SaS OSES SESB WB 2)6)10) BO. S3: sesi o)s asaei sas o§a ao: ss ass* ses ass six-iu, mis Ei a m on aj ass mss a#s es 6H5 @e? ooiss as bo. 3.5.7 Closing Windows (5 £° 531) AII¥A)tt: a. A)gX)3) BEE* @1 ¥ 5B B3| ESS HIS6H0) BO. #, B3B0IIAI BE¥* HI313)3 BE¥3 BBS) ES SSIS B« ¥ 5E5 B3| 315# HI55H0) BO. b. SO @01310 XIS 81 XI dtS 0101 El 3) 58 Ml @E¥* 531 a Oil BXH £!S§°1 CSMLab.@KIT ase sue a2!xi* aisxioiixii sisshoi ao. c. e ess°s SE?a aii as a seebie a# 4= 220101 sick a. §g ESEissj miei g£?« as in aas ee si# seee cum bee asot SQ. 3.5.8 Moving Windows (SEE 0IS6I0I) AllEAlih a. SEES EESaiOIE OS SEES SB E £10101 SO. b. SEE* esasixi S,EE 81X1 01 Sit E EACHOt BE. c. 8EE2I SX] OISE 2E2|o S X|gsidX|l EEIEOI BE. d. SEE 01601 016813, ESS EE* Algit E Si* IB 5SBS BEE HOIS ti|3 soi Boie toe Basin eehesioi see* ahss axis oisst e eachoi be. e. AI3HS A|gX|0| BE Oil BBS ES §H» EBB BEE* S3B0IIXI SOIXI a All OlStt E 2IE* sum BE. f. es aiEEon oiatxiaaiE Aigxioi see* ehboiiai aoixi at A# oisat e SACHOt BE. S3: a. SB51 XI01 A|B01E BE AI3E BESS* Efe SEEX-tg 8X1* OlStt E &6 SEES 21* E 21E. Ola SEE ESS 8 XI01S, StO|, SIESI ES 30IE3S tt E 21E. b. 5SEI3 SEEE SEEE EWEBI* SasiE 0IS5IS SEE* SEB E 33, ahss sxion ai wes wxi as seeai ahss axis be a assaioi a aoio. 3.5.9 Resizing Windows (SEE 30159) AIIEAIW: a SEEE 3AI* E35IS 0|S ESS XII SB CHOI BE. b. SEES BSgES *g ES SEES! BM ES, EB°l 3A|* BStt E 210101 BE. c. aSBB BBS SEES 3AI* Eg* IB Oil E @* 151X1 EEBaiOl BE 01 BE. d. SEEE 3AI ESS SEEE 301B g Si BOIOI 513 LB EE ES All XIIE 301 CHI SB® OIXtAHS B SO. e. LHSS EXiaSE SEEE 30101 Btt IB 0101XI 30IS SEE 30101! UIBIISIE tasaoioi be. CSMLab.@HT B-81 f. tEsa 33i* ra eiies, nzM, at otoisoi as a ss* sioiotss dai a a a mot en. g. 5210 ees At a* 4= sb oi aoiasoi 3iset tssa aitais ast aeiEte gaoia, sast # a sis aoietaa sxm sEmaata tee wot i!£?ai sol* eaw 4= atotot eta. h. SES31 H? Sf311 33301 L«3 3HX1I31 2? 33*3101 aXI SS IHt 4=S 4=3 33* tit* OlgolOI 33*3101 8H01 Bt3. i. ext 32?a eas 331 u a at as ss senas ss® m atsa 31s ¥1X13 33|S 33*3101 3 0101 SO. S3: a. 3E¥3 ElltEI* Earns HI, 3E?U SES3 3ISEIS Eel El 21 S3II 010510101 sta oisat saa assa 33i2i axia est* baishoi so . b. SES* se axis. sssit as sasua xhxii* gstsia 33*3101 si3i ¥onx xii eta ¥ so. CSMLab.@KIT B-82 3 WINDOWS (9ES) 3.6 Window Navigation (@ES HI til XII0! <9) UitilXilOISS & S(fonn)LH°l UEB OISOILI, gy°l OIS, 925 SIS 0IS8IS as AIISAlih a. Aisas mioixi as as uitiimoia ass xnsaww set. b. 52 as asci y 2 us oiisese xusshoi am. =. uiHuiiois earn soixi sisn maixiiois xisaoim oissxia us weoi xnsaoioi acK(xieaa mi: as? msu es eee gy bxii * xixixi U2 as# ¥ us tns) d. SBIU 5S£ US EElfflOISe AIS8HAI S5E?J|0i ESyoil »S2 4=IS SSS tt e. uaoii my sa?ea sisiesy ss sssaa xiassya uitiixnoia gat f. as a ses s$e xistt eh , as ss eese aisxixi exn #s;iE# aisxi xis oioise Beam aise esas axisis sis* xusshoi em. g. sxixis EES sas msa as a soil aisshoi set. • a apt- as Besom sehli axi sxi aisa siesu hh b oi osb as ; • Aiua a semi oi axixi a mu ses°i aoias §s* ausixi oias ssa as 8naEu as, • Aisxi on my oi a Bsas aixiis oisoi as as, • esse ses saoi aae- mixiiu as, • aisxpi aexioixm, ss Esama xis aissis as. h. a xi a eess sas asm oien chi us saa xiiboiu mtuxiioia ssmmi as iae xissse xiass a am. -. siesxi as in, aae mas onaasi aiub aae sehw s uses ggas j. oioi soi li Bias 2= @ss sue oissioi eesb essi m s uoioi am. k. sb ®ss man niSJoim gg hseuss sesoiiah ebois as ses s§ a a sis xiss a son mm sis# ss am. i. a xi a Aisaonxi gas ass# sa oibs #asiE# oioiaai Bsm ess aissius in me sese oissixili axi sa aoi esotiB siese xia agon mssaioi w a a oi oi em. CSMLab.@KIT midijiio is >iEie eoie aisxisi gjAi dish =*= §a°i sxiAise soi aisxkh a?at 0x 1^0 ¥5te egj 4- 9xa. CSMLab.@KIT B-84 i.nryic'iivs;) 'OB IOIOBSIY ioS 3I8BHH EI8IY5 SIvS BfelgB BO H0H3IY 5g BEg ‘io« BBS ioisSS fYHOB IOIEByD ‘iB* SSgfi fc IOIBSyB ‘|5* ■ 10115*30 3Si§B gSIC ‘Hi BBI0H5B3O lohzRHC 3BE 4 ■flg loa* ss b mi* iciosic «Bi ‘trisiYH ema am hoioikbod are ass kaoqs =siy sms ago ms ioio ^be wss * ass *isa= iio as IS5S am oaas ass e eis rerea m\s5 sssy Iy as ages « 'Bis rereiofeBS etis lores ro ba* iiosiy §be as an aaiY j 'ob iotoBSiY sea# asst sre g(uo„g30,)|y|* ‘(jSMiuooMaroimnOlFlinBI* '(=™)|CE ‘(Js^od m,oo) | R n '(pxpnA)*^ mas ale ass she sn ase bbse reieES ios ok * oiofe p 'OB 10 mm? B 55 bsic be bbsiy iss a is Hi a icikb be ■= 'OB IOK)i5 * SB Hi EISII a IEslflH HYH0I8B5 S3 55 lEBIOllY 55 51KB BE 5BSIY IYIIO by IY SS '« (SIY fiPo)l™>3 l-f 'obsiy Hite icieaa *Hea aw bbhc as msa oik is se i-i33C>)‘eis@iy Siva ania sac sioib bo Teissiy eza Hite ica *05 eiysiy 5555 B ISI0IES5OW 3BE '0500 «5g gW 35S fell SfoO 35 fe ‘S5 ‘Eg (BE Kg) ONIdOD KOIJ VIVMOJKI 4 INFORMATION CODING (§S SS) 4.2 Color Coding (*S S@ Sfe iSl 38) 4.2.1 Contrast / Luminance (Qltil Z S ) 1.7.3 am / $IE* SHolAIS. 4.2.2 Brightness (@131) 1.7.4 @1318 S36)A|2. 4.2.3 Location (ft 7 ) 1.7.5 91X1* S281AI2. 4.2.4 Use of Color (4S 2| A1S) 1.7.10.2 t*|SI A)@@ S381AI2. 4.2.5 Color Selection (A# tJi) 1.7.10.3 A!) jMajS SUSfAie. 4.2.6 Color Coding for Discrete Data Categories!# 0 A QIOIB 3)012816 ft El 4 38) 1.7.10.4 0101H 3)01201* flE ad 38 8 828) A|2. 4.2.7 Color Coding lor Relative Values (£KJt^i 515t 6!j 38) 1.7.10.5 At0)3) gta *i) 38 8 838IAI2. 4.2.8 Unique Assignment of Color Codes (SS & 4S 39) 1.7.10.6 A" 259 SglS #9# 828) A!2. 4.2.9 Redundant Color Coding (W^ 6!) 39) 1.7.10.7 Alj 3g g 826)AI2. CSMLab.@KIT B-86 ng(4» asoiiA) xii*igxi sts ra@) .7.10.8 m agouM 3ti*iE|xi ag me# sesiais . 4.3 Symbol Coding (6Hg 39) tiwe axil, a a as oiss sen chb sa h @@oiq . AIISAIS: a. xise agg msxixi 3 xwma sews xiboili am* a se at a a xHme semot eo. b. as at sas as «se age mbs? rat, 01 ass ss smog a mm a sssie gas anis Aisawoi aci. c. a±xt qsegioioiia sms aeon ?am ssaixixi ssh, aaa ea Moiowt a ae ^arn sm. 1.3..QL0JSa.SB8 SE8IAI2. 4.4 Spatial Coding (3S 39) All ^ MS: a. §2.1 39S Altai a moil amsxii aisshoi bq . b. §a 3ss as! §aa§ eaisixi ssu aisshoi eci. c. e §28 3 soil ass smoii ms snot so. d. §2 aas out aaom ms mioixi, as he , ta, ssa/bissa sa sa a Die <9X1 8188 AIS8«0t SCI. e. Bsaa sm* aae uaxi as in, §2 39s msshms a so. 4.5 Size Coding (3X1 39) a. axi 338 citeaioixi 3» aaxiaxi at sson aisshoi bq . b. 3X1 4S8 SICH 3X1X1 4=58 AISSHOI SCI. XI9 E 9@S ilt£) X|S MS 9S2I 150%0ia0t glQ. c. asa 3xixi qioib at on maw m, xiea as saxiEtci as saoi me ohxhb 4=s Aigotioi so. SH: a. S0I2 HIS BOilAI W3 8I31I BSEIE= LiHI2| =3121 1JII H]3I|2|2S OISCH XI 01 eo. b. aisxis esa xiasps 4.6 Shape Coding (By 28) AH¥AIS: a. ay agg stas hsoiu xiea °ioi* oooi so. b. as 3gg axiie aasis awsieai aisshoi eta. c. X'8 D8S 3|fe°S XHS35 5 EH El @#*(@@6) X|| CH 3|)0l S8t HUH Oil UHxlW IHOIIb By 28S AISSHOI 601. a. aeeaioi at on a a a seaa chioiei sibiiieie aeaixi @a# soiu mx is Aiaa sa ay sibibeie aisshoi eta. e. yews! ay ays Aisaa a ayoi as seyoi owaoiot w ra eya eg 53H9E3I 3 95111 SOUS 153UE 9X| BtOIOI 60. f. sis sHetaoii stt ay aye aisshoi eo. S2: xism^e aye ay on aisb ihs aisxdi chioiehsi ass son e ih aisshoi eo. ay aaxi sa 3i«e aas s yxie sh 5s ee^as xiytai sexiooii 21SH 01 ^CHXI31 OHSOIO. SB 315 AISXI H@S 00 81001 50. 4.7 Pattern Coding (IDS 28) -MISAIS: a. me a sesiois asat sea at on oei oysixi siw 3ia yg aaa 3is es saoxi oysia oesaioi w s acnoi eo. b. oaeaioi as saa ays ?is« ehbs aisw oh sae aaos ese ieg AissHoi eo. c. ^ as ohm 2 ays aiaaxi atau saaa ah as i@g ssshahs e so. S2: Aiysie gii =tee aa^a* shso is ees nneoi =se hhsso atoi aisshoi eo. CSMLab.@KIT INFORMATION CODING (3 H 2S) Line Coding (BIB 39) i.5 at, aas § besiaie. 4.9 Area Coding (gS! 39) AII¥AlSh a. 00821101 99 • gse eg see oos2iioi sit asto essei oise sixi ge^ sst □ 0821101998 H15SH01 BIO. • msi gssieiu Aisxia esoi gas get aisxisi xisai9 gaccitsaioie m m xi» exi xis bxii at 99) ohi citeaioi goioi eo. • ossa Hast, onto, as ait, diiaixi 99 tie sesssit eaaife Altai at ss sszim ssioiim ae@ axmi libilioi bo. b. 0101S S9 53 • 0101 ea 619 Xitel 9901 LI ,99 a 9921 S103S ZIOB 4mrot awoi BO. • 0101021 S9XI* 99S 2SI S93B 3X10)01 513 AISXIXI 01010* 41X11 B9S1 as 301 610. c. 35HB 53: 1,6.5 Area* S351AI3. d. XIE 99 • ggime, A«, astasia as ast xisso os 99s 32m mo as eta XIBIS iEESEHB HAISdOl tt M AIS8H01 810. • xiEa 9 9901 aamsoio asssss aasos xis gia xis wts 99s B42I 9 593011 AlSSlfflOl BO. e. SS 9 9 • SS 9901130 983 xioie out# SfiXl 30101 610. • 9S 998 39SH01 8 IH ¥9ES 3981101 BO. f. 9901 39 99 • as 9901 39 99(St @ES)8 0981 99011 398 4= 30101 BO. • sag a a 2i sgoi 39 S9S xitei eg ciobeiioioiiai oiehoii asaoioi BO. S3: a. 01199 99 Ollt 00851101 XII =, 85, X1IOISS, 01151 011AlXILI OJISB 00821101 tt S 30. b. CHI010, XII018S, XIAIAIBS 00821101 oltCll AlSSlt 538 OS 990 oaaotot bo . CSMLab.@KlT c. ass 999 bxisi 6e $12930101 be. a. Sjm gqg ss qi»aioio«A) ass soil gxunot bo . e. qaeaioia xise soil sixib as qseaioisi xiseb aisxib eh a ssaom 69 ssaoi sssisie® 99 s 903 Qians 01 gxuHoi bo . f. 2E 3ta ssisei was as atoii oe aisxixi xmiEae axil xissie XI8 51E = E215E# A1S5H01 BO. 1.5 axtie, as, m#e besiaie . 4.10 Text Coding (9! dBS S9) 4.10.1 Abbreviations and Acronyms (90121 5SX1CH) 2.2J SOI21 SEX101S BE61AI2. Coding (9-6X1 26!) 96xi ass qi oi a a ass bsuixi sishs 6xi so sxisa suss aas SOI q. a. 96X1 2EE aSEXie SS8HAH AlgolX| tiE, CUEXI EE 2SX1 g 51 LIB aisaai Aisem si a. b. eexi exist 6* sss in, exist exie os. eb xioioi so, c. 9-6xi 2E0H6 s¥sa Aiss ecu si ess s SS01 Aigsnoi tiq. d. 993 2EB XI9SH01E) S 3S0I EXIE 510IS EE A1BJ11 ttOI DIE SEI EX1L1 5JB 51 LIE 5BI9E 3X1-5X1 3812 EB XICH 01 SI Cl. e. 3 0I9E OS! I* XI9 Al@e 6X1 0(6X1 9)21 1(6X1 W)S ttiXII eg# tiEB 6 9X1 OIE0I 2801 AH nioHot sin. f. 96X1 ext3 EXIE 7x9 SM0IA1 5X19 $2=) 5x73301 B9. g. SAI6H0I 51E am 0H93E XI3 S AI2JBI0I6 #3510# in 96X121 SS9 Al 9 E(visual angle)E £I2B 4.7 miad(16 min)0l 901 M 01 fill. BE: 36X1 29S SB513L1 a33°J 9301 69* 5X1 91 B SSB 6B A1S3E 58 oiuq. CSMLab.@KlT 1.10.3 Underlining Coding (SHiti 29) ass as S2|* #31 SIBHAHOiCh. AII¥AISh a. see sssste as swam sis siae es s@ HAISISQI AiSBHO) BO. b. said gsi a an ss oi sh oil ass as in aaoi s=g a=se shsah c. sms SUSIES 21 SS0I1 AlgSHA-tS E SO. 4.10.4 Bold Coding (EEHI 29) ■ ESI 2SS ¥S2, i)S tiES ¥SSIB A)SI01 a. a. »esi sas as ass aisshoi eo. b. Ail ¥5 016)21 #ESI 29* AISSHAIS E SCI. 4.10.5 Numeric Coding (5cXI 29) a. *XI 2ES 7X1 0ILHS SI Ball 01 §Q.. b. #9 sxies ass eis as* SI2J8 I2 qioieis axis sens haishais CSMLab.@KlT Display Range Coding (C l^#9101 @¥l 3 8 ) ? il- “ Kf si 10 w e l : H % *0 r-i OhJ ra 50 : i 3 ? S OU % T ™ (O n ” “ 5 R u ? * 0111 5 m ? _ » m 2^! ^ % ou d R % so I n Rf g "1 a ob o| 5 t % m« 50 s m sir d 4.13 Texture Coding 39 Err S = 39) A|l¥Alth a. siis ass oe 8EH2] saa gum sis snot si a. b. sues 3351311 eiSOH-Hfe 016! SUSS A18SH01 SICK c. B!6*l 3901 SID” A|4 S4t BCHEBIteXI 0I6E8HO1 SICK 4.14 Multidimension Coding (Q-XlS! 39) A|l¥Allh ei ciEeaioioimtr 39:1011 3»@ sae aisshoi sick CSMLnb.@KIT B-93 5 INTERACTION (0038 SEB 3B3S) 5.1 General (g! a AI&) AH¥AlSh a. aisaioioiiAH Aisxi 00388 awi *000 xi## aouoo b 002, sss°i ^@¥311 SXISIJII S3AI5N08 O 8 9 . b. s 0139 Aigxio 0332s asa ssog# ai§jh chioibh aaiaae eioi BOS & AlgXPI AIS8 IB 33 LHSOI 33 3 01X1 ?J* 38 OB AISXI9 80151019011 S8 S DlflAlB 8 80 . SB 88 AISII0 XII01 LHgOI 8 A1S.0I XII30801 BOB iSE @281 -0. S3: 8890 @8 §SB a a XII8 8 88 X121 088 38 S 818 9 EH80 II8 I HAI8 H0 SO. 0038 0 9 #ail0| AI9 a8 S100* 88818 SO AISXIOOI 33 0 33 881 * 3808 0 80. CSMLab.@KlT B-94 5 INTERACTION (E! 8 3" ti) 5.2 Command Language (SWCH) 5.2.1 General (SEWS) AII¥AIS: a. a xioiebecxis ) see sail ssmxi 9:« xisn xiaiai &oii cue LHsa see ya-(S»)2i am »issHot act. b. at ai^siss eianuoib a a xiaeoii chsh Saab @90121 aiea es# Stgaot so. c. sgcH aimpsis eng- egEsziH 321 @es sgHsngioiiAi wb§b a sib am oi an. 5.2.2 Command Entry (S W 01 Kg) S3: ggOI S 9 (Command entry)S AlgXIXI 8H§ AISSIOII mS XlbS AI98IE5I XU 01 Site ass aimen. M ¥ A! 8: a. S90|b AlgXIXI asa LU¥ 01131 UB(HSAII§01U, CIIOIEl XI§31 Sj*9 #)2l oisHsioi ms xibsi sass aae xi Bg 4=B oiasisi §§aoioi en. b. cibgaioia 8iB°i a es yam ohbdiiaixi, hbhs £Eb gaol agon aisswoi etn. c. Command entry area (g a 0| @g@8) • a ciasaioia aaoi sagas eei§°e ns nseaiom ggoi sagg°i atm w@§oi aoioi en. • 9901 99 99S @ES 6IB2I OIIAIXI 98 BIS 9 011 SES 80IBS B 4>E an. d. AlgXIXI 9901 9851b 3S BBtt 4= KEB 9901X1 BbElb % BBb AISXI3I BgW ¥ KES 8101 SCI. e. sas Aisxm as § aheb oiibb8 urn §§ aaoi# 995104 mm xi@e EStt 9 %oi 01 sn. 82: a§ seoi a§ xioie @31 as ais» 4= Kb xis§ ggoi @#01 aisxioiisi xhseioioi en. CSMLab.@KlT B-95 5.2.3 Editing Command (9 SOj 4=8 94 @8) AII^AtS: a. Aigxixi ssw« s#et # SBoi asaxi as ssoiife aa@ asoie 4=3w 4= 24 CH 01= SCI. b. HsaBMiM exisi m aa xnxi ss ?iet [ois],[#ai],[xisxij g°i es ssoie aiisshoi eta. c. saoixi ameaioioii glass sasig sa saw Aigxi @a saois as ameaiois sxiem sesoioi eta. 5.2.4 Complexity of Command Language (@ 80121 ' A,=E) AII¥A1@: a. ass ss xiixiim u on xii si °iei#ss sons 0=1X101 a oi oi so. b. saws goig #ss» mmsi snot sirs =si shxili xis# Aigsis Aigxies a# sgsioiot ea. c. ssois seoi as Aigxixi sisaiei n 4= as# ys 4=5011*1 ass 4@(SoiS)S oixi s# inxii3ss ssgoioi so. 5.2.5 Spelling Errors (8 XI 2#) AU¥A1S: a. sfi s#4=, ssaa gj( §g asm a# aaoi a«iet bseib aishs gEiaai axis#mi chsh xiaae sssixisas a ystoii skxh xieigoioi ea. b. saoia ssa 8 3m saet axis saoixi as# so. 5.2.6 Abbreviation of Commands (9 B 01 SI #01) A|l¥AlSh a. aaoisi #oi* aiisshoi sa. b. #8 AISHOIXia AlgXIXl SgXl SJ EH S80IS 5X1 01 SIS ##@ #0121 gEHS AIISSHOI eta. c. AlgXIXl @80121 #01U #X1* S2I810I AlgSlt XIS8 XHSSH01 60.(011, A1SX1 8 2| Et#3l) CSMLab.@KIT B-96 5.2.7 Blank Spaces (5s! 018") AH¥Alih a. eos aioioh 8100132 s¥s asm s^aao sasioi essiioi ea. b. 3¥& sshsoisoiiai as aois aissixi koioi mu. 5.2.8 Punctuation (??S) AII¥Alth a. BO A10I3 321010 as KOI 330» 88W 6 KOI01 SCI. b. 38010)1 AH B¥8 AISS ilitl SH01 810. c. a sxi 38S3S sbioia as, sehai @si ssa# aisshoi so. Bailee 368S 81513 Alg @311* OBI01 610.3-4 4XI Soil SOS AISSIXI 86 3¥ oss Aiasis 6xi S8S Koioi so.o, @#@# ssh oss ai arsis g?t xiia so.) 5.2.9 Use of Delimiter (3S8XT) A|I¥A1W: a. SSSXK7',7...eetpl i2S 3Soil 3S§ei SSHSBBOll 0121 BBS ssssaasoiiAis sma sssxie aisshoi mu. b. 3 ¥01 SB61 8801 3SS2 3¥ 5)02 S3 Oil JUSSIS OIS 3$!SXI SIO* AISSHOI BO. 5.2.10 Wording (SOI) AH¥A1S: a. 8801* 33516 Eg El 021 B 806 3S@ 8 8 011 AH B 2 012 SXIO 8IB32S 339001 610. b. 8802 BOS OS 3802) AH 5 333001 SIO X|@@B 8 OH AH IBS XIOISS 8ESH01 *10. c. aaxio wiaxiasi aisxiboi aroi aissib aisus sob aaoi on cue cisb #2 021 cnei¥e! seen chsh exit 6 aoot eo. d. 8800 3I9IE tiOl 8896 3 B02 a016 7X1 OISIOOl I1C|. 8306 Jl±6 ixi oi@2 mmaioio 6xie xm 6 20. CSMLab.@KIT B-97 SU: a. Aligj OHAlXIfc SAS SOI* Algea. b. asoig son Aigam ?i5U Algols* xisbs asst am so, c. aii@(aas)9A|og ggs esme as xisxia sa @gxi ss ggoii era Aisaa aisxioiixii ase moixi ** Aigsioi ±ea sas°i §ss xia aisbjoi ifis.1 2011 Ah gif 4= ao. d. asacaaa, aoiwma) aaoiou Aigaig eoit aisxisi sue asms as yssfflot am Aigxixi Aissit s a on esaioioi ea. 5.2.11 User-Assigned Command Names (AigXi XI9 VI Vj 01 * AH¥AiB: xi¥ Aigais @aoi2 Aigxiou me ■>§ oies «« Aiew ¥ eachov ea. 5.2.12 User-Requested Prompts (AigXi XIS 5§5^> AII¥AiW: asoi see g = Aigxixi ishsi sst ¥ aioioi ea. 5.2.13 Destructive Commands (¥S 9 0 Oi) AH¥AiB: a. aaoi aaoi ggaei aa* otxieit as, aaoi* ea a a mse Aigxixi ¥ 210101 ea. b. e beoiim sxi ¥«es Aissit asoit a# eeoiiai east sxiie sssig oses esNAHg e io. c. ¥fie a a* sums »aaa see me aaois ssjbeu as eeoiiai Aigai g a a oi at esaxi as# ea. 5.2.14 Recognize Command (9 9 01 9 XI) AU¥Ai»: a. Ai29s on gat as age aaoi ess axis? ¥ aoioi ea. b. Aieaoia sshsehoi aisxixi a@e aaoi* oishs ? ¥ ait as aisxioiixii CSMLab.@KlT B-98 S8CH xna na^o-ioi sa. 5.2.15 Aiding Command Recall (8 8 01 SSAI^j SXI) B¥AtS: aiwhs Atgxio ggw oiea woaoiw Aiwa sisstotot ao. 5.2.16 Confirmation of a Command (S 8 2| 09 , a. xiss sbu sxi aw aiwb eg oil atcnai asset asi wsAim #ai a a gee 4= aw sb boioil wet agon men aisxiw oaoi Baao soil stag fi?l> 4= 2iCH01 oil! SHI 80101 810. fa. 0101 El a 61B2I SSOIO 0118# Aiwmw BO* OOlolW a ggoi StSOI xias swaw 39Miw aiwboiu ssssoeis Aiaxiow miwaw aai [aeEiAi(undo)]Ai aw sgos aisxiai stati 4= aw »§oi aoiot eo. c. staas oweaiois qioieiai xnaacHsw a so. d. 151 a 9IWE=(keystroke)°S S8S 0101 El Lt A|S S32AS AISXtAI SOW 4» 2101 Ot BO. 5.2.17 Feedback andHeip (EIH9!jj3t SsSt) B“AtSt: oweaioiot xurneotwa s¥ Boi axis eaoti ass @#stxi astot eto. 5.2.18 Error Correction (2# §§) 5.10.2 as asg soatAie. 5.2.19 Defaults (Cl SM 21) 2.3.5 xiwssa e.h.k ass sostAie. CSMLab.@KIT B-99 i (MS) M¥A|ih sn saioie sa m Msmsia Aigxui mm a«f*t aee aaoi sqi . 5 INTERACTION (glBBIS) 5.3 Function Keys and Hot Keys (31 *3121 B#3I) 3l*3l(fimctionkey)2l B*3lfc A|SB HI 0) gj B Oil gSIS ?t S2S gi B 2| 3 XI El B Alias mat sgs ss 3i*s -ebsixi sa. a. 31*31 a B#3|2| ■ a 3i*3i* aitife xis* m ss5ie= haisioioi ena. • ¥ 3H 01 M2| 31*011 AISBte 3l(key)2l 3¥0|[* A|gX|0IIXI XI*B°S Alg 31*® 31*8 haim ^oioi eo.([92]si am a a 81 AIS) b. 3i *3ia tillxi si sea - 31*31* 3ISEMIAI as 31 (key) 8 ill OS 36X101 ¥185101 AIS8I3I ti XI 8H0I eci. • 31* 31* a 3i2i Aiga- waae xixis# umi&a.asaisi b« sssiaie ) c. S3B «: 31 SMS A|g8l* 3? 31*3121 3 31 (key)* *3323 0SXIWAI aaoioi ea.([SM2]cm sssiais ) d. 31*313 61X1 3|=¥523 B3 31*81101 ®C|. AISXIOII ESI S2IS =1 AII3E SIS ¥*@ 31*31* sissass 61X1 as sisbhoi ea.([*a]°i ae sssiais ) e. El SB • aasi* 31*3131 sast a 5= XISBS #A| aisxioii xi 01 aims Dai ¥ oi 01 Pa.([SE]f« BE8IAI2) •5.8 EISB2I igg SS5IAI2. f. was • ms 31 011 OIB 31*01 WBBOI D* 3¥ 01 31*3 **011 3X18201 gSB 31*01 tt BE 0101 ecl.([BS] g» s3251 AIS) • 3 ESOIIA-I 31*3 1(fiinctionkey) 31 CIS 31*25 AISH HU, MS8IELI SAI® 31*01 31 011 KBS 01 &0101 el Cl. ([S3]h« S38IAI2) a shift* SAIOII *S* SXHB * 3131 SAIOII AlgH IH, shifts I* ¥# 3?!l XI ate S¥°| 31*313 SEIB 51X131 CIS 3|21 3¥E 815*01 5X1 BE 01 .([S3],* S26IAI2) CSMLab.@KIT g. xie «§gfe siwsi • a? A)@26 3i6S shift si is yoi exi an u«a sihi msmoi bo • a# ogaso 3H6825 Afgsuot sis aim sifes nss sigsion wsetio) bo . b. sigsia essra tiiessf • a2 asoiiAH uaatxi as sigsis n a2 am boons uidbsoo soot bo . • 1)SS)@ functionkey 2) tilSSSS function keyS) SA10II EXHSf IN, i)S5)S SI BS A) gX) ON 3)1 EEiOMI HAI#0) BQ. i. AlgX) 82 31631 • 011351)0! OBI ggO 28* 8122 OIBOil S)g)6H8 Algst 4= 2)6 3166 XUSSHO) BO.([S3]j* @28)02) • A)gX) XI8 0N352 5S3EN9S 316316 XIIB2O0) a2.([S2] k* @281X12) • SIS A)gXI-011 29H 82S 0N3SO E53ENSS 316313) 06 A)gX)OII 28H tsgafe as xiibsho) go. • ON 35 OIBS S#A)g8 8188126 2 SO. j. 316312) 33,312 83: 82S DN352) 316312 8S(index)OII 85 3)68N0) BO. S3: a. 6 3N2 3180)1 OSN 8)02 SIS) A)gS6 36 3 3I6S 82 S3 EEOil 8)0 053)1 8S22 BXH2 Site* BO* «®B EHU5 XIIBSNO) BO. OIS IN816 BXH 26 3I6@ At2)825 BAI6)2 31352 S)|E EAI8)0 2XNIOE #831601 6826X1® EOSNO) BO. #8 EEOIIO #8 3168 688)6 316 A)gX)2 ossgioioii 8§e sioieoiiaixi* haisheoo) bo. b. SEE, A)gH)E ag A)g502 DS 2382 5858011 2SH 31* UNxlBHO) BO. 65 aeon A)g8)6 316 SEEN XI6 3x181 UNXI* 8)6 OS MIS B 6 210. c. 312 823 316S 2320) 2010) BO. 20 #§ 316313) SIAN* 63 26 305 0188)6 3160102, @331011 shift* 652 8)32 26625 SO* 82013)1 82# 6 20. 30 0 SO* #8016 313) shifts 821 sSli IN QIOIEN* XI66 31625 82 8)6 as exi ao. d. 0316 31 (multifunction kcy)6 01160110 CN 6)6X1* 888)6 axNS 31188 65* XIIS 8N0) 8)2 01162 2 62 6525 »53l| 260) S) 6 2010) BO. 2X11 xN El # A)S X)2 XII0 3) 26 Al2(time-out)0)l 2SH X)S825 316 6525 868)6 30 0168 2 ggESOHE SB 6 SO. e. AlgXIOII 2SN 622X1 as 3162 8SS 4)820)06 2 SO. f. ®SB 316S 08) Et SSOliO BS 6825 852E® *311 #01 BO. Oil* B2, [XIS, SAVE] 3I6S BSS 850 AN5$ 85011 CD# tig 31631* A)g8)3ll #0) B O. CSMLab.@KIT g. aye beoiiai s°i@ sis aesoi yoioi ea. e beoiia-i hioieh stasia xig oil xise sit? oilaixi #aa xigoii xigaom ea. ey taxis y, resetjoi axis sixi e beoiiai t qiois xi a oil xiggji cie ssoiixia ehoiei BH(dumP)oii xig as a as Esoiixife axil siaoii xissife sas asm ea. h. s on a 3i* AHsai a one as si xisa yagoi aot ohbs aisxioiixi yoioi ea. ey, shift 3ie vst xigg yexi as xigoi ecu a xigs sit eaixi aa a, 3ixi oisoiixi shine yse g?si yexi as ase ecu esee axis §y oi xi a xi §2|bhoi ea. e smuspi sesi see eae xiseae, shine vsxi sse isxie amga shirtsia sxioii yea e aoixi yxiiaE* yeas oi ea. i. oia as 3iwoi xiy xisae gya yae axis ay sxi nn 4= aa. xian xis-y oisa #ye oh as oies aisxixi agt 4= sjxi shoi ea. 5 INTERACTION (EHy <3) 5.4 Menus (OH tt) 2.7 MenuS SEl 5IAI 2. 5 INTERACTION (SIEI^fl) 5.5 Form-Filling (S-g)^) 2.3 Forms* 8E15IAI2. CSMLab.@KIT B-102 sasss xnoisxia siai , oae xisai oioisoio seso oisyai saisoie s aisjo, a«si a si on aim saiw 4- an. sass xn 019 x13 mss, ssii, sans oi seso. sassoi ai safe Aiaag qioieili a a* sAi(marking)8ioi esxii 01 s/sais * aa eb ciioieiu owmoii sag« ois #9 =aas sio @:i3 52 s axioig# s 4= SOil BO. 5.6.1 General (SBMU) A!I¥AIW: a. SSSSS SSO 2S842S MgS 3HXIIS OXII» Sffltt III 3IES25 AlgSO. as assess sae assies aii a a oiSMt soia aoioi bo. b. aisxixi Aiag ogai 011 ali@011 cm oishsioi ess 4= a0101 bo. c. S3ES EElfflOliOIIB fell01 El OgjOlO 0113 S 6SI SEWS OIOIS25 5@S 4=. 213 @ES 3HXII3I 561510. d. SSSSS AISXI3I SBS tiSI a01513 4=625 XIIS32 @901 SS°| CUBES XII593 SOIO. 5.6.2 Manipulation of Objects (MISS) 5.6.2.1 Pointing and Selecting (56 §31 @Q|) 56S0IB 52!El21 BS SS OEBSIOI Oi01XII device)# AIS8IW 0 isaioi so #9 axis oisaisib ouiiGntphic xi b Xiioigfsoio. a OESaiOl 24» AISW 1313 Aisxia sae • oseaioisoiiAi sosoi xis aisb asoii3 aisxio os saoi seiaoii atm 01 ¥01 a S BE# 6H0I 5K3 AlSXiai @9 8X1 AlOiaj OISS SI ESS 4= BE# ios toro^roe eeio totems- eiYE ■ Kioto as lottiom a osiY *e Btesio eaioE nro ■ ■Oil (ohs iet=g eiYESS aaiotes Bo tes hob ictesio ■ Kioto tctxgtY • ■ns 101* is ictesio 5kioie bo Kin Kioto a Broun iss ere go • lots 15i flSIK SSIO 656 niosio Kioto less bbioid 551b ssb • 106 I0H8SIC 10010 to k lo to fa to n Kioto 6 • 51E1 KtllSK IsKtO toKIO® IOIEB5IO 101056 iS Step? tCKStY BSteSK gilEr HI ilflTB * Kioto BIY5 lOfeg ItoteO HaH2C ‘n OKS • '06 tOHSSIK =(ro, B0!pm)5K H bEc BOlYn Bill* ItoHYS IIOIBKStC to(™OJ)iolE5 IOIEBOIO HI m sand,no) tee g 1018810 ##E5 OR HI ioteteS - Rffi tE»E5 1 105 to roes ik io(Rto rhh )»ee sets s tieio iv ho sate bsb • 106 tOHSSIK SSIC BTS 6 S 138 K5 SO HI SIS 6 S IKJ56 SOxOSK 5rHA S fYIIOtelY)S 5 1558 Sab • ■ Ea -® :SHY6II¥ 10565 550 5HO tOS 55BI0 55@6 55 KSH8SI0 » 110 IB 6 SB 10IB BIOIEB5IO @H¥Kioto 5 KH8I5BC BSIOIB 1010 @6 5H8SI0 H9 @10 s(-»°™ no ”s+™q n°»s)@ tn «ei totxsmo 'goo loiiBg B56 biobeb io5 tones ik mas ss bo 6 tssas rotate i Btoto IE BIB 155 80 I5llg 6 a tEffiO BIYH SffiO KS 51100 BSIC • is tOHSSIK #56 513 Ho 5 EI9SK Iy S Ha USE 5510 S3 5000 110636 • 105 to Hi to# s3ESIM HCHOKStY to teas ■ ik He bh §5 steins stossic 5 tea IK lotscsa 55 5 no nroeioto - ■05 to«eitem siuiin isasi eroiK tsroiK sare s msais msio to iohy KStets ‘aKrosio sssas rotes a to id shoe • 10 is tone item ■ aiototoa 'OB lotoKKioiB f?io(wro)nm£ 7$ 3a =8 ‘EI8 10010810 (qomtimms |0B gfejg B8IC Hip? 8 'OB lOHSO^PlKP? *31# 4CHSI0 388 315 fiTSIOlO '= :SIY3IIY (teE ISSIOlO to IK) 'OB 10K)I5 4- SEP? *35B ICIX8IY XHOBS 83@ BE 081X030 3 'OBHSIX SiSoB BICE 85B Isa ID @5'OB 10010810 SP ii7ff B33B '=> 'Oio 10re bk 8 m sss eb ere Biore 10 eis ioob bice BIOS 53E8B lease XIKHXZS(@g) HI 10 'OB I0HSBIC EE BICE I535B P 'OB 10 Hi E IK SIEY 83 BE B83S KB 8 B8IY BBS 11038 B5B I0BEE '= ■OB 10HIKE KBSi 383 3515 te 3 'OK 338 RIO OICKID SSg II035B SO B35B C ‘OOC 'OB 10 KID BSE SIR 1103313 8 Hi BIS I* SBto ICIX8IY B :SIY3IK (1x5 15333) 'OB I0H8IY3 Bttfe 3IsH3B 13K3 EH3E I5IXSIY HYB KII0H3 Sin B10IB BEE @10 IX10IB /BEE • 'OB I0HS1YH KlSIsg 358H2C OSEiii 58IC I5E3 @10 IXIOE/BEE • 'OB I0H8S1Y SBHOl tete SSEE 88/1x3 BIX 1108 I0IGBEO B • 'OB 10H8SIY lYllOIOIISBEn BSE I0SI0 83 BEE I5SI0 IXIOIBI/BEE ,38 HCIS3IR IS 10 'OB I0H8SIY PYUOIOIESEO BSE I0SI0 @8 BEE log 10 IXIOIBI/BEE 83 • 'OB loHiSIY S3 EBiB HOE in @5 BEE I0IGBEO IsSIO IXIOIBt OBEE • @10 IX10 IB OBEE P 'OB I0HS8IY IIOES BE 3 I5BE 53EBB IQS IE,38 BI0B 38 B1SSIY BSI0 IX10IB II0BOBEE 010RUE • 'OB I0H8IYH 3.(£/l B5 EJOI°S«d)ai0IBI m IXIOIHE. BIX 10HE $ BSE 3IXI0IHE IOS *110 'OB 10BS BBO KBBB BO 10IB BBB IsIXIOlB 8 B11038 BOBO 5IXI0E OK) ICHloB B • 'OB 10Hi I0IEBED HO IX10 K B BB1C B131010 BIBB EIS I0H8S5 31X10HE OtO B1310IB S Bio 8 FOO tol0IB»EI3 B • c. aes oioies ‘*9(0pen)’sr 4= ym eta. d. # oioiss i!i§ ants oioiss °miB oishs - 4= as# snot eci. a. #se saiB! Qioiae medii a#snot at ih xisss axi* flciais usai b. sa# 0101 EH ah 001 g°ia AH9(format)0IU HS9(template) S2S E89B a a a qi oi eh a# xia a#oi as a#(Ah#oiLh giBS)OhiAH oi^ot xie = sh oh m. c. SEH# 0101 EH gJ4S E2h^S a# g 9 (scale)# XHISsHOh SCI. d. exn mcH#aa s#e Aieximi seaixi 4a saia gas aisshoi sci. e. EBUHj 0101021 »ja/eas III 6XH 48IIS 8SCHI 8 SB 4=8 889 #SE #AI 0080101 aim AISXI9 §21> 4- 2HCHOh ECh. f. X(S@ 010100 XIB 0 0*01018 AISXI0 @S2§ 88901 Oh SIS Sa# 4= g. can* oigaiffl 01010s 00*0101 a in ass sah § essie xiboi h. 0101 a e gjgtt m a an# 20a guts hhxixi ass a? ?s 9 a 84# •ten(zoom)# 4= ait aw# xngaiot aas 0# tiai snot eci. i. asaxn assit a an™ 01010* xisss xi#ans uHgsiai aim ssa tin a 01 u XIE 001 (54- 01010* 8S0II gtg>0! EAlal 4- 5001 SCI. CSMLab.@KIT INTERACTION (BIBIKS) 5.7.1 General (ffltiA)S) a. 5§5Sfe get 812 01 a# 4- SUCH Ot SQ. WI8SI3 A)§X)(occasional users)—1 2SOIO 2S(schems) SB @6|2I B2S) BEA! «28)Xlfe SO. b. 3)X)I 4S 3XIOilAHfe 080 S3B BIBS BSIIS 80)0)8 H§5g» HI58H0I BO. one sot, Efef task oil a ) s esi(step)O) ssaa steps i* ¥S£? saarn aoa, MAI XI g 3 01! AH B 08 BSIIS 58!8)SI 9SH STEPS!* iEHO) BOB §HS SAISHOt SO. c. ass 3010 gwo) S3* as sesss) asaoioi bo . d. sasgfe S3oi gfiB a a S3 was g*)6)sti saisho ) bo . e. aoi eh @39 x1011 sbhss ) as mi sasno m xiei ^e baish ^ohoi bo . f. 585§il E88t(help) *8@ 8«B ?ISMIAI @80)0 0)10 EHIAIXI, AIBS 88, 02*3101 25!, SH S°l tig 01! A)g£ 4= @0. g. A)g S)8B @@0) 85 010 ttSB @4-0 BSi E2I^B 5g5g» HIS8H0I BO. 2El2, 080 ggO) 080)1 3SB SI8B 85 010 @4= SgS 113 818 501 ttSB 3?0IIE 01* XHI5W0) BO. h. 5BHM Oil AIM 8 A)gX)0ll/d BBS HIAI8H0I 512 Bfiffl 850 85# 2A18H0I BO. 2 5S5S 0)1 AlXI8 028310183 ES6)@ 9 XIml HAiaCHOt BO. S3: ESS SlteSIL) ggO) S3 soil §8E(?)i @3 8)0) 585§i SEHLHfe- #S 9@ ea sfooio. 585IS S4-ata @3 ¥HIU 8 MSI 90)0 8801 B2B 9X1* OEUHSI 9W 9*31 COE) 585§i HAISHs ass A)SX) 9)58 #0)## g ti|S) aasi si-a^fe miAixioio. a. EBHg OIIAlXIte SB E3BS DBS 9 XIOil OOOOI BO. b. 585§S @3 983) @3 S)8B a SI 8S« ^OHO) BO. c. S2S/S22S tt IHO SUCH* 8J3W IH 8*15)2 9*)B S3 S)OIE* XHIS5H0) 80T-8 IDi@q*TOS 3 "OS O lOu -QI ra ioi. “(ttc 6) QI re fcU 0§ #IK) "OTo 33 leu: l!X @ 3 A AboS# rel0lt9 3P91X # re A 1C1X AlY O0193IK 31X b A3 5o3l lo ks fB AlClYlC-S iiYiefo K)i@ A3 A # lolcYi silnin "3 "Oi5 iomrs 3 #§3 ilnin 5o£ A15reio #(c)3## PYllOtefo re fo I0§S O 10 -m # 3 3 ■ors 33 moo noAAim 0333 IfeFy OlOAtefB OSS ‘OPS 33 EIYh IIOlxlY 15# id m lOH9ref5 SA3E3 "y :tl£ "03 iOK)BlY5 53ix3lY AltC AlXKOx ICO 15 SShd Id 3193A #11X0 1C1XS1Y ISf A3 IBM H0teM3A '! 'dii 40K>rS 3 S#3 iClXiiHY ianin A5133 §§i 3 kB re 10 OIOSS 1BA1C 15 fa S re lo K)i@ M 131 10H2SII-Y ema A19IY3 ElOfE C AII03E SH9B 1C I0# to H3I0IB 1BS1C AO HoAteA B\0\B "3 "015 10H9AE Siii5 A19§3 SS3 AOS refoHY AII03E 153 1X1913 3^0 019 33 Sre3 OES J "015 10000 1C33B3 IKJteS IXIYIIO A|K)3E SA1CS !0%I0 OOC "015 10HSIYS IIOIXlo A[333 totete B19A1C AIXlo diHin HB SteA OAS OOIOI0 "9 "05 lOHSHnEn IY3A AIM # lOHSteS #T2 §# H93 #IXIYIIO P "Oil INTERACTION <2!e$H<2) Feedback (BESS) 92|: eiebss Aiaxis see aiss axiste osoio. eiebss lhsoixili 2|5jgj 4- act. LH9 EIEBSS SICK Stilll MSB sf §)(*£,', ssf> =lfl S)S $19 gtxiat 4= as as snism ass eiebss xiioi ssa bbkxiais, aaeaiois sail *)■ asEs exists as saieo. M^AtW: a. Aisaoi ais# $ as 9ehxi as ais# 4= stse stag ohaixiu ebhaixh ss ebei §* seen oi eta eibeu ess a a a ais# 4= ass haioHoi bo. b. Alia01 Aiea a uis ais # s as ra Aiiaa @s bsaiboili Aiiaoi assi ais xise 9 ehxi a ra sixi xiseli ass erne ais # 4= as xibsb ei esses staoi bo . one eoi ais # s acts oiiaixi * baisixiu behsaibs saisixiu aeto* eehaixii sens sois s aa. c. aisxixi auisHoi it Alias xisoi as ssons exit Aiiaoi 999 a es ease seises aasaioi snot bo . a. Alia ets • ssAieoi 2$ oieoi sea an bxh Aiiaoi 9992s $is see seizes aasaioi snot bo. • aisxis sss aaisisal 2$ 01901 soxto aisxis #xi #9* xiei# s as 9 Etta an Aiiaoiu ss asosts 01 a sasi xiaisse saisiosoi bo. • aisxis Alias xnais. sen xioasoi it gsons aa gsoi xiseixi asxi ■atas'oiu -xteis’ ss aiaa sbaie ' ss dhaixiu zsaet oioises axioHoi act. eta? eh xi Aiyoi 15$ oiew gs aisxiohxh beai staot eta. 60$ 019 $31# gsons as aibs xissas sses aasaioi snot eta. •15$ 019 ifi@ a oil aisxixi agsHot # gaoiis xtaiagoi so #011 XI AIS 01 LI iSIS AIS XI OH XII a at SI XII HAI8H0I BO. • aisxis agas ss# ant xtss oiss gsegs sssis eiebss xhsbhoi BO. •HSIS S90I SiHSaa 93 SOU BiSSSS HAISte EIEBSS AISXIOHXII xhs 8ho > eta. • Aiiaoi 3>¥5I 9 EHsLI SEIXI XISB IH AISXIOIIXII XI3011 08 015* #0 01 eta. e. EIEBS BHAIXI • SS 4^X19 EIEBS OHAIXte EAISS SCH2I OSXII LIEILH01 BO. • EIEBS OHAIXte Alias 9EH SSI* SSBOHXH #2101 BO. CSMLab.@HT • HE# OllAlXIfe A1SXI31 AIBiiOILl CIS SAIS S58101 HE# OH A] XI* 6H*161X1 8H01E as# #8 61X1 898H 5 CHOI BD. #01 LI 8#g ffloHOl ea. • A16X131 DHAIXI* S 21525 XHEI81E# 01010 XHEI2 62 miAIXia BLH3HL1 XHEl 2#2 XIS HE#0l SSEIOIOl 80. f. EH HAI • 8952 SE31 01 El 01X1 S HH BXH BE 8 EH* BElSfe SSOl 11153 0101 eel. • ay Aisxia 2# on #ae *2131 a si 8 eh sa heb xi # saibhoi sib #gi Aisxia 9532131 01010a eea xixis agoiife beai baibhoi ea. g. 01010 9 52 LIE# • Aiigs a#2ts aoi xheisss ai#8 ss 858 nis#25 a Bern ea. • 01010* gj#oife sa Aisxiy ss #501 ae he ## xhbbhoi sib sises a#* eh one 5 si a# rani a a seal 01 sh 01 ea. • Aisxai 9#e 01010 stoi xheiaiboi atoi sea ass on 8 a eh one aisxkm as ss« 50101 ea. • 01010 a# xiei3i ygaiexi s#3i assiafexmi @s maixis baibhoi ea. • 2552s xh ei a 01010* e#5ioi a# sis 21x110112 01010 a#oi 3552s oi#mxi@ xi52S 01010* a#* as a #825 oissioi baibhoi ea. • A16X131 01010* 958 81X1 as XH El * 51E1B # EH S^'BafS A1SX10IX1 a Ei 01 sib, 01010 a#s #ai stssioiot ea. h. SI015XI21 HIE# • a xhioi3i2 5801 as he## sbbhoi ea. • aaeaiomiAH his #s xiichsxibi oisb a Been 50101 ea. • Hist 8552 8S(il —olb 2EI)fe 0X1 53S0IL1 El012 S Sfe a xi Eioi xh 3i e oi# aiss mi xii sa cHoi ea. • 3i53i* Aise a ei oise esoi lieilixi as in as sehb asoi aasia. • ±HS SMBS #2 # 552 XHI01 8 EH01 08 HE#0I XHI53 0101 ea. SB: a. HE#g SXH 8 EH SHU 52 2052 @201 CH& 35 62 SB* LI El LH 01 ea. b. A1SX131 52 5ise #28 3l«eaB B8tt 5 231 EHS0I A15X12 #201 010102 BSCH! me SXH#2 588 S 32X1* BAI6H01 ea. c. £20018 XHI 01 31 (Momentary controls, tHBOl WEIXIfe S22 XHICHBfe SI 031 @#)fe XHICHolfe 5201b HE## XH15BH 01 eel. HI 0 XI #8 XII CH 31 (Continuous-operation controls, bus sicHBfe xnoi3i 5#>fe xi##2 he ## s5sh ot ea. CSMLab.@KIT s it e is « £ S H m a r» 5 ° S « IW Status INTERACTION i m * nr » W 12 % i e aa Si IS I n f o r m a t i o n am ‘ c 2 t 1C(dE3)hY«B15iY l> | ® nbhs (21 g # is nr (ti'EHSS) El o> t 3##) e « a 1E3IC ja rir e s g i? ^ * n I ^ rF sioitciom AC ! e ? 5 5 oe r» « E nr 12 gff > is I s 111! i \> HH ’i I o c HJ I oi s » ! nr s r; S nr s» ® i5tis3)hYiYBisjYS E -c- :iziY 10 5 INTERACTION (0 B 5S ti) 5.10 Error Management (2# @BI) 5.10.1 Error Detection (2#f@XI) 39: 2# sxia s#°i ssai sdi @e ¥eom. AII¥AIS: a. AlgXIOII 2J=> 2#fc 3ISB SBI Al an 0I if XI SICK 3»e API 011 ¥38 ¥ 50I0I 09. b. !»■ ¥S8 I0 93 H0H9 2#« ¥38131 9 oW XIIOWXIBIg @9 tt ¥ 5 CHOI SCI. SH: a. a# as yes easi ssi ¥gsis ¥9oi oma 2#* onyena Aian°i 2# s-xisia yeas xnsawoi an. b. 2# @a oii 3H libs xnch Aian011 ¥3#b stoi anasis ra 3 sue xnesnoi en. ¥ 3ixi g=fg xianai as hiss mom 3-1 n exisia yyoin. e n 2#n yxia ¥3011 cue Aias #2313 aeaxi @e a01 a. 2# @aia 2# yxia axis chxiisis 52s y#oia a an. =. 2# yxi* =se as* ana ¥2 922s aisxioii hish xwstf ¥ acs# snot an. rasa aisxixi sxne g ¥ you sis gas axie umasixi $e ynoin. 5.10.2 Error Correction (2^ 33) AII¥Afgf: a. A HU XI gjnOIIAl 2#3I #3510, =AI ¥3tt ¥ 0OIOI BDI. b. oia 93119 axis Sion 3ign sani 2#* ssms sse ¥ 001 ot an. c. si an ¥u xianss ngjsp a chi 2#* yxisica sssis xisoi xiisaoioi sn. 2#3i a# yaae xisxia eee yxisi 3i ?ish anas sxi siuDin 2#* sAisi3i ana a01 a an @29 oixinon saibioi 2#* #0 5191 8 H0I SCI. d. a¥si3i as ana as Aianoi xis sasia xisa xiisshoi so. e. 2# #2011 SSS 2@ era 21 32* AISXIOII 3|| EAloHOI Sn. f. e@ ainoi =se ssLi ¥#ae a noil cue 03 s aaspi a aw saisi as era3i xnsanoi sn. g. 2S9 ¥3S e«a(Enter)3l* ¥SS 321 tiOl @#e A|gX|9 nSOII 98H ¥S5CH0I SCI. AISXI9 2E 2# 33S 380no|L| 2# 011AlXIS EAI8I0I0I CSMLab.@KIT B-112 h. onaixiau os °ies mss a# toil a ajiis oisw 4= sis [iia,backup] JISS HISiHOt so. i. xisss jisoii 21 e sss ‘sisaJKUndoyjiss xiisbhai xtsoson 21 & ¥^is sae AtgxtJi sss 4= %om so. xisss jibs mamiois* @51 SIS atiSOilS AlgBHOl so. j. hi sat a- ass 011 a 4-3x1 sis ssa^es ossis, §a ayoi getauii asEioiiAi s xi 0 xi as a xisxui amm masts 0x1 sass 4- snoot mo. S2: SM XIXII21 S# IHsoil AtSXUt 3#S a 4- as CEH SS@ SSOII CUSH gjys sjisis as aisxioiijii esoi a 4- sio. cnmss aisxui stag saw 4= as# m 4,E ao . 5.10.3 Error Management for Form (S°l 2# @51) 32|: 2#2J @5lfe AtgXtJt 2#g BAS812 2* 8BS8IJIO 2#* SS8IS 58 XIS8IS 2S 2ID1BO. AH¥AISt: a. Aisxis sxtaoio as aioiohah mi 2** 43# 4- snoot so. b. gjyaon a = exiws atoi ays ss Aiaas Atsxto am bso sss oissias w m 2# ohaixis hlbjio sis a-ae stas a ra 2# ohaixis slhjio 2#xt at a son jiah » oisais 4= aa. 5.10.4 Error Message (2# OIIAIXI) All ¥ Alt): a. 2#2| Eg ■ 2# 011 All XI fe SSOILt XII @21 SS2S BSoBOt mo. • ays a son 2#ji axiom 2* chiaixi * eaisiw -msstsii snot so. • S* OIIAIXIS Atsxt 09121 SJiotfe ms# EI8IEI 3243012 sasss ssmot so. b. HAI CSMLab.@KIT • Alglia fe3 3| Bfeolfe OH Al life @#813 ¥981311 feggJII 2930101 eci. ■ aisxpi 2# am# in 2# ohaiiib cisaii baishoi §ci. c. HH XI • 2# mi Al II31 HAia ¥ 9IAIfe 2#3I 3fe 91 II Oil SAI390I SICK • 2# mi Al II21 IIAISefe 2#3| W4SB XISIOiLI 2#3| 3fe 3 9 011 LIEHLIOI BCI. d. 2# 011 Al II21 #« • hieies 2# miaiii: tiiniais 2# chiailife ciioiei 39* oias in baishoi aci. easaon EAiaa aisiib smsim aci. • cifes 2# mi ai 11: cisa 9 feea iihib sue eaisiai am cis 2#miAIII* aisw #2 3Cl. • Cl 4= 2# ffllAUI: Cl 9 Sh IS3 2#3I 09321* 3 9 2#* U El Life OIIAIIIB 01 a 31 EAltt 4- 21 Cl. ■ 321 2S mi Al II: CHOI El L| HI 3 31 01 El 3222 39S 3 2# mi Al II CHI AH 9 8161 3as BAI8H0I act. • 32 mi ai ii : aioi a ci 9g °j9ai 2S3i miss ramifc #a use 32 munis eaib fe a ci. ■ sa 3iai 11: 38901 aioieia fetioiLi Aifema a3mi sum a fe as m 32 mmiib Elis # 212 a9 mi 3 6 #as a2# 4- act. e. 92 • 2s mi ai life lisa mot fen mi 2#* eaishoi see ■ 2# mi ai lit eaa see §#simi Hiasnoi si 2 ss 3i#a anys ass HIAIoHOI 6El. ■ 2S mi Ai life gj68a see mssmecife ana a hi a hi a mi 36 gsta see msmoi aci. f. feS • a a mi aaa ™aoi senna s#a 2# mi ai ii • asm 01 aci. • 8fe3l as 39S 4Si ID2111 EAimOl aci. • 39oi esa ¥sa fese 4= aaot aci. g. AlSIia ¥986 9921 96S 11022 91133 01 512 2#* Xn 8 9 8131 LI Aigna aee #asife asoi Hisaaot aci. 5.10.5 Command Interaction Errors (9 S (H 516 2#) HI¥A|S: a. gsta 3EI3I* ¥E3| 2 939* fe3tt fe a90| BC|. b. 339 3901 a 113II &2 fed 922 ¥98B 3 AISH3I 4§S fe 3901 6C|. CSMLab.@KIT c. mis tisjoiu at gam gaoi ?^ae 3? ssa a a mi as sna Dll A! XU HAISHI gSS $1 El 51XI WOIOI SCI. d. 2#m et#gm e xiiasa swe 2# diiaixib B#tf in ouaixis mi smsei a a 31 sAisnoi 5i2 a miAixia a 2 won aiasMi eaishoi a a. e. sei asm • wag gama sag bedim 2#a axiaa 2#a gs xia* tiSoiau 2#xi as gam ws ami aisxixi bssmi so. • shei samoiiAH 2## bssiedb 2#xi as sa-ie a a shad aaeaioi sum bo . S3: a. ¥$ Aisoi ose as msarn ss ssaaoiiAi aisw a wo. b. 2#e aasim sei game aisw a as# axixi x-nsamoi eo. CSMLab.@KIT B-115 5 INTERACTION (Sagti) 5.11 On-Line Help (SOB Sgi) 5.11.1 General (SBlAf®) SEIE Eggg HBEgOIL! H|Eg <4 EH LI E# 0IIAIXI2IB O# gO^B AISXI O0|E 9S0ICL AIBSOIO O0ISS32I SEHg 3S2I USE! BOH Id 0!gTil AIS8H0I axis Easy. AII¥AISb a. A!SI! XI0IES 0083101 HE QS 0101 El H E@HS 9EHE ajSS EHI HA! H CHOI &y. b. she hoie gse aisxpi as 4= as# Eggs hisshoi bo. c. SEE ESB • AISXIS SHE ESttS SOI S 4= 210101 BO. • SEIE ESttE AlgXITI ‘BXI’Bg SUJIXI SIS Oil OESaiOl HE 01 BO. • aisxixi s#e E#e sw m ess xiss xises lieilioi eo. • #3 EOE ESSE BBS! XIE! BAH Oil 00*3101 tt 4= 50101 BO. • aiehs gee seie eiioieiei saoi e^ie oe ooie aiss xhssioi AI§X|°| @301 ego E3S E210I BO. • SEIE 010 E @#S Eg TISB @2121 Eg TISB SSH 8H2I AIES2I s4I ext# S5tt E EE SSi SttSHOI BO. ■ SEIE EgBS §g HS31S2I = 301 OIL!El AISXI2I »g SEHE 01 BEE ge h oioi bo . d. ESI QS • AISXIO S3: aisxixi sgg miai xi oil sea a @ echoi eo. CSMLab.@KIT B-116 5.11.2 Access and Return (£8® 853 SSOPPI) A#¥AIS: a. BS8I3 S5SS a<32£ HOI ES®OII S5t 4= 21001 BO. b. chb Esaoiu ossaioi boies osa aw sse osBaioi shoi bo . c. AI8XI0IO1I XI4S2S ESWS Algffi ¥ 21S8 S1&I0I BO. d. ESW2I A1S0I SAItetl 3?, ESBCOI AIS AISB BEHAI- OS AlgXIOHOI 81001 BO. e. EsygoiiAi mn mas $e 4= 21001 eo. f. asm aeooDi • SS HS33 LH Oil AH E8W0II S2S 4= 210101 SHE ESB1 2S S25 2S0I iv¥ 21 CHOI BO. • SOB E8W0II S58IS H»S OS @S BEOSSI SilsHOI BO. • sob essoii sasisai b axis aisxio aibbhoi si 20 os sob anm AlgSIE^ SHAIB B SO. g. ESS 0101 SO AIS3I • £881 OIOISS SIB Oil HHXI8HW 813 £88# fiSt 4= 21S 283PI 21010 BO. • oa Alamo eg ssosohai oi -oiso ess sis sbsoi 210101 bo . h. Ale SOI21 S21 DIE £881 011 At SS ¥ 210101 BO. i. ESSlOHAi AISXI3I Xl¥ B id SIS SOIS AIXIS S@aa BW» BI58H ¥0101 BO. 5.11.3 Context Sensitivity (61$ SBE, MI¥MS: a. ESSfi 28 B 31X11 011 sag 82* HAI8H0I BO. b. ESSIS 28 B B»0I BS8IB AISXI3I 2SB LHSOI S9BX! *10818 ooissae a Aim ¥ 210. c. AISXIAI E§Si 28810 01 B E8H8 AISB B EH Oil CO El Ad £881# 02*9101 8H0I BO. S3: a. gaol gJSAI 2#3I 218 OH g SOI Oil BBS E888 SAI 819 3 SS0I9 3183 asb ?2u ae as e CSMLab.@KlT 5.11.4 Wording and Style (H@2I Sail) AIISAIS: a. XIS SHE sat S SEE EI1> Dll AH! XI2 AISOII BAIeHOt ECI. b. OHAIXIS S2, BSE SEES El01 210101 ECI. c. DIIAIXIS SSE BOIS BESHOt ECI. ¥S»ei g§g BS 0II2I2I 61 #011 CH8HEB AlgSHOI ECI. d. SSE EDie xia §y sis a goi* aisbhoi eci. eoiu emoi* aisshme b aci. =. Eg# sat Aiagj aisxie gam agon he sssixn xhisbhoi eci. f. SEE E§i2| AIS6E 8 BUS BOIEI 2# E|8Kpixd)2 40%CHI 8HB8IE CHtijS SXI8IM0I ECI. S2: a son ma see @om xi*gE* aissich aisxie sa eaon was Etas as* ee sici. 5.11.5 Content (3 E*) AIISAI#: a. SEE ESSS XISOil Eg* SOI01 812, XIS6E Sat SSXIXI Algtt E si oi oi 5iE, sai on ah aaa aaxi sichoi si 2, sai 011 haie a oiee esmoi Si CHOI 512, ESSE Ht^°J 31X11* E IS SIS B XII EE SS8 SttSHOI ECI. b. Eg#S XISB XI AH IE aeisae HAI8H0I SCI. c. Eg#s aisxiei 2soil eesis ass sees xiisshoi eci. d. SEE Eg#8 Cl BE E50II EE Eg 62 SEE SEi CISggiOl 8H0I ECI. e. SEE Eg#S 2# oilAlXIOH BBS 6551 Eg#* XIISB E 210101 ECI. f. E Eg#S LHSOILI ESSOI LIEIti SI E Oil DB BBSS XII = S HAIW E 2iC|. g. see es#s es sxixie *a as e sichoi 512 sae axis a exhi ==e ■ E SiOIOt 512 2 g^OIIAH AlgXIXI E EXII* aUB E Si0101 BCI. h. SEE ESSS BgSS* HA18H0I ECI. i. asoi • Eg @ a OH Oil EE SEE g*3l EES OlStt E EEOI ECI. • Egsg S66E SEI5 SEES SEES SE6E 380121 BEE S#E 2831 SSE SBE* Oil AIS HOISOHOI ECI. • aaoia seal aa xisb 9901 g#on cub aaoi aoioi eci. • SEE Eiis XISXIOH tga dse aas xiisshoi eci. CSMLab.@KlT B-118 j. she seas Qsa as Esa°i aisbb s&aos eo. • ess cisaaioioti is wa • Egaon as ye 3i- aaas asason me aa • eh s hi uitiiaiois a a chi as as • aa sesoh as ssa asms anon as oison as «s CSMLab.@KlT APPENDIX C EVALUATION ISSUES LIST ON INFORMATION DISPLAY ON CRT - SCMSEI - s DAIDD viewing distance EtikEE ^SSi M 4 2Jb 4^ »B|. ADIE, AfAlk visibility CHS@X||A1 EDDD SOIk §E. ^SOIU 61# E SDD 333X1 ESOIU BBEE S3£|k 3AS Q\ LID. EDCHOId gradation #31i # a E #BD SlEEE DDUk #3 kSf(M) 3EB A1D3EE BtA|°| D All Oil D til El 3. BXl: §Sit! HE3I §(H EM Dll tt 2.7.S.9 32] S3 Aik 91 #3 Aik# k^A|9|A| BE1 91. AH2Jg S#D(PC)0I1 D £1X1 5~20AHAi EilblD 9# Ek kBOII ?lx|§H DED FI, F2, F3 SEE 5AI3D SAD. Aik 91k EI3EE EEEgjDD Dk 9 1 (programmed Junction key)£XI, §§ DHE3IDU SS XIIAll Ek A^SXiAl eSl AikDk D E S SOI Li Aik# D 91011 WkSiD D|£| A|2]A| 91 EE, S1D2J Aik 9ID# DEED SEB 91 Ek SA E 9 1(Alt key) k DE 9ID E^SHXj kSEEW kS@ d#DE 6SA19|k 01 AfgED. exl: 3k#d EES1 ED A|g SEE primary 3.2.1 3D SE Alki^S, AlkD 2.3.5 3D S2 LHkSXi AIED OfEHS LHDAik D^(Tfj) SXi (g, p, y k) W, D#BXf ©§MH| kAH. OOID k#Dk aai gkAi 2AS# LIE! SD. ®S(0). Ek M 9 xloilXI OiED ExfAi SAk 3© @EDD(no-operation)D US EES E0|k E. SxE §Sib HSSi #D DOICHZLli diagram 0IE3, Bk3D US# ED513H1 AID3 &ES 0|g 5H BkslAID AimD d, §2S E3@ DEk 5i m doissu ;box EM AigXi £19Ell 0| D(GUT)0|IX], AigXiEkD DE EH §13X1 BSOIU DSS DOfSOIAI AIDS' Ek Eg H EESdi ddd EAiEk mmm ia°i be. chib # CSMLab.@KIT C-l oi, aisxip chs i emm sms aiese asm lieilhe xiiois sssife poigsa PE# si goii sAisiCH Aigxi2i ygi sehip . m, ebheh § EH (draft mode)2| &J ±H 2! X| E3H§E(high resolution) &]±H ejXI, gSH S EH (land scape mode) 3 Si AH &I XI, SgSI S EH (portrait mode)2| °i±HeiXIS A|@XI3| SB 61 E# ro. bp ep between-paragraph 1.1.4 §2] §2 spacing ecny between-word 1.1.2 §2| = E spacing CHS, LHtil contrast BSE) EIS P3|2| xIOI L| §E *XH:NUREG0700 C1I0IH EE data field An area of the display screen reserved for user entry of a data ttXl: MIL-IEDBK1908B EE SEE utility window 3.2.7 §21 ebhe , m;i drag (DSSQ neHPlE(CG)OilAI CHS E#0|L| @E# ®0\M 35S AHSE SCH BHSWd SIB§21 & §E OIIAf ae SEE 0I56IE a. ©□IBE2J WEE ¥E AHE OIBES 0IE6IE %. DIB E XIA|XI5 CHS! CH§# ¥|0i| B|x|A|3|E 0IBE21 ti\ EE ¥E *HE OIBEE 0IE5KH E LH§EE OIEW 4= SIP. gxH: §E#E 2511 ECH CIE#2II0IE§EE display element 121 LHS 6"2! ami label 1.2 §2 &E B|EE PE list boxes 2.6.7 § 2| Sh22 BliyiEE CHIAfXI request message 3.3.1 §21 S2 SEE window PCH mHH bar charts 1.6.7 §2 S2 OilVr SE menu option 2.7.4 §2] #E DHEtil menu bar 2.7.6 §21 g2 Oil Al XI til message bar 3.1.5 § 2| SfH SB command S^EPI #§ §SS 4S5IE^ 5H= §2|@ B§E0i. BxH: MIL-HDBK1908 CSMLab.@KIT C-2 as? as shape coding Shape coding allows objects to be compared and contrasted based on similarities and differences in their outlines (shape). exie 39 spacing □is mimic 1.6.11 #15 brightness WOI @011 SOISSSMi 2015 A|39 CSMLab.@KIT C-3 p-0 lEH@-qB'IlVS3 BB JS iSI* IClSIYH IK)to 181855 5o#35 IS T* B^ip'Bis SICE iiia SSS BIYK 5SB Bff£ 'KIHO BSKSSteS BI8IYH BS BID IBB A Bfc I3BS S3 BBS to 10 IS BIO '33 tOKI ht issm as ictgBie-iois ss« wsre a re to * lion KB BIO 15BBS KYIB(03)Btann BSB@ 'IDB8IY 10513 ISMS to to 9 dn-dod) 5i5 Ba =|Y KIY IDF, 13 ID HOBS 5KIYga ‘(«opm« gmddepBAo) 3B 68 BID BID IYKE IC3B 1533 ‘3 3 SKS 18BID 3 SHY ID310 HOBS KtotD IIOSC 55 'IDIo B m@ 10 K K to 10 HO SB 18 iDlCISBto-ID w 5HYIYSIY 13® PHO I0IY9IY HYtolS CI8S5 ■ 106137 WHY IDAHO IS IK a 333 te S3 '13 re A BlYH =(S|y :.«iu )S IDIOB* BID ISAS m s S3 res bid lore non 3S re to isms 533 ISAS SBI8 SHY 11069355 ISIvS 3IS 'BS ISB reiY bss wsre re mre* ess hobs iyiioioiy SSHC55 SISteS I-YBI8SS BBS IYH BSB® «°P=!« *53 (toe S5H BBSS) DDseiY 35io res iss V '$ '% HOB KIM IYII00 IYiF ‘KltcZ HYII0V SB 'K biosio sere css lores 8 * is(ii4*) biy hyiios re RC55 ‘5loss |5(DU3rara)are |3(Mqt!pdB)agg '(T Kims ere siasa lore siy hoiys lore ishc * A,i,,q!pdmoo s(ts)b,b GTS ISB 6TE uooiuoiwu BI0I0 Bto 'SC SIS H0I8B eiBS HYB ISBrelY 539 sissre •loss ID CIS to K SHIOIH ron=« Blio esse Ammo. (DQIOIH SSOIIS #S #2| S>£i S0S SUB|XI fflll qioib -i Bm sx |(dte )U mioia $is s& sxkdce ) 0 EB1# SSEB SSKM #@W 4= 2AE EB0OIU Haiasi #. 0| e 2JDI2J SEE HH0OIU 5EI!£J 021 0# ee sit tiiusiE #eoio. SS: #ES0¥ ESS SCH 01# mi# tear-off menu 2J.5.7 §2| &H XH## refresh rate SUQOII U&Ub S0S #X|6EI 9I6H, IS #0011 S XiSEE ELIE-1 50011 SXf 0S B#0h SUE $#. S #e ssss(crt) soil 0# 30H°i axiemis EE s XI- BJOI SUE-1 5021 0i giSAIUEEW LtOUmi £1 EQI, 021 AI0O1 #51 SEI BlSOil 0##EE S xi 0§ Eoi such s#s so. xh ##oi 60HzBlE %g SX1S01 1M 60S S Xi gS SU e 0# s\mm xh #boi #### S0S #¥#sioi #LK sssi mxis cbp, sseu ess mss# 01021 msss 0# computer-based CHS A] Egj. procedures #S: NUREG-0700 Rev.2 mx\m, PBP, ESS SiHS mss, CBP S2 04UE Sxf# paper-based §SE precision ^l#(#B^)51E 0BS SKcMI ES6IE #¥S| §5 XII CHS controls S# operation #0A| pripheral vision neutral 6^1 MOIOII 2ih S^M =S. direct manipulation 5.6 #21 gE chunking 0 #S2| S 3 (chunk) 2i 61U SS 091 E EE 0# S0O|B1E §a. mis sen s on 2j ±x\m sue oiesie seek se U 2101 0E 0CHE UEU ^E0 U SIS ±XI@ #0 W # 5ltt. mb m± checkbox 2.6.6 #21 212 CSMLab.@KlT C-5 BAIW Dll tt cascading menu 2.7.5.4 §2j gfH 5HEOEI 5# category SS ESS SiJEi XHBB G||0|Ei2i2| SD. exH:MIL-IIDBK:-190SB 3UH cursor BE 3XI01IAI Of B EXHE m#B3m SJ^Alii El XI# EAIB EH AHS5HB 715. OfB BgPIOH/Hb 5HAIS OHS Dim 4=E 21BU, [ffxll^SE AHBBOI SHB. B S3!e! 3HEE EXHB ElXI# BEE EAimXU S Af^SSi B Aim OK SBBEHXB 31 X SB 3E, XI-31 BEH ElXI, BSB AUBE S HI2 E#BE BS013| El5H '3H#BE' 3|## 3HXIB 5HX All oi B5EX mbxi mm me be aiich sxpi m B. 01B mmBE £015#, #E@, #0| SiBCH bbh5| Bmorni Aimmci. contents ©SEIDIBW EEBSW# ^l1 HHCHI ESE §X|1H (i©ih»)U #3 me 5ah. cd-rom boieb me meidicioi bhe?iioi# wmsee @ a si ahsbok S5iu sb ss ettmoi mss B. BBB se 5AH# AH 5. B#0| MgSfE 5E A| BB dISOI A232, 5AH MB EBE3H 2B33! ehe on oi as #01 bb. behx ahsxph xneeoi 01 is =E BE SIBOIB SB, MSB me EAHBE ^SSHB =E#m EB5 30| BE1 E|(contents library)# AllESHE AimOlB AH ^((contents provider);! ESBB SiB. es ms(CATv>oiB mes bbbcvod) # ui BEBS m El 01B Of SB Alls AfHIBE CD-ROM EH OISOILH BXIS HIBB #91 EBB91I0I3H Xti]5°| WB0I3H E|3| EHE0||, EBOIBOI 5BB¥-I|0I£H XtilB m B#BB OIB# SCH. 5AH: SBSB BE5H #0f control bar 3.1.7 SB #-]% 3S coding ewoiB em ^ me be mm sms ahsbb SB# BAloH# AI5SK SXH:I1DBK-1908B combo box 2.6.7 SB size coding 331 3gS SB# 33|E 3HX1I# b|BS(3lB 015 3H# 8H3II m aoiB. CSMLab.@KIT C-6 S Xd: NUREG-0700 E10IS ti\, title bar 3,1.1. SHI S4 S2 XII g HAfg US 3d template ©CHS EE0|Ld AM Oil/d XIE AliSfe 7IE §g. S XI 7ilEE(spreadshcet)OI1A| gg QIOIEd X| 9 S 9|SH HSj StSSd ?51 EdB 01 WH AdgXM GI01EIS BME sd0 gs# mw# a01 =d ojiojo. @301# ES30EHIAI XdE Adg5|7| 95H 019 §5H B e nsoiu oioixih ] aged any. ©AIEiJ SSE0I1 Afg£IE Oim## S§5|7| BE# 7|SS| HE EgdS nd BS XI. ®XIE AdgEIE SSOiS HIE X-ISSH BE 9EE. §i OIIE 2.7.5.8 SSI pop-up menu 2.7.5.6 §S| g3 EHy, XII CM Ed XII0171U LIES0IOIS AlgGdE# £&5fW 2KHBE E. »XH: NUREG-0700 BOiS S.6.2.2 SSI @xd deviation ^ XI EM E5J2ISI XlOI aeja pointer CDSSH HEHMOILf §E xdBlOIIAI OIE QIOIEd X|X|| 9 01 LIE Gi0]E|7| XdSEIOl 2JE 71# gESI 91X1 EE EES UEILHE BE (variable). XIAIXIE 3 QIOI 9011 cued 7|g SEE SSEE mS5l3 M (deallocate)# E £1211 EdU. (DSS0 30t#E(CG)O||A! DIEE #S| £J# EEE XII CHSIffl 5I0SO1IAI ElXl ssoi 71E# §i XISSIX U Eg# XIS5IE Ql AdgSIE, sl#H2l BE 110 S SI 71 S. SXd: SE3E HEsd gCH S2jg, 9|X| XI § pointing AlgXPf 1)9 3011 Ad #S 91 XIS XI3 6IE E. QIEEU LIXIEI0]Xd£l ^E Bg 3X|E SI03SJ SxdlE 3g5d E 091 #01 91X1 XI@S| OIH3 ^gOll EtdLK EE 5.6.2.1 SS| 33 1.1.9 SSI 33 5, AM form 2.3 LHS S3. 1)AIS,2)S 2.5 SSI 33 ¥-A| tHS push button 2.6.4 SSJ S3 CSMLab.@KlT C-7 ga# CHI tt pull-down menu 2.7.5.3 §£| S3 2.2.1 LHS S3 prompts ©aiehoi am ssoiu ohaixi, as Ai#xi2i sss somw stdia 5i%#m a ^xkhi ma diiai xi. ©AIEB'OII as sg aXf(element), QB SIOH w a%#s A^gxman ## e. prompting 5.7.2 §£i srn hotspot ©aomaaM =M uioiiaj aoimsafaoimaag m H)gAt mss# aaga owie, siy # BA. s sasm 321 sss EE SAI 5# ae sai ui2j ae see sasm sisoii s Aims asoi oi^asa. @omie2j §#e gsoia agE xiaixi 5 #§s s a gxia moi cmaai s a on aa as a eaoi oisaxi# §#E.i ss. SXH: SBSa SS# #01 HE between-lme 1.1.3 §5 S3 spacing sa, ass, aa format @0I£I § 5H S X^2| UHX| # S#2| #x|: ES, m sa oion 5HS§a. @■0101021 xiaoia a# ai# #si xm# ass xi as eh a ms 21 33s sea. @a§ s-ahs asm eh mas sahs a# oia ss, Ea aga, se^ sss #m aia #xig sa # xii axisa sgs a. #5 luminance ©laitilSOlU #2| SA| SlSBEgEI SA^S B12] SA121 as. gxiiaeg# eeoi axis gsa &OI(brightness)£H ti|Ha # CHS^S# §§HE A|# XI- aa as# sea. chsoi 3# 0, ¥i0°sva s# ssoii gas son #Ai@ e o, g^jgoj §5# §215101 %a. OUIM S£(7tf) s on ^ sea# sai oiiuxioii s am, aui s#2i sass as Eoia. #321 h # e#e cd/m2(saa/AiisaiEi)oia. 30 a S 0§tilMM(milli-lambert:ImL = 3.183cd/m2), g MS tHIMM(foot-lambert: 1 ftL = 3.426cd/m2), U M(nit:lot = CSMLab.@KIT C-8 Icd/m2) 091E MS@CK C2)^°l g 5fU°J SE(lightness £E brightness). mn-. ssa gO) ENTER 2f!Ei ENTER CHS A|Eg2j EW SE 0101^EH U EES g# EOIIAI g±10S OIS6KM 9IOIE-IB S^AIU E, ^ EX)# 51 ei(key in)5H) 0 # Sm°| fXH SE ES 2| gj^OI SSH&ES- X-iBI gxlOil ES5H ^E 5|. Bi±H m=?\ Exm BIE 512} SE 5IE# 5)Xli si a. Human System Interface HSI VDU VDU visual display unitE) 2,lXf SxH : NUREG-0700 CSMLab.@KIT C-9 A| X| S fi OJ A| *=j7MaaA*g£ 9944*aA9aa *eaaA)4* 34419 : 349 934* 7J4 44/44 914449 : 94* 4*44 *4 4* 49 43443 : 7H33 9*Z4 34 3/}4*9 4# 9? OH) 4*494 % 4 * 9 (***44 4a) -a 3 4 4% 994. 4*3-. 344(44 ***94#a). 4*#(D&T) 4 4 3 #4949 * 3 4 43 4944 *99 20054 24 934*4 4 4 4 310 p * * *(0). f ( ) * 7) 21.0cm x 29.7 cm #ai4* 2004 449 *34 44 *4(0). 439( ). ( )* 4444 *a4 ** *4* *aAi 34 44 43 ***44 4a 44 3* *4 (30034 43) 334 43 34 44 4a#3 9** 4a*34 % 3m*& 4434 33 3344 *9 443 Ai*d 4444 34 a4 443a a4. 4334 4443a a 4*4 444** 33434 33 *344* *## 343 #[email protected] 33*9(user's mental model) 4 94914*3 434a 9344 3439 33 a Ell 3 433 (stereotype) a5- 34 444 4a 34. 434 93 49 349 933 9334a* 444a 9 9 439 33 444 43 4, 33# 3443 34 9#4 4** 94# 4 39 9 4 4*5949 93 4 4 4*3 949 (44, 939) 34 99-5* a#9a, a# 3 99#3 934 504 44 4*3 9*4 *93503. 9 4394* 499 9a% 4 34494 34493 **49 #9 44* 94 #*# 494 34444*9 443504. *44 44*- 9449, 334944. 9994a, ** , ^ . (1094 413) 9 4 71 934*3 BIBLIOGRAPHIC INHUMATION SHEET Performing Org. Sponsoring Org. Report No. Report No. KINS/HR-573 KINS/HR-573 Title : Development of Nuclear Safety Regulation Technology Subtitle : Development of the Safety Regulation Technology for Digital Subtitle Instrumentation and Control System Evaluation of Technical Design of Advanced Information Display (III) Project Manager and Cha, Woo Chang , Kumoh National Institute of Technology _____ Dept.____ Jung Sung Hae, Park, .toon Yong, Kim Nam Cheol(KTT), Researcher and Dept. [Park Soon Hyuk(DAT) Pub. Place Daejeon Pub. Org KINS Pub. Date 2003.3. . Page 310 p Fig. & Table Y<3(o), No( ) Size 21.0 x 29,7 cm 2003 Nuclear Mid-Long Term Research Project Classified Open( o ), Outsidej ), ( )Class topical Project Report Abstract (about 300 words) As the computer technology is highly developed, the mental model of computer users including NPP operators has been changed from analogue display type-based stereotype to digitalized one. Therefore, it is necessary and confident to consider the issues to evaluate system suitability of advanced information display on visual display terminal. This document is intended for providing an updated and expanded set of -interface guidelines that meet the needs of designing digitalized information display by finding the generic guidelines involving information display design issues, and the relationship among the guidelines. The design issues and resolutions from the finding may provide the cues for the designers and evaluators of the specific man machine interfaces of digitalized devices. The design review supporting system for advanced information display(DRcSS-AID) was developed for the practical usage of cvaluators-in-ficld, which implemented with Hangul version guidelines. Subject Keywords Information display, Review guideline, Interface, Design Review (about 10 words) Support SystemB|^S yy